Home

GSW Telnet Server for Windows User Manual

1. Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server www georgiasoftworks com Industry Standard VT220 Key Mapping Key Code Action Key Code Action ESC D Cursor left ESC O P F1 ESC OD Cursor left ESC OO F2 ESC B Cursor down ESC OR F3 ESC OB Cursor down ESC O S F4 ESC A Cursor up ESC M FS ESC OA Cursor up ESC 1 5 e F5 ESC C Cursor right ESC 17 F6 ESC OC Cursor right ESC 1 8 F7 ESC O 1 Keypad STAR ESC L O s F8 ESC O m Keypad MINUS ESC 20 F9 ESC OM Keypad ENTER ESC 2 1 F10 ESC On Keypad DELETE ESC 2 3 F11 ESC 24 F12 ESC O p Keypad 0 INS ESC 25 SHIFT F1 ESC Og Keypad 1 END ESC 26 SHIFT F2 ESC O r Keypad 2 DOWN ESC BEAY SHIFT F3 ESC O s Keypad 3 PAGEDOWN ESC 28 SHIFT F4 ESC O t Keypad 4 LEFT ESC K SHIFT F5 ESC O u Keypad 5 ESC 31 SHIFT F6 ESC Ov Keypad 6 RIGHT ESC 32 SHIFT F7 ESC O w Keypad 7 HOME ESC 3 3o SHIFT F8 ESC O X Keypad 8 UP ESC 3 4 ox SHIFT F9 ESC O y Keypad 9 PAGEUP ESC 35 SHIFT F10 ESC U Page down ESC 3 6 SHIFT F11 ESC 6 Page down ESC 3 7 SHIFT F12 ESC H Home ESC 1 Home ESC V Page up ESC 9 Page up ESC 2 Insert ESC 3 Delete ESC 4 End ESC 2 Tab Backward Table 51 VT220 Industry Standard Key Mapping 289 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Discussion Orphaned NTVDM s and Windows SSH2 Telnet Servers What are NTVDM s and why are they importa
2. Logon Script GSW Client Control Windows i a GSW Client Control m Display Application Title in Window Title Bar Emulations Automatically Terminate Session when User Exits No Display X close button in Windows Caption Bar Encrypt the UTS Telnet Session ory Windows a Power Features Cents iker o Failure Detection Recovery Legacy Ay Domains 1 0 TCP Receive Window Size Default Mode amp Local Users 1 Cto st TT JP IP Address Range 0 PRESAS n1 Grandfathered Users 0 r Emulations User Templates 1 Terminal Emulation Prompt Backspace on Delete Graphics Mode Prompt Two Cells per Unicode Character Presentation Prompt Power Features Team Services Event Logging Printing Transfer Use System Default Session Activity Log Yes Print Method None Swap Use System Default Log Character Translate No Print Queue Poll Interval 5 seconds 4 Syst ere ae eer Pass Through Printing Recover Use System Defaut Trailing FomPeeds Enable Print Buffer Size 500 bytes Left Justify Use tem Default Open Printing Print Command awnPinter A Failure Detection and Recovery Session Saver Process Control Enable Session Saver No Terminate Child Processes when User Exits Yes Reconnect Based on Graceful Termination Script Reconnect Wait Timer minutes A E Je Yo Figu
3. MAD Le of Contents prosas le Sich ts So cease WB hae EE Gis Ss is EEEE ties ew tse ee eee v The Real Pioneers Often copied but never equaled 2 Usser s GUIAS ui Do fae rt Doh Sieg eis E Shel fe A ean ele ne fore 4 Product Description vns de ahs es Seed wie 6 SERVER SOFTWARE ua a he whi Se ew eit eee eels oe eS a a 7 AGEN TD PROCESOS oti det ec IE oe waht gt SP ae ade vss tt ay hie E Bas NaI EL A O ASAS 7 CELTENE SOFTWARE i ss wots coca ose fences Setter Ow lar Sesh a tate SS aes e E ol Oe a ey Oe hale na 7 Georgia SoftWorks UTS Product Configurations o o o oo oo o o 8 GSW WES COMPONENTS OVE RV LEW se toc Sears A did 8 GSW UES TELNET SERVER meira A ve cana Bee di ea ect ene URS we Snes SR NEE ok eee 9 GSW UES SSH SERVER ata ra e it ile RE fae Be oh Sle a ai gt By ir ot Rh ets ees Weg Be Ree 9 Installation Bre Nantes E bite Weed A AE A A E E EE E iia 10 GSW UTS 32 BET AND 64 B UT RDP T LONG coc xi a a At Wee ot eee Sa 10 SERVER INSTALLATION ke tox a i es a a Geena veep Oy eR en dh edie eet A AA ae oe ae 11 REGISTRATTON sa aii TR A EA wae e TI EA REA ate a SS 16 Registration Using a Floating License Hardware Key cccsccccceccscesseesesseeseenseescuseeseesecseesecseescnseeseeseeeeeeeneeeeenaes 16 Floating License Hardware Key Installation Instructions ccoo 18 Uninstall Floating License Hardware Key ccccccccccccsesssss
4. USE AN ALTERNATIVE TELNET PORT te eg eco Sie oobi A ead as See Sea ae SUE 272 CONETGURE MULTIPLE TEGNET PORTS Ai wie epee eve at ee ey ooo et BR elija aise 272 Georgia SoftWorks Java Telnet Applet ooooooooooooo ee eee 274 REQUTRED JAVA SUPPORT ASe a adds a 2715 REOUTRED CER TOPS FOR THE GSU Cin ne ets EAS AS es ete AA a fe 275 REQUINC A FUES A A A A en eeees 275 Client Side Printing All Browsers cccccscsssesssssscnsesscseeseusesseesecaeesecscescssessesecsessecaeescenaeesessenaeeseeaesseesecaeeeenaeets 275 Required Files for Client Side Printing with Internet Explorer 4 0 ccccccccsccesesseeseesseeeenseeseneeseeseeeeeecneeeseseets 275 Client Side Printing Capabilities oirinn nira e A A AVE AAE aa EEE E E TET iR 275 6SIE APPRET PARAMETERS y tt E eS E a ay e a dee wits 276 Optional Patame ter POLET Aoi aa E E E R E EA EE 276 Optional Para mie tere irs OF o iaoe T did di 276 Optional Parameter pass Tord oi series ie td aes O T id GA ea ve vee pd es 276 Optional Parameter d Ona 10 st Dial Bice eles Ba ceca tha edhe Biche elo aisha edhe Bice esha et 276 Optional Pa tam eter ad dressinicsd aot aaa 276 Optional Parameter useTopLeftL cation ccc cece ccc cee ne cess cee cates crac riera in 276 Optional Parameter useMSDOSFtame aneii ann e EEE EE RENEE ER E ERSE 276 Optional Parameter oseBOrdETE a aaea aisia ne EAA Eee cL ENAA asane sE AEE SSE EAS a aiani 277 Optional Parameter
5. Figure 10 UTS Program Group Figure 11 GSW Software Installation Status Figure 12 Floating License Parallel Port Figure 13 Floating License USB Port Figure 14 User Account Control ka Figure 15 SafeNet welcome screen computing space requirements 10 Figure 16 SafeNet welcome screen second part wld Figure 17 SafeNet License Agreement 20 Figure 18 SafeNet License Agreement Read and Accept Figure 19 SafeNet Ready to Install Figure 20 SafeNet Validating Install Figure 21 SafeNet Successful Installation Figure 22 Registration Initial Screen Figure 23 Registration Customer Information Ent Figure 24 Registration Serial Number Entered Figure 25 Registration Successful Figure 26 Registration Complete Figure 27 GSW Client and Operating System Diagram Figure 28 Mobile Client Select Session Figure 29 Mobile Client No Scrollbars Option Figure 30 Mobile Client Automatic Logon Option Figure 31 Switch from Administrator to User Mode Figure 32 Note that the files are already marked as Read Only Figure 33 Switch from Administrator to User Mode Figure 34 Note that the files are already marked as Read Only Figure 35 File copy from PC to Device Figute 36 Falcon 4410 Application Title Figure 37 Falcon 4410 Application Title Figure 38 File Selection Dialog Figure 39 Falcon Clear Win Tab Checkboxes Figure 40 GSW Mobile Client Security Levels
6. oo oooooo oooo 310 SAPCONSOLE MOBILE PRINTING COMPONENTS ooooooooooooononononooo 311 CONETGURATION SDE TAT TS Ciena a E IA EAS AA LS e 18 312 Steps To Configurations A A A A A 312 Install and Configure Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server cooonnnniinninnnnonconcnncianciaccnncrnnrrnnrrnn rana ran 313 Configure SSH2 Telnet Server for Mobile printing cccccccccccecsscesesseesecsseeecuseescuseesesseceeecseesenseeseeaeeeeeeneeeeenaeets 313 Configure each SAPConsole user for local printing ooionnnnninninnnninnncnnoncanccnncnncinrrnr arranca 313 Install and configure SAPLDP on SAPConsole Machine coooinnnnninnnnoncnncannccnncnccncnnnr nana 313 Configure mobile printers MR ide 315 Modify RF device configuration to allow Printing cccccccccccesecsseesceteeseesesseeecueeeeceseeseesecseeseceeeecneeesenseeseeaeeneeaeens 315 Create sapscript form containing barcode label for mobile printer 315 Determine or create R 3 printing logic cccceccccccecssseesceseeseesesseeseciseesceceescesecseeecueceeceseesceseeseesecieeeecnieeseeseeeeeaeeneeatens 316 SAPCONSOLE AND THE GSW ROCKET TERMINAL ENGINE o oooooooooooooo 317 Environment Variables Set by the User ooooocccoooocoococoooo ooo 318 Environment Variables Set by the Telnet SSH Server 320 Registry Variables oi oie week 6 ele hee oe oes a le 321 Configuration Text Files used by the SSH2 Telnet Server 323 GSW UTS Configuration Tool
7. oo ooooocoococnocooonronono eens 324 OVERV TEW oogt oop scat a wh Sites A jet Soe ob EA BS Ge tones a aot Wes Buel ants 325 LAUNCH THE GSW CONFIGURATION TOO Dit ecs s eves ete e A A 326 OTS Configuration Tool ICONS catalina wise pasa led 327 GSW UTS Configuration Tool Right Click Operations cccccccscsesetseesecsseescuseescusetseuseceeecseescnseeseeseceeesnevesenaeets 328 CONFIGURATION TOOL TREE VIEW HIERARCHY ooooooooooooononooonono 330 UTS Configuration Tool ROOt cccccccsscssssescesessceeeseeseeseescseescsecseesecseveccaseescesecseesesseseecaseeeceaenteeseesesseeaeeeeeeeaeets 330 Global per System js A A A e AE sti 331 IN A NN 332 UTS SYSTEM TEMPLATES CONELGURATTON ROOT ese e a a 333 UTS System Template A A A A A A RT A 334 US CF p r SCSSION RI A A A A ES 336 Domains A A A A A E A A 337 Domai Name coito dada cs RARA AA AR Ai 339 Domain USE PA sa 340 LO CMS AS oca eS 341 IS ORAR 342 TACOS RANTE ae tsa duptatelognstsnd E aatan oana iaasa ai 343 Specific IP Addres Y Range IA Rees OES NTs seus A AI 344 Grandfathered USES A a Encalada 345 Grandfathered User Specific cccecceeccessessesscesecesecseeesesecsseceaecaeeesceaeceaecseeeecesecaaecsecseeseeseceaecaeeeeseceaecaeeeeensesaeeaecaeeeeeeaees 346 User Lem plates lt A aidan soundest A A A A tees 347 User Templates Specie rnrn aoar EE Cot OAR tee ERG aoa kh iets oan eee 348 GUT MIGRAT TON FOR EXISTING USERS trial a ad e 349 Common Question
8. Figure 82 Undoing the Share This can be useful when a Team Member is working and needs to temporally join another team member s session for assistance support quality assurance etc and then needs to resume his work Note If you exit the session from either device the truck mount session is closed and the mobile device is returned to its original session as shown below SESSIONS CONNECTIONS DEVICES PERSON Team Services SHARE TOM s NNECTION SESSIO CONNECTIO Figure 83 Exit typed in Share 13 Pressing control x from the truck mount device does not undo TS Sharing 14 Either by typing EXIT or any other means of closing the session 125 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Recover The Team Services Recover operation allows a suspended session to be recovered to another device This differs from the Session Saver Auto Reconnect which allows the same device to recover a suspended session In the diagram below we have two devices and two team members Amos is working but laid his device down to look behind a crate Barry just learning to drive the fork lift ran over Amos s device Amos was in the middle of some critical work and cannot afford to lose his session Team Services can Recover Amos s session to a different device SESSIONS Figure 85 After Accident but before Team Service RECOVER After Amos s device is destroyed his session is suspended but recoverable with TS Barry has
9. per session Bell Count The number of times that the bell will sound Default is1 Figure 196 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Bell Control The Bell Control screen provides configuration of the e Enable Bell Control See page 267 e Bell X See page 267 e Bell Y See page 267 e Bell Character See page 267 e Bell Count See page 267 376 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Protocols 3 UTS Configuration 1 Protocols 5 e Global per system 42 Active Configuration Telnet Automatic Logon a Security Internet Protocol Version Support Read more in the UTS Documentation Failure Detection Recovery Power Features C IPva Emulations Bell Control C IPv6 F Protocols UTS System Templates 2 Pv4 and IPv6 s User per session SSH2 Internet Protocol Version Support C IPy4 C IPy6 IPy4 and IPy6 UTS Protocols Allowed protocols Telnet C SSH2 Telnet and SSH2 Figure 197 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Protocols The Protocols screen provides configuration of e Telnet Internet Protocol Version Support See page 243 e SSH Internet Protocol Version Support See page 244 e UTS Protocols Allowed Protocols See page 245 Note The UTS Service needs to be restarted before
10. Recover Info Cancel e Gosw cuen Le ARE csw Client L A a New View Tools Session E New View Tools Session S Figure 64 Enters Team Services Figure 65 Accept Transfer Mode Figure 66 Enters Team Services Ct r1 x Figure 67 Session 5 is not listed on Ctrl x F1 Note session id is s5 amp presses F2 page 1 so Barry presses F2 E a 5 f GSW Client Barry asks Sam if he can Transfer to his device Sam consents and enters Team B Services Figure 64 and presses F1 to enter Accept Transfer mode Sam s display z Page 2 of 2 shows he is session id s5 Figure 65 0 Barry enters Team Services on his truck mount device Figure 66 and presses F2 to initiate the Transfer operation Figure 67 shows a list of sessions in Accept Transfer mode Barry does not see session s5 so he presses F2 to go to the next ETA page Now he sees session s5 is listed by line number 0 Figure 68 He presses 0 F10 Cancel to complete the transfer to session s5 Sam s session is terminated and Barty s session is on Sam s mobile device and Barry can resume exactly where he left off New iew Tools Session Figure 68 Presses 0 to select sess 120 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Notice that Barry is now on the mobile device and is still using his original session He did not have to log off or get administrative assistance SESSIONS CONNECTIONS DEVICES PERSON Team Services T
11. The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server IS the Industrial Grade SSH2 Telnet Server for your SAPConsole RF Application The reliability consistency performance and features of the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server ate unequaled and requirements for today s commercial RF Applications Works great out the box with SAPConsole Use the 3 SSH2 Telnet Client for your hardware If you have Windows Pocket PC 2002 3 devices then you can use the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client for Pocket PC 2002 3 class machines Easy to install The Georgia SoftWorks Industrial Grade SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows is installed on every continent on the planet except Antarctica You can also obtain the GSW Telnet SSH Server from SAP SAPConsole Experts who can assist with your decision process See our web site for more information This special section contains information on Using the GSW SSH2 Telnet client for Pocket PC 2002 2003 Windows Mobile class devices Page 32 How to Print Labels on a Portable Printer using SAPConsole Page 310 How to automatically launch SAPConsole from a SSH2 Telnet Session Page 308 SAPConsole and the Georgia SoftWorks Rocket Terminal Engine Page 317 SAP User Name displayed when using gs_admin Page 309 SAP Special Bell Processing when used with SAPConsole page 268 303 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 SAPConsole with the GSW Pocket PC 2002 3 SSH2 Telnet Client Configuration Steps for the GSW Pocket PC 2002 3 SSH2 Telnet
12. cnn specifies the count of time slices to release Default is c3 In the case where DOSBoss is already loaded the installed instance will change its parameter s to the new value s h to display the help message Y uninstall the resident part of the program Do not use with c option s show statistics of the resident portion DOSBoss must be loaded first Examples DOSBoss c5 s Set time slices to release to 5 dump statistics DOSBoss r s uninstall the DOSBoss dump statistics DOSBoss h display the help message 105 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Automatic Logon Autologon This feature allows you to pre configure a list of IP addresses that will be able to connect and log on without any User ID Password or Domain prompting when using the Georgia SoffW orks SSH2 Telnet Clients or 3 Party Chents Autologon is useful in many situations however the real power of this feature is realized when coupled with the Session Saver page 144 for fast and easy connection establishment For example when a connection is broken due to a link failure you can reconnect without the time consuming UserID Password and Domain prompts and resume work exactly where you left off before the link failure The configuration procedure for Automatic Logon is different for GSW Clients and Third Party Clients A list of IP address can be associated with either GSW Clients or 3 Party Clients but NOT both Automatic Logon for GSW
13. Beep sound Correct Operation No configuration is required Menu Accelerators Shortcuts In order to provide a more convenient method of configuration for the administration the following accelerator keys are available Note The following Accelerators are available for all CE Net 4 2 devices F2 Save Session Settings F5 File Session Configurations Fo Session Connect F7 Session Settings F8 File Exit Simplified Chinese Font Support The GSW SSH Telnet mobile clients support Simplified Chinese fonts Follow the steps below to setup the GSW mobile client 1 GSW Universal Terminal Server and GSW Mobile Clients must be V7 51 or higher Install the Simplified Chinese font GB True Type on the mobile device 3 Open the GSW SSH Telnet client on the mobile device and navigate to Sessions gt Settings Select the Font tab and select the GB font The Simplified Chinese font does not have to be installed on the Universal Terminal Server Note The GB font will not display in the GSW Desktop SSH Telnet client or Session Administrator GSW engineering has verified correct operation with the GB True Type font 42 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Select Configuration for Session You can create and save a number of Session Configurations settings that you can use as needed The Select Configuration option displays the saved Session Configurations that reside in the same folder as the GSW Mobile client
14. Below is an example of the character sets supported with UTF 8 Encoding when using the Kermit 95 SSH2 Telnet client with the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server 2 LukeXP K 95 I File Edit Actions Help Ol vezza codezooo fio y fuere C PROGRA 1 S5APpe temp plass txt A English I ean eat g and it t hurt me Anglo Saxon Te meg gla eotan ond hit ne hearmad ne Qu b cois J peux bouffer d la vitre es m fa pas mel Spanish Pueto comer vidrio no me haee da o Teelandie Eg pet bordad gler bad mei ir mg ekki Polish Mog ese szk o ji m nie szkodzi Mohu jist sklo neublizi mi Cam yiyebilirim bana zarar dokunmaz ya Paw omagp eva yuaALta ywpig va maBw tinota MOLY CTL CTEKTO OTO Mie te Operar Armenian nul unpiif nous Lb h p udhufighum spGbp Georgian dobsb g sd ws ofe dy Hindi W a a we F Arabic I EN PE i j y 5 E Hebrew NI 3917 38217 FEAT 7 pe 7 Yiddish Y T PS SOP 21227 NI SO 59190297 27 Do Y Vietnamese T i ed th an thay tinh m kh ng hai 5 gt WIA 2 C PROGRA 1 SAPpe sappui SAPCON iof Terminal Screen Locus Local TELNET 35 25 60x25 l Figure 123 Unicode UTF 8 Encoding with 3rd party telnet SSH client 238 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Unicode Character Support with the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client It is easy to use Unicode Character Support with the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client This feature is available on the Windows platforms It is not available on th
15. Default Connection Settings e The file CK_FFS Georgia SoftWorks C753X default gswtc is loaded on startup if found e If the security level is user then the GSW SSH Telnet Client will attempt to connect 4 Application Protection Use the File Security dialog as described in the Application Protection page 66 section 54 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 5 Warm boot the device after you install the client The GSW Mobile Client will automatically launch 6 The GSW Mobile Client is also accessible via System Main Menu GSW Client 7 How to disable the automatic launch of the TE2000 client a Hither delete or rename the file Windows StartUp TE2000 1nk b Run System Main Menu Configuration Utility File Backup 8 BEEP Sound Complete beep operation Extended features available for SAP See below 9 LED Color Blink and beep Association For use with SAP SAPConsole Using the ABAP Code Generate Bell you can associate different light blink colors based on the notify_bell_signal value You can control the number of beeps the color of the led green orange and the number of blinks Example notify bell signal XYZ Where X Number of beeps Y Color of LED 1 green left most light 2 orange right most light Number of blinks Z Each blink is turned on for the same time as the beep 10 Scrolling and Mouse Support The Intermec CK30 CK31 does provide screen scrolling and mouse
16. Location on your PC C Program Files Georgia SoftWorks Universal Telnet and SSH Client for PPC20031CPPC2003 PPC2003_ARM CAB Table 13 GSW PPC 2003 Mobile Client Application CAB File Location When this file is placed in the persistent CAB folder on your device the GSW mobile client application is restored upon reboot The persistent CAB folder location is device manufacturer and model specific PPC 2003 Persistence Instructions Once you have the GSW Mobile Client configuration set for your implementation you should save the configuration Step 1 Install and run the GSW Mobile Client Step 2 Configure the GSW Mobile Client as required for your environment Step 3 When satisfied with the configuration from within the GSW Mobile Client perform the menu item File Save And save the settings in location below My Documents default gswtc 52 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 The file below will automatically be generated upon the Save command My Documents default cab On the device launch the File Manager and copy the configuration and application cab files My Documents default cab Program Files Georgia SoftWorks CPPC2003 cppc2003 cab to the Persistent CAB folder Mark the files as Read Only The persistent folder is device manufacturer and model specific Copy the application cab file defined in the Application Persistence section page 52 to the Persistence folder
17. MAC Media Access Control address of the client computer device gwtn_gsclnt Set to 1 or 0 depending if a GSW or 3 Party client is connected If GSW then the value is 1 otherwise the value is 0 gwtn_hsocket Socket handle of client session gwtn_server_port SSH2 Telnet Port associated with the session page 272 gwtn_tty The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server creates a tty name on a per session basis page 269 320 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Registry Variables Many registry variables exist for provisioning the system Registry variables are an excellent method for the system administrator to configure software as to utilize already learned skills by the system administrator There is no need to learn yet another interface to provision the software Here is a list of the registry variables and a brief description of their use Please see the appropriate section in the User s Guide for complete descriptions All Registry values used by the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows ate stored in the following Registry path For SSH Specific Registry settings please see the GSW SSH Server User s Guide HKEY_LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters ActivityLogFileLength Set the Session Activity Log File Size For use by GSW Tech Support page 201 AgentLogFileL ength Set the Event Log File Size page 202 AllowTelnetWithSSH UTS Protocol selection page 245 AltPre
18. Please set to hexadecimal E ffffff The changes will prevent your RF devices from timing out when left inactive 232 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 TCP Receive Windows Size Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Windows see page 390 Or use legacy style below This parameter provisions the maximum TCP receive windows size on a per session basis The TCP Receive Window specifies the number of bytes a sender may transmit without receiving an acknowledgment In general larger receive windows will improve performance over high delay high bandwidth networks For greatest efficiency the recetve windows should be an even multiple of the TCP Maximum Segment Size MSS Some RF Terminals may experience connectivity problems because they time out before data transmission reaches them In this scenario you may want to reduce the value of the TCP Windows Size parameter Reducing the value of TCP Windows Size causes an acknowledgment for data received to be sent to the RF Terminal sooner A quicker acknowledgment lowers the possibility that the RF Terminal will time out while waiting for an acknowledgment However it also increases the amount of network traffic and causes slower throughput The environment variable for the TCP Window Size is gwtn_tcpwindowsize For example to set the TCP Windows Size to 5000 you would enter set gwtn_tcpwindowsize 5000 in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces are allowed when setti
19. Team Name Unique name assigned to a team Demi Name sae pedi gio User Logon Name Logon name Exactly as specified during logon Table 27 Team Services Strict Teams Using a simple example if you have seven 7 users with three 3 in receiving and four 4 in shipping then you may want to have two strict teams Andy David and Luke are in receiving and Diane Naomi Doug and Brian are in shipping You want to create two teams with the names Receiving and Shipping Team Name User Domain Name User Logon Name receiving highjumpserver 1 andy receiving highjumpserver 1 david receiving highjumpserver 1 luke shipping highjumpserver 1 diane shipping highjumpserver 1 naomi shipping highjumpserver 1 doug shipping highjumpserver 1 brian You would modify the tsgroups txt file by adding the lines as follows receiving highjupserver _ receiving highjupserver 1 david receiving highjupserver 1 luke shipping highjupserver 1 diane shipping highjupserver 1 naomi shipping highjupserver 1 doug shipping highjumpserver 1 brian L andy The F character in the first column designates a comment line NOTE 1 The team name must start in the first column NOTE2 The FP character in the first column designates a comment line 129 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE STRICT TEAMS MULTIPLE COMPANIES IN AN ASP ENVIRONMENT You ate an Application Service Provider and your customers want to use Team Services and
20. if errorlevel 20 goto ERROR _WIN32 if errorlevel 19 goto ERROR _STDIO if errorlevel 18 goto ERROR DISK FULL if errorlevel 3 goto BRROR_SOURCE FILE if errorlevel 2 goto ERROR_USAGE if errorlevel 1 goto ERROR SHARED MEMORY if errorlevel 0 goto ERROR SUCCESS ERROR_ SESSION SUSPENDE l 258 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 echo goto echo goto goto goto goto goto goto goto goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo exit ERROR ABORTED BY USER ERROR SOURCE FILE ERROR_USAGE ERROR SESSION SUSPENDED exit E w ERROR ABORTED BY USI exit ERROR_TCP_SEND ERROR TCP SEND exit ERROR_ SYNC ERROR SYNC exit ERROR_ WIN32 ERROR _WIN32 exit ERROR_STDIO ERROR _ STDIO exit ERROR_ DISK FULL ERROR DISK FULL exit ERROR_SOURCE_FILE exit ERROR USAG exit E R_SHARED_MEMORY ERROR SHARED MEMORY exit R SUCCESS FILI RANSFER SUCCESSFUL E H 2015 NOTE An expanded example template of the above example is located in the SSH2 Telnet Server installation folder 259 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS GS_GET Error Values gs_get exe uses the shell errorlevel variable to report transfer results to the shell The shell errorlevel variable reports transfer result
21. if exist once2 bat do call once2 bat if exist once2 bat do del once2 bat goto start The line gs_clnt exe is the line that launches the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client For SSH the client name is gs_ssh exe Command Line Parameters will be added to this line in the batch file In most cases the GS_SC1nt bat GS_SSH bat files will be modified to provide the parameters in a transparent manner to the user EXAMPLE GEORGIA SOFTWORKS SSH2 TELNET CLIENT COMMAND LINE OPTIONS Host soloman Heartbeat 150 UserName johndoe Password fastest Domain Use the default domain Encryption Yes Client Caption Systeml 7 The SSH client name is gs_ssh exe 76 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The Command Line Parameters used ate H150 hsoloman ujohndoe c pfastest d xSysteml Note The last dot is for the default domain And thus the GS_SClnt bat file will be modified as shown below adding the command line parameters echo off start if exist oncel bat do call oncel bat if exist oncel bat do del oncel bat gs _clnt exe H150 hsoloman ujohndoe c pfastest d xSysteml Qif errorlevel 2 goto copy exit COpy copy gs clnt new gs clnt exe gt gsnull txt if exist once2 bat do call once2 bat if exist once2 bat do del once2 bat goto start 77 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Automatic Update of Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client Always use the matching version of the Georgia SoftW
22. Error Message Displayed File Transfer GS_Put Error Message Suppressed File Transfer GS_Put Send Error Messages to a Fil File Transfer GS_Put Error Message File Open VV Tools 2 sessed oeste VVTools Select Half Duplex VVTools Click Register Mode VVTools Done Click Close oy Open GSW Mobile Client for Win CE Select Settings to enable Vangard Voice support Vangard Voice tab on GSW Mobile Client for Win CE Click the Checkbox to enable Navigate to the Vangard Voice XML file Select the file and click OK Click OK again Be sure to save your GSW Client configuration Select AS a Select GSW configuration file name Click OK Select the GSW Windows Mobile client configuration file Note the Globe Icon 300 Edit the GSW Mobile Client configuration file SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Configuration Host Prompt SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Configuration Options Screen SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Configuration Logon Screen SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Configuration Save Changes SAP GSW SSH2 Telnet Client for PPC 2003 Function Key SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Configuration File Name Prompt SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Select Configuration Prompt SAP User Name displayed in GSW Session Administrator SAPLPD service properties dialog window Sample SPAD transaction screen UTS Configuration Tool Root Root Expanded Global per system expanded Act
23. Figure 219 GUI Tool Grandfathered Users Figure 220 GUI Tool User Templates GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Table of Tables Tablet Floating Ticenses Paralleland USB Ports n a E cad 16 Table 2 GSW SSH Client Platforms Table 3 GSW Mobile Client Setup Program Locations Table 4 GSW Mobile Client Setup Program Locations continued Table 5 Enhanced GSW Mobile Clients ocooconnoononoronorororonononoronoronoronaranaranaranaronos Table 6 Devices qualified with Universal GSW mobile clients for Win CE Table 7 Devices qualified with Universal GSW mobile clients for Win CE continued Table 8 Devices qualified with Universal GSW mobile clients for Win Mobile Table 9 Other devices that operate with the GSW UTS Table 10 GSW Mobile CE NET 4 2 5 0 Client Extended Features ccccssssssessssssessssssesessesesesseseseecees Table 11 GSW Mobile PPC 2003 and Windows Mobile 2003 WM5 Client Extended Features Table 12 GSW Mobile Client Application CAB File Location Table 13 GSW PPC 2003 Mobile Client Application CAB File Location Table 14 GSW Telnet and SSH Client Command Line Options Table 15 Security Pack Table 16 Encryption based on IP Addr Table 17 Speed Pack Table 18 Automatic Logon Specifications gs_auto txt when using GSW Clients Table 19 Automatic Logon Specifications gs_logon txt when using 3 Party Clients Table 20
24. Figure 41 GSW Mobile Client Security Level Selection Figure 42 Host Prompt Figure 43 Logon Prompt Figure 44 SSH Connection Banner Figure 45 Password Prompt Figure 46 Domain Prompt Figure 47 Client Title Bar Caption Figure 48 Automatic GSW Client Upgrade Initiated Figure 49 Automatic Client Upgrade Session Restart Figure 50 Automatic Client Upgrade Host Prompt Figure 51 Answerback and MAC Address environment variable Figure 52 GSW PPC Client Answerback text configuration Figure 53 Session Administrator view FIPS 140 2 sessions Figure 54 Security Restriction based on User ID Count Figure 55 Security Restriction based on Count from IP Address Figure 56 Extraordinary High Session Count Actual Screen Shot Figure 57 Team Services Tasks Menu Figure 58 Accept Mode Display Figure 59 Session Selection Display Figure 60 Unabbreviated Select Session Figure 61 Abbreviated Select Session Page 1 of 2 Figure 62 Abbreviated Select Session Page 2 of 2 Figure 63 Before Team Service TRANSFER xiv GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Figure64 Enters Team Services Ctx LAZ aar A A a taa Figure 65 Accept Transfer Mode F1 Note session id is s5 Figure 66 Enters Team Services Ctrl x amp presses F2 Figure 67 Session s5 is not listed on page 1 so Barry presses F2 Figure 68 Presses 0 to select session S5 Figure 69 After Team Service TRANSFER Figure 70 Before Team
25. Logon Scripting Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Users per session Logon Script see page 352 Or use legacy style below Logon Scripting is an advanced feature that allows the system administrator unmatched control over the user sessions Associated with each User Login is a directory that will execute batch files upon connections Logon Scripting provides automatic execution of the batch file upon the login of the user Logon scripts are often used to map drives establish network connections change directories set environment variables run TSRs and launch applications When an application is launched via a logon script the User is automatically deposited into the application upon successful logon One of two optional batch files can be executed One is named k_start bat and the other is Cc start bat Each batch file provides a unique behavior upon completion of the batch file e k start bat This file runs upon connection and after its completion the user may get the system prompt e c start bat This file runs upon connection and after its completion the session terminates This can be used to restrict the user to a certain application Even if the user executes a control c or something similar this will not allow access other than what is specified in the batch file on the Windows computer Logon Scripts can be defined on a User Global or IP address basis If a logon has IP Address based Logon scripts defined then the
26. Syntax 3 Status 1 Example the GSW GS_ADMIN Command Line Utility Syntax 3 Status 2 197 Example Logon Scripting Automatic Execution of a program upon connection oooconconcccononoconnnonocononnnonnnno 206 Example Logon Scripting User restricted to execute only a specific program ooooonccncccocccoconononnconccnnonononnnns 206 Example Global Logon Scripting Automatic Execution of a program upon connection by ALL users 207 Example IP BASED Logon Scripting oconcoononononnnnocnnnaranonoononenonenon nora no i anna no nare nano nro nene iE 209 Example Enhanced Printing Printing to my local printer when connected across the Internet or RAS 217 Example Enhanced Printing Multiple Client SIDE Printers oononcinnnnicnonnconononccnnoncnnnncon nono nncn nono cn nonconconcno 219 Example Enhanced Printing Override cccccecssesscsseeseesecesecseesecseeecesecasecseesecesecaaecaeeeeeaeeaecaaecaeeeeeeaeenaeens 221 Example Open Printing Print to a client computer s shared printer ooonoccnccnocinociononononnnonocononononnnnnconocnnonnnons 224 Example Open Printing Print to a Network Printer 5 Example Provision TCP Maximum Retransmission Count ccccsssceseessessceecesecsecseeeeceaeceaecseeeeeeaeeaaeeneens 234 Example Utilities Change Password y cscessssaesshesycagiestesa tenses ea on E E a r EEE DEOS Penais 246 Example Utilities Execute program on Client Loc
27. Telnet Incredible client performance Super Strong AES256 supported SSH DOSBoss DOS Application Booster e FIPS 140 2 Compliant Option available SSH e GSW UTS 64 bit platform Edition Optional Connection Restrictions User ID IP Address amp Counts TOD Client or Encryption Type Integrated with Windows Security Elliptic Curve Cryptography support SSH Desktop Client Complete Session Cleanup amp NTVDM Cleanup Graceful Termination of DOS Applications Server Side Inactivity Timer Client Site Heartbeat Upon abnormal termination of Client On Link or Remote Computer Failure Configurable child process termination upon session completion Full DOS Legacy Support MOUSE DOS Character Mode Color Graphics Function Keys Special Characters Automatic Screen Sizing Alt key support for all emulations Works Great with Other Applications Works GREAT with HighJump software Works GREAT w SAPConsole Portable Printing Compatible with GSW RF FormMaker Compatible with VMWare ESX Microsoft HyperV GSW Mobile and Desktop Clients Support Vangard Voice Systems AccuSpeech technology File Transfers via Telnet SSH Change Password Remote Reboot Shutdown Terminate Telnet Sessions Configurable Port Numbers Default Domains Execute commands on the client from a Telnet SSH Session RFC 854 Compliant Connect from 3 Party Clients RF Terminals Wireless Bar Code Scanners
28. Userld and IP Address r Grandfathered Users 4 Graceful Termination Script User Templates 5 Enter Termination Script Process Control Job Control You have the capability to specify thatallchild prcesses started in the session will be terminated E when the session ends All processes associated with the session will be assigned to a windows job object Each session will have a separate job object m a i we 2 Figure 217 GUI Tool Local Users Failure Detection Recovery The Failure Detection and Recovery configuration of e Enable Session Saver See page 144 e Reconnect Based on See page 146 e Graceful Termination Script See page 152 e Process Control See page 156 398 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 IP Address Range Er ES UTS Configuration IP IP Address Range 2 Global per system 5 palpa IP Address Range Summary View H Domains 2 3 o How many GSW UTS IP Address Ranges configurations are defined de Local Users 3 IP IP Address Range 2 IP IP Address Range 2 a There are configurations defined for 2 IP Addresses Ranges ip_internal Grandfathered Users 4 User Templates 5 Open Open GS_IP_Rt txt in Notepad o eater ea as al vv Determine exactly which configuration is used IP Address Range based configurations are another category of User Configura
29. fay Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe ile iew Session roadcast onitor Enter _ Q e ooo ISE ELA hadow S IP Address State TES london 69 716 16 4 Attach 16 6 6 238 Conn ti Ce tea eS nd Message M 10 0 0 230 Conn Sit ee ASES etails D B B Conn chicago 69 716 10 5 B B Conn china 09 16 16 54 24268 B B Conn mexico 69 716 16 54 5816 B B Conn afer london 69 716 16 54 24856 B Conn chicago 69 716 16 54 17688 8 Conn rec 49 16 16 54 16664 F z Conn newyork 69 716 16 54 9316 B B Conn 3 chicago 69 716 16 54 29784 B B Conn ASwap newyork 69716 18 54 24144 B B Conn Swap ship 69 716 18 57 16296 B B Conn AkRfer london 69 716 16 59 36124 B B Conn rec 69716 11 66 16168 16 B B Conn Shr china 69 716 11 63 29612 16 B B Conn mexico 69 16 11 64 9246 7 B B Conn london 69 716 11 64 11546 iz B B Conn Shr 4 Georgia SoftWorks Session Administrator Ver 8 61 42 Userts gt Figure 106 Session Monitor Terminate another session You will be prompted to make sure that you want to terminate the session Graceful Termination page 152 will take place upon terminating the session EX GS SSH Client 10 0 0 5 ile iew ession roadcast User Name Timet Process ID Mon Address State Teams london 11 16 14764 6 6 238 Conn london 11 18 5353 6 0 238 london 11 18 13488 8 6 238 london 11710 13816 0 0 238 Do you really want to terminate the lt doug gt session lt ancel gt lo
30. 6 Yellow E Light Yellow 7 White F Bright White If no argument is given this command restores the color to what it was when CMD EXE started This value either comes from the current console window the T command line switch or from the DefaultColor registry value The COLOR command sets ERRORLEVEL to 1 if an attempt is made to execute the COLOR command with a foreground and background color that are the same Example COLOR fc produces light red on bright white 285 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 I want to change the size of the window The client is set to 80x40 but when it connects to the server it reverts back to 80x25 The mode command will address this issue Mode conf cols c lines n Try putting mode con LINES 40 in your logon script How do I eliminate prompting for the various settings when using 3 party clients Environment and registry variables exist such that when defined will be used as defaults eliminating the prompting for those values when connections are established The environment variables can be set in either Global or Per User Logon Scripts For a list of the environment variable please see the section on 3 party clients page 159 in the User s Guide and or the section on Environment page318 and Registry variables page 321 Can I eliminate prompting for the Host UserID and Password When using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client the Host User ID and Password can be s
31. As in Windows each MS DOS based application can have a program information file PIF If there is no PIF for a particular application the default PIF DDEFAULT PIF is used Because Windows only uses the PIF from the first application started in any given command prompt you may need to take special care in the way you start your applications For example if you design a PIF that allocates some EMS memory it is important that you start the associated application first otherwise the EMS memory may never be allocated You may start a Windows command prompt and then run the MS DOS command MEM to see how much memory you have free Because MEM is another MS DOS based application Windows creates a virtual MS DOS machine probably using _DEFAULT PIF After MEM finishes you start the application you created the PIF for Unfortunately because DEFAULT PIF doesn t instruct Windows to allocate EMS memory your application reports that it can find no EMS memory Rechecking the PIF you created does not solve the problem You need to start another command prompt and then make sure to start your EMS requiring application first before you start any other MS DOS based applications There is one more difference to be aware of each PIF contains a pointer to AUTOEXEC and CONFIG files Usually these default to the Windows versions AUTOEXEC NT and CONFIG NT If you want to change environment variables for your MS DOS based applications you need to point their PIFs
32. Export Import Figure 173 Local User Rename Figure 175 Grandfathered User Delete The same process is used to move a Grandfathered User to a Domain Name User Registry Setting Migration Registry settings apply to the Global per system configuration and as such there is no required migration Environment Variable Migration Environment variable settings apply to the User per session configuration and show up in as part of the Grandfathered Users configuration They are migrated as described in the Logon Script Migration see page 350 47 Logon scripts created manually in post gui versions will also show up in the Grandfathered Users 350 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Scripts Folders The UTS installation folder contains a folder named scripts This folder and its subfolders contain batch files scripts for user sessions Pre GUI versions of the UTS used subfolders with the User Name to associate the script with the user Post GUI versions have three subfolders in the script folder e DomainUsers e LocalUsers e Templates DOMAIN USERS The DomainUsers folder may contain a default configuration if configured for all domains Additionally subfolders will exist with the name of any domain names configured Each Domain Name folder may contain a default configuration if configured for all users within that domain name Additionally subfolders will exist with the name of each user configured for
33. Figure 52 GSW PPC Client Answerback text configuration 83 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Desktop Keyboard Macros Keyboard macros are a powerful and time saving feature that lets the administrator define custom keys on the device when the session is actives Macros ate used for remapping Function keys F1 F12 to keystroke sequences Macros definitions have the form Function Key Keystroke Sequence or Function Key shift ctrl alt Keystroke Sequence Where Function Key is F1 through F12 and shift ctrl alt This is optional extended syntax that provides the capability to specify the Shi ft Ctrl and Alt key states You may want to have a Shift Flora Ctrl Fl Shift Alt F2 etc and the syntax of Shift Ctrl Al1t isa fast way to specify if the key is pressed To indicate a key is pressed is by using the value 1 and so specify that it is not pressed is to use the value 0 For example 1 0 0 specifies that the SHIFT key is pressed but not the CTRL or ALT 0 1 0 specifies that the CTRL key is pressed but not the SHIFT or ALT 0 0 1 specifies that the ALT key is pressed but not the SHIFT or CTRL Or combinations can be specified 1 1 0 specifies that the SHIFT key and CTRL keys are pressed but not the ALT Whitespace is optional See the example in the configuration section below for detailed examples ana Keystroke Sequence follows the same format as the GSW Termination strings page 152 The keys that can b
34. HAT ARE ORPHANED gt NTVDM S oa ese poikain ia wees 290 AY TS TRES A CONCERN Tee Sensi dso Side ie ol we are Sesh A dd eee eee ee 38 290 VHAT TYPES OF EVENTS CAUSE ORPHANED NTVDM WHEN USING SSH2 TELNET 290 VHAT CAN BE DONE ABOUT ORPHANED NTVDM S ooooo ooooooooooonoooo 291 Discussion PIFs and your MS DOS application s Performance 292 Vangard Voice Systems AccuSpeech with the GSW UTS 294 GSW MOBILE CLIENT CONFIGURATION FOR VANGARD VOICE ACCUSPEECH 295 Windows CE Configuration smc di tdi EE IEEE TEESE EES 295 Windows Mobile Configurations iii nai hu un eae r ee SR ee as 299 GSW DESKTOP CLIENT CONFIGURATION FOR VANGARD VOICE ACCUSPEECH 301 SAPConsole with the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet SSH Server 303 SAPCONSOLE WITH THE GSW POCKET PC 2002 3 SSH2 TELNET CLIENT 304 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Configuration Steps for the GSW Pocket PC 2002 3 SSH2 Telnet Client ccecce 304 HOW TO AUTOMATICALLY LAUNCH SAPCONSOLE FROM A SSH2 TELNET SESSION 308 SAP USER NAME DISPLAYED IN GSW SESSION ADMINISTRATOR 309 Mobile Device Printing with SAPConsole
35. In this document GSW Team Services is often abbreviated TS The Team Services Transfer Swap and Share operations requires the team member who originates the operation first communicate with the 2 team member in order to request that the 2 team member put their device session in the proper Team Service Accept mode for the operation The 2 team member must affirm that they are willing to accept a Transfer Swap or Share This way the 2 team member s session is not unknowingly altered without expressly consenting to the operation The 2 team member initiates Team Services and enters the Accept Mode for the specific Team Service to consent to the operation This is done by pressing the corresponding function key for the Team Service operation Session Identification information is displayed and can be quickly communicated to the originating team member The originating team member then enters Team Services selects the Team Service operation identifies the 2 team member s session and completes the operation The entire process can take less than 60 seconds In summary the Transfer Swap and Share Team Service operations each have an Accept Mode and a Team Services Operation The Recover Team Service does not have an Accept Mode You could consider a suspended session as consenting by default The Transfer Swap and Share Team Service general procedural flow is 1 One team member originator requests a 2 team member to
36. The file gs 1 ip txt is used for configuration of the IP Address Count Restrictions The rules are simple for setting up the gs_1 ip txt file Ttis a text file The character is the comment character Each entry must start in the first column Each entry consists of the IP Address or IP Address Range and the Count The IP Address and the Count are separated by a single space Following is an example for using the gs_1 ip txt file EXAMPLE IP ADDRESS COUNT RESTRICTION ACME ASP is an Application Service Provider where they have a Medical Database Lookup Application MDLA located on a server at their headquarters They sell access to the MDLA to companies where pricing is based on the number simultaneous connections Due to the sensitive nature of Medical information access is only granted from specific locations that can be associated with known IP Addresses In addition each User has access to private medical information based on their User ID The typical ACME customer may have 300 users that need access to the MDLA but no more than 20 will be using the system at any given time Currently AMCE has sold access to the MDLA to four companies Two companies purchased twenty connections each the remaining two companies purchased twenty five connections each ACME only wants to restrict each company to the number of sessions that they have purchased 99 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The ACME System Administrator
37. This can be done through the Windows Control Panel If this does not help you must reboot the server I get extra form feeds when printing from certain applications when using the Enhanced Print mode What can I do The client side printing option may help suppress additional form feeds Please see page 76 How can I print to Portable Printers when I am using SAPConsole Using the GSW True Client Side Printing you CAN print to portable printers when in SAPConsole Please see page 303 Why do my print jobs print on somebody else s printer It is required that each user be logged in only once for the Enhanced Open and Pass through Print methods to operate correctly That means that each workstation RF device must use a different User Id when connecting to the server When a print job for one of these print methods is redirected the redirection is based on the owner of the print job The owner is the same as the User Id thus if more than one User Id is connected then the print job is redirect and the destination selected will at best be random 287 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 I want to modify the polling interval that the gs_agent polls the GwinPrinerx print queues Is this possible Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Power Features Printing see page 389 Or use legacy style below Yes You may set the environment variable gwtn_ local print poll interval in the logon script on a pet user basis set gwtn local
38. What types of events cause orphaned NTVDM when using SSH2 Telnet Any abnormal terminal of a client can cause an orphaned NTVDM One easy way to create an NIVDM with SSH2 Telnet simply to power off the Client PC while running a DOS program via SSH2 Telnet For example 1 SSH2 Telnet from a remote Client PC to a Windows System Run a DOS application Such as Edit Norton Commander etc At this point a NIVDM is created You can observe this on the SSH2 Telnet Server by a Typing Ctrl Alt Delete on the server and select the Task List 1 Select processes and observer the NTVDM that was created 3 Power down the Client PC 290 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 4 On the SSH2 Telnet Server observe that the NTVDM is still running In many cases you will notice that after a few minutes the processing percentage will increase to 90 Having multiple SSH2 Telnet sessions connected running DOS applications when an abnormal termination occurs can exacerbate this problem Frequent scenarios for abnormal terminations 1 9 Power Failure for Client PC 1 Power Hit in building 2 Breaker trip Client PC or Power strip accidentally unplugged Client PC powered down without properly exiting the DOS application Client PC OS locks up Link Failure What can be done about Orphaned NTVDM s The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows automatically provides advanced detection and elimination for orphaned NTVDM s Unlike others t
39. day for example next Thursday If date is omitted the current day of the month is assumed command Is the Windows NT command or batch program to be run al Utility for Windows 2000 Windows 2000 provides a graphical scheduling Wizard that gives you the options of scheduling tasks to run one time only daily weekly or monthly either when your computer boots up or whenever you log on The Wizard also gives you the option of setting a time for the program to start To run the Windows 2000 scheduling Wizard Step 1 Click on Start Settings and then Control Panel Step 2 Double click on Scheduled Tasks Step 3 Double click on Add Scheduled Task to add a new task Step 4 Windows 2000 will run the Scheduled Task Wizard The Wizard will walk you through scheduling a program to run Note 1 Go to the Advanced Properties to specify the command line arguments 193 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Note 2 This utility also exists on Windows XP The path to open the Wizard is slightly different Table 42 GSW Broadcast Command Utility Example Scheduling Programs Exiting the Session Administrator You may exit the Session Administrator either by the File then Exit Menu item or depressing the lt ESC gt key Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe File ion Figure 118 Session Administrator Exiting 194 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GS_ADMIN Command Line Options M
40. echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto exit goto ERROR _UNEXP exit R WAIT ERROR WAIT exit R_OS2 ERROR_OS2 exit R_OS1 ERROR_OS1 exit R SET EVENT ECTED NOTIFICATION ERROR SET EVENT exit R ABANDONED exit R GET MUTEX ERROR ABANDONED ERROR GET MUTEX exit exit ERROR_INVAL exit ERROR_INFO_ exit R_SYNC_OBJECTS ERROR_SYNC_OBJECTS R_ INVALID INFO SLOT ID INFO SLOT R INFO SLOT ENV SLOT ENV R TARGET FILE T exit R USAGE ERROR USAG exit E ERROR_TARGET_FIL R SHARED MEMORY exit R SUCCESS ERROR_SUCCE begin T begin ERROR SHARED MEMORY 262 JANUARY 27 2015 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Launch GUI Application on Server Launch GUI applications on the server s desktop from a SSH2 Telnet session using the new utilities gs gui exeandgs engui exe Note Launched GUI applications do NOT display on the SSH2 Telnet session To launch a GUI application on the server 1 Run gs_engu exe on the desktop Use the RUN command on the start button or open a command shell This cannot be done via SSH2 Telnet it must be Run on the server by the current interactive user 2 To launch a GUI applicatio
41. gs_clnt exe a if errorlevel 2 goto copy exit copy copy gs_clnt new gs_clnt exe gt gsnull txt if exist once2 bat do call once2 bat if exist once2 bat do del once2 bat goto start Third Party GSW Desktop Client GSW Mobile Client Client Add the command line parameter Check the Box in the configuration options a when initiating the client page 73 This tells the screen page 45 client not to send logon information to the server Example in the GS_SClnt bat file echo off start y Qif exist oncel bat do call inn Session ty 4 ong iar ees Connection Security 4 D Required Answerback Heartbeat interval fo Automatic logon fv Unicode session Allow suspend Stay connected No scrollbars OXO Table 21 Automatic Logon Client Side Configuration 109 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW UTS x64 Native 64 Bit Georgia SoftWorks created a native build optimized for 64 bit platforms Indeed many 32 bit applications will run on a 64 bit platform including the standard GSW UTS but our philosophy of continuous improvement demands that we put forth the effort to make the software native on the powerful 64 bit platform This eliminates potential compatibility issues of non native code running while taking full advantage of the performance and addressing opportunities afforded by the 64 bit platform Es Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS Admin exe i ile iew essi
42. lt PARAM NAME useBoldFont value True False gt Optional Parameter bkgColor Description Background color for the area around the GSJC Window Default 000080 This is blue Syntax lt PARAM NAME bkgColor value 000080 gt The format is RRGGBB in hex Optional Parameter HBTime Description Heartbeat Time in seconds see page 151 Default 20 Syntax lt PARAM NAME HBTime value 20 gt Optional Parameter useEncryption Description Enables Encryption and forces Login Encryption see page 90 Default FALSE Syntax lt PARAM NAME useEncryption value true gt Additionally Complete Date Stream Encryption can be enabled via the logon scripts as per our standard method see page 88 Optional Parameter printCommand Description Specifies the print command used by the client computer in conjunction with Enhanced printing Default NT Systems will use print exe Non NT systems will use java printing through the graphics engine Syntax lt PARAM NAME printCommand value command com C copy lpt1 gt the is a wildcard which will be replaced during printing by the actual print file name The above example assumes a printer on Iptl The example works on Win95 98 Please see the Enhanced printing Page 213 documentation for further examples and details Provisioning of the User Password and Domain parameters by the applet will eliminate prompting for these values by the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server 277 GEORGIA
43. prey nitralization ini li tion acters to the 3 client E el ontrol A text file is used for specifying the initialization Protocols i UISS Templates Q characters to send The name of the global file is Eg stan Templates 7 gs_tinit txt and is installed in the GSW UTS root User per session directory Each row in the file specifies up to ten characters to send to the 3 party client The specifications of the characters are byte values in hexadecimal each separated by a single space The character in the first column designates a comment line Figure 195 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Terminal Initialization The Emulations Terminal Initialization screen allows viewing editing of the relevant text files e Terminal Initialization See page 172 375 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Bell Control 144 Bell Control Global per system 42 Active Configuration Be ll Control Automatic Logon Security Bell Coordinates Character and Count Read more in the UTS Documentation Failure Detection Recovery Bell X is the column of the bell character Default is oxfffffftf harness which makes it inactive Bell Control jd rra Bell Y is the row of the bell character Default is oxffffffff which makes it inactive UTS System T lates 2 ura Bell Character Value of the bell character default is 0x87 s User
44. 0 screen pixels high Figure 125 Unicode GSW Client Select Font You may need to add fonts to your Command Prompt properties Fonts must meet certain criteria to be available in the Command Prompt window Details on adding fonts to the Command Session Command Prompt can be found by reviewing Microsoft Knowledge Base article KB247815 If we want to add the Everson Mono Terminal to the Command Prompt we follow the instructions as specified in the Knowledge Base The next time we view the Command Prompt Properties we observe that the Everson Mono Terminal is now available for selection After selecting the Everson Mono Terminal font the following text can be displayed 240 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 D gsw_server Products Telnet Test_Dev Images gt type glassgsw txt English I can eat glass and it doesn t hurt me Anglo Saxon Ic meg gles eotan ond hit ne hearmiad me Qu b cois J peux bouffer d la vitre ca m fa pas mal Spanish Puedo comer vidrio no me hace da o Icelandic Eg get bordad gler bad meidir mig ekki Mog je szk o i mi nie szkodzi Mohu j st sklo neubl mi Turkish Cam yiyebilirim bana zarar dokunmaz Greek Mnopa va w onacu va yuGALG xwpic va n w tinota Russian A mory ecTb CTeKNO STO MHe He BpegnT Armenian 4p w wywhh newb l p sh whhwighum p bp 3InN6 gt b 3359 p a IA3N35 tol stay ede Idd idicte y ost dl ssl poe RI IFF 383413 ADI 1771 38 arg 3 Yidd
45. 16 6 6 Conn Shr Sort ID a 16 6 6 Conn J Sort on 1 16 6 6 Conn Shr Sort P 1 10 0 0 Conn Sort tate 5 180 0 0 3 Conn Sort S Task 5 10 989 08 38 Conn Shr 6 108 0 0 3 Conn Shr a 6 10 8 0 253 Conn Figure 95 Team Services Session Administrator Sort 141 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Team Services Troubleshooting There are just a few items to note when troubleshooting Team Services e When you ate performing Team Services Transfer Swap or Share and you ate in the menu where you select the session Only sessions in the appropriate Accept Mode ate displayed For example for Transfer only sessions in Accept Transfer Mode are displayed For Swap only sessions in Accept Swap Mode are displayed etc e When you ate performing Team Services Recover and you are in the menu where you select the session to recover Only suspended sessions are displayed e Check that the Team Services Registry settings ate correct e Check that the logon script s Team Service environment variables are correct There are some session configuration items that must be the same for sessions participating in Team Services e The SSH settings must be the same SSH in use or not in use e GSW Encryption settings must be the same GSW Encryption in use or not in use e FIPS settings must be the same FIPS in use or FIPS not in use Additionally some configuration items and or requirements for sessions participating in specific Team Ser
46. 1997 2669 Georgia SoftWorks All rights reserved host Figure 50 Automatic Client Upgrade Host Prompt Developer Tip If a client side application must launch the Georgia SoftWorks Client then the application should check the return code from the call to gs_clnt exe gs_ssh exe If the rerun code is two 2 then the client and server versions ate different and newer client was copied to the file gs_clnt new It should be renamed and copied to gs_clnt exe gs_ssh exe and then launched 80 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Application Title Display Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool See Client Control page 391 Or use legacy style below You may want the Application Title to display in the title bar of the Georgia SoftWorks Client Windows Title This capability is disabled by default To enable you should set the gwtn_show_console_title environment variable in your logon script Learn more about logon scripts on page 391 The environment variable for displaying the Application Title in the Georgia SoftWorks Client Window title bat is gwtn_show_console_title Possible values are Y or N or y or n Y Enable the display of the application title in the Georgia SoftWorks Client Window Title N Disable the display of the application title in the Georgia SoftWorks Client Window Title default For example to enable the display of the Application Title in the Georgia SoftWorks Client you would enter set gwtn_show_ cons
47. 2 Hgs User per session Create a virtual printer on the server In creating a Virtual Printer the key information is the Printer Name the Share Name and the Port Up to nine 9 Virtual Printers may be defined on the server This will allow up to nine 9 printers to be used for each client A Printer Index is used to identify and correlate the various printer setups The printer indexes are 1 2 through 9 For the Virtual Printer Setup the Printer Name and Share Name require printer indexes The following setup is for a single printer Printer Index 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen Select Settings then printers Double click on Add Printer The add printer window opens Select My Computer and Click on Next Select one of the unused lpt or com ports Do NOT enable print pooling Click Next From the Manufactures list select Generic From the Printers select Generic Text Only Click Next Name your printer GwtnPrinter1 NOTE This name is required Click Next Select Shared and name the printer GwtnPrinterShare1 NOTE This name is required Click Next After the printer is created double click on the printer icon Pause the printer by selecting the menu item Printer and selecting Pause Printer This printer must remain paused at all times This printer cannot be used by any other service except Georgia SS PION Pe be m e E Figure 186 GSW UTS GUI Active Configu
48. 27 2015 scmddelay This specifies the Command Output Display Delay time Milliseconds for the results data displayed in the gs_clnt exe gs_ssh exe window as a result of executing a Client Side Command page 248 from within a telnet or SSH session A primary function of the Client software is to display and refresh the Telnet or SSH Session Window based on Servet Output So when a Client Side Command displays results in the Session Window a time is specified for the display of the Client Side Command Output in the gs_clnt exe gs_ssh exe window before the display of server side data is resumed The default is 2000 ms two seconds uUserName Specifies the name of the User U Enable Unicode character processing for input and output See page 239 vPathXMLFile Enable Vangard Voice specifies path to Vangard XML file See page 301 xClient Caption String The User has additional control over the caption text displayed in the client window when using the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet or SSH Client This helps identify specific sessions especially when multiple sessions are opened simultaneously No spaces are allows in the Client Caption string See example on next page for further details zZ Disable the Automatic Update of the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet or SSH Client Table 14 GSW Telnet and SSH Client Command Line Options 74 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE GEORGIA SOFTWORKS CLIENT CAPTION STRING xClien
49. 28 Team Services Registry Parameters Sizes and Values These default settings can be overridden using environment variables in global or per user logon scripts For example you may want to have Team Services disabled except for certain users This can be accomplished by disabling each Team Service with Registry parameters and then overriding them for specific users in their logon scripts The environment variables for Team Services are shown below Transfer gwtn ts enable transfer Y or N or y or n Swap gwtn ts enable swap Yon Np on My or tn Share gwtn ts enable share Y or N or y or n Recovery gwtn ts enable recovery Y or N or y or n ARA 8 f Enter TS hot key Left Justify TS Dialog Text gwtn_ts left justify Y or N or y or n 15 Team Services can allow Team Members to observe other Team Members Sessions e g Share GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Table 29 Team Services Environment Variables Team Services Recovery Team Services Recovery works together with Session Saver and thus Session Saver must be configured for Team Services Recovery to operate The variable TSEnableRecovery is a registry key value This registry key sets the default behavior for all users Q disables Team Services Recovery for all users 1 enables Team Services Recovery for all users The key is TSEnableRecovery DWORD HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services
50. A A ites Seca a casted 378 UTS System Template ANGividdls A A e ai 379 USER PER SESSION CONFIGURATION FEATURES 2 ccs ce die bee be ee css 380 OVEPVICWais caareicciadeets cassia ii tati tiles 380 Default Configurations alii it anida tots e a eed oracles ease 382 DOMAINS A dd ltd 384 Domain Nam essun aaae e ia ads 385 Domain Name User and Summary eiei hyeena e ae A i e ae a a de ea a eia aS 386 Local IS CVS oes E E AS 387 EAN NA AER 1111TA A E ENEE EEN ENEE 388 Local User Lopon SCHIP leai ade id rca ls 389 Toc l User z Windows ata iii iii tits 390 Local User GSW Client Controlan ts tira 391 Local User EMuldilONS ii A A in deed Eales lali aaea tee Weis 392 LOCAL USER LEE ii bacebacebeshed aae saN ena inris 393 Local User Power Features SUMIMAry cccccccesccsssscesesseesecnseescusesscseeseesecesecaceeseesesseesecseseecaeeeeeaeeseeaeeaeeaeens 394 Local User Power Features Printing c cccccccccsccsseecevesseesesseeseenseeecnseesceseeseeseceeeeaeeesenseeseeaeseeeecnseesenieeseeaeeeeatens 395 Local User Power Features Team ServiCes ccccccccsccesesscsseesseeecnseesenseeseesecusseecceesceseeseesesueseecnseesenseeseeaeeeeatens 396 Local User Power Features Event Logging c cccccccccsscsssseceeseeseeseeseeeceeeecseescesecseeseseeecseeeseecnesesenseeeeeaeeeeatens 397 Local User Failure Detection ReCOvery c cccccccsseesceveseesecseenecuteeecuceeseusesseesecueseeceeesceseeseeaeseeecnsseseeseeseeaeeneeatens
51. ALL SSH2 Telnet sessions Syntax 3 is used to obtain a snapshot of the SSH2 Telnet server status information Note Syntax formats not listed have undetermined results 195 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Syntax 1 Monitoring Shadowing Terminating a specific session Choose the operation monitor shadow terminate for the SSH2 Telnet session Next select one of the following pPID iIP uUser to Filter the session pPID Filter based on Process 1D PID Where PID is the Process Id of the desired session Each session will have a unique process id OR 11P Filter based on the IP address uUser Filter based on the User Name Note You may use either or both of the IP Address and User Name filter arguments EXAMPLE THE GSW GS_ADMIN COMMAND LINE UTILITY SYNTAX 1 MONITOR The following is the syntax to use the GS_ADMIN command line utility to launch the Session Monitor for User Doug GS ADMIN m uDoug EXAMPLE THE GSW GS_ADMIN COMMAND LINE UTILITY SYNTAX 1 SHADOW The following is the syntax to use the GS_ADMIN command line utility to launch the Session Shadowing for for User david with IP Address 10 110 244 103 GS_ ADMIN s udavid i10 110 244 103 EXAMPLE THE GSW GS_ADMIN COMMAND LINE UTILITY SYNTAX 1 TERMINATE The following is the syntax to use the GS_ADMIN command line utility to terminate Session with user name Doug GS_ADMIN t uDoug 196 GEORGIA S
52. Automatic Logon Configuration Files Table 21 Automatic Logon Client Side Configuration Table 22 Teams Services Function Keys Table 23 Team Services Tasks Menu Abbreviations Table 24 Team Services Accept Mode Abbreviations Table 25 Team Services Select Session Display Table 26 Team Services Menu Table 27 Team Services Strict Teams Table 28 Team Services Registry Parameters Sizes and Value Table 29 Team Services Environment Variables Table 30 Team Services Left Justify Table 31 Virtual Key Codes Table 32 Virtual Key Codes continued Table 33 Team Services State Table Table 34 Failure Recovery Pack Table 35 Legacy Pack Table 36 Emulation Pack Table 37 Graphics option choices Table 38 Alt Prefix values Table 39 Color Re Mapping Table 40 All Possible Color Codes Table 41 Power Features Pack Table 42 GSW Broadcast Command Utility Example Scheduling Programs Table 43 GSW Event Log File Format Table 44 Defined Log Event o Table 45 IP Based Logon Scripting Information Table Table 46 Compatibility Pack ooconoammmmmmmmmm m Table 47 Registry Key Values for UTS Protocol Table Table 48 Utility Pack Table 49 GS_PUT Error Levels Table 50 GS_GET Error Levels Table 51 VI220 Industry Standard Key Oi ceba es Table 52 UTS Configuration Tool Global Configuration Right Click Operations Table 53 UTS Configurat
53. Cancel Apply Help Figure 208 GUI Tool Local User Logon Script The Logon Script provides configuration for e Home Folder See page 286 e Automatically Terminate Session when User Exits Application See page 205 and page 95 and allows editing of the batch text file e Logon Script Batch File See page 205 389 Failure Detection Recovery fy Pat ca a Tom 4P IP Address Range 2 Grandfathered Users 0 User Templates 5 Custom Shell Custom Shell Path m GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Local User Windows GSW UTS Configuration Ver 1 03 0015 s n 3 UTS Configuration e Windows Global per system 8 s User per session User Configuration Local User Bill 6 42 default config Windows tions E My Domains 2 3 Local Users 3 r User Profile i ob il Create User Profile in the Registry if it is missing this is the Create User Profile Registry Hive where user specific registry settings are kept Logon Script Hae ee ee This parameter provisions the maximum TCP receive windows 0 GS Cee Content Use Windows default IM size ona per session basis The TCP Receive Window specifies the Emulations number of bytes a sender may transmit without receiving an oo Legacy Size acknowledgment In general larger receive windows will improve 4 4 Power Features performance over high
54. Client window Title defau t For example to disable the display of the x in the Georgia SoftWorks Desktop Client you would enter set gwtn_clnt_ no x Y in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example set gwtn_clnt_no x Y is correct set gwtn_clnt_no x Y isnot correct 82 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Answerback Text The User can pass a text string up to 20 characters from the client to the server when connecting The received text string is stored the environment gwtn_answerback The command line option pText specifies a text string that is passed to the server For Example the command line parameter bdeltal87 would be available on the server in the environment variable gwtn_answerback The example below shows both the client MAC address and the Answerback text C tenprecho gutn_c lient_nacz 1B 28 ED 28 CF C2 Citenprecho Ygutn_ansuerbac kx deltai87 Ciutenp gt Figure 51 Answerback and MAC Address environment vatiable GSW Mobile Device Windows Mobile and Windows CE NET V4 2 5 0 clients configuration Below is a screen shot of the GSW Mobile Device configuration for the Answerback text s ETA Answerback delta187 ES GSW Chent Heartbeat interval so Automatic logon _ Unicode session w Font ZRNO ANREAR CaP a s d t a nTi k11 snnt z c v o n m T ctilaal 4 E Y
55. Clients is configured using the gs_auto txt file Automatic Logon for Third Party Clients is configured using the gs_logon txt file The format of the files is exactly the same but it is important to remember which files are used for each client type Note An IP address cannot be associated with both a GSW Client and a Third Party Client No overlap between IP Address ranges defined inthe gs _auto txt and gs logon txt is allowed Unpredictable results will occur Autologon with GSW Clients Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Automatic Logon see page 355 Or use legacy style below For correct operation of the AutoLogon feature when using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client two steps must occur First the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet SSH Client must be enabled for automatic logon e GSW Desktop Clients Automatic Logon is enabled using the command line parameter when initiating the client See page 73 e GSW Mobile Clients Automatic Logon is enabled by checking the Autologon checkbox on the Session Settings Session menu options see page 45 Second a server side configuration text file is used for specifying the IP address that will AutoLogon The name of the file for the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client is gs_auto txt and is installed in the GSW UTS Root Directory All Clients connecting with IP addresses specified in the gs_auto txt file must be GSW Clients AND the IP Addresses CAN NOT also be used in the 3 Pa
56. Data Stream encryption can be enabled on a global or a per user basis with undetectable performance loss This is useful if users are running accounting banking medical or other applications that contain sensitive data Logon only encryption may also be employed This protects User Ids Passwords and other logon data The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server is integrated with Windows Security All Windows security concepts apply The Georgia SoftWorks UTS allows the system administrator to optionally restrict telnet access based on User ID or IP address These are additional security measures above the normal Windows secutity The system administrator can specify the users that are allowed to logon via telnet Security Pack Configurable GSW Clients 3 Party Client Encrypted Data Stream Telnet Server Specific Yes Yes No Encrypted Data Stream Strong 128 Bit Yes Yes No Telnet Server Specific Encryption Enable or Disable based on IP Address Yes Yes Telnet Specific SSH Strong Encryption AES 256 Yes Yes Yes End to End Authentication and Data Stream GSW SSH Server Encrypted Logon Session Telnet Server Specific Yes Yes No FIPS 140 2 Compliant Option SSH Server Yes Yes No AES 256 Encrypted Logon Session SSH Server Yes Yes Yes Connection Restrictions User Id Yes Yes Yes IP Address Yes Yes Yes 3 Party Clients Yes Yes Yes Connec
57. For example to enable long format session logging set gwtn_enable session log Y in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables set gwtn_enable session log Y is correct set gwtn_enable session _ log Y isnot correct 203 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enable Disable International Character Translation Logging For Third Party Clients Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Power Features Event Logging see page 397 Or use legacy style below An environment variable is available on User per session basis to enable disable International character translation of UTS 8 GB2312 and Big5 logging This adds diagnostic information to the log file gs_agnt log and is available for diagnostic purposes by GSW Technical support It is disabled by default The environment variable for International Character Translation logging is gwtn_log_char_xlat in the Logon Script Possible values are Y or N or y or n Y Enable International Character Translation Logging N Disable International Character Translation Logging Default For example to enable International Character Translation Diagnostic Data Logging set gwtn_log char xlat Y in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces are allowed when setting environment variables set gwtn_log char xlat Y is correct set gwtn_log char xlat y is notcortect 204 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015
58. GS_Tnet Parameters TSEnableRecoverty An environment variable may be set on either a Global or Per User basis to override the default configuration specified by the Registry parameters described above The environment variable for Team Services Recovety is gwtn ts enable recovery Possible values are Y or N or y or n This allows you to have a set of users that can have different Team Services privileges than specified in the Registry key value NOTE No spaces are allowed when setting environment variables For example To enable Team Services Recovery the following line should be present in the user s logon script set gwtn_ts enable recovery Y is correct set gwtn_ts enable recovery Y is not correct 133 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Team Services Transfer The variable TSEnableTransfer isa registry key value This registry key sets the default behavior for all users 0O disables Team Services Transfer for all users 1 enables Team Services Transfer fot all users The key is TSEnableTransfer DWORD HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CutrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters T SEnable Transfer An environment variable may be set on either a Global or Per User basis to override the default configuration specified by the Registry parameters described above The environment variable for Team Services Transfer is gwtn ts enable transfer Possible values ate Y or N or y or n This allows you to h
59. GUI Root Ol yt oo tty pp Active Global Configuration All Global Templates Global Template Y Y Y Y x Property Page Y gt Si Sa SS Table 52 UTS Configuration Tool Global Configuration Right Click Operations 328 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS User per session Right Click Operations ICON e User per session Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New JANUARY 27 Add Domain Add User Create Default Configuration Y 2015 Contain Property Pages y All Domains Y Y a Specific Domain Domain User 18 amp vvl vvv y 11 All Local Users 12 Local User Default Configuration ss 14 IP All IP Address Ranges 15 IP IP Address Range 4 E gt gt Se Se SS 16 17 All Grandfathered Users Grandfathered User 18 e All User Templates 19 LL User Template Property Page Y Y gt Sa Se SS Y Y Y Table 53 UTS Configuration Tool User Configuration Right Click Operations 329 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Configuration Tool Tree View Hierarchy The root of the UTS Configuration tool is identified below in Figure 162 E UTS Configuration Gl
60. GUI Tool Local User Summary es Bill User Configuration User Per Session Coi tion Sum View r Logon Script Home Folder Automatically Terminate Session when User Exits m GSW Client Control Display Application Title in Window Title Bar Display X close button in Windows Caption Bar Encrypt the UTS Telnet Session No r Windows Create User Profile TCP Receive Window Size Yes Custom Shell Legacy Mode r Emulations Terminal Emulation Prompt Graphics Mode Prompt Presentation Prompt Power Features r Team Services Transfer Use Swap Share Recover Left Justify Use Default Use System Default Use System Default Default Use System Default Backspace on Delete Two Cells per Unicode Character Event Logging Session Activity Log Log Character Translate r Printing Print Method None Print Queue Poll Interval 5 seconds No Pass Through Printing Trailing FormFeeds Enable Print Buffer Size 500 bytes Open Printing Print Command GwtnPrinter1 2 Failure Detection and Recovery Session Saver Enable Session Saver Reconnect Based on Reconnect Wait Timer Process Control Terminate Child Processes when User Exits Yes r Graceful Termination Script o OK Cancel Apply Help y The Local User Summary provides the administrator
61. How to Automatically Launch SAPConsole from A SSH2 Telnet Session In most instances you will want SAPConsole to automatically launch when the SSH2 Telnet session is connected This is easily done via the GSW Logon Scripts Here is an example of what should be in the logon script to automatically launch SAPConsole es cd Program Files SAPpc sapgui sapconsole sapcnsl If the GSW Rocket Terminal Engine is installed then add the line to set the window size mode con lines 16 cols 20 Sp cd Program Files SAPpc sapgui sapconsole sapcnsl If your screen size is not 16x20 then adjust the mode statement to correspond to your screen size 38 Detailed information on logon scripts can be found on page 205 308 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 SAP User Name displayed in GSW Session Administrator When using the GSW Rocket Engine version 1 39 0002 or later the SAP User Name will be displayed in addition to the Windows user name when using the GSW Session Administrator Windows User Name Luke SAP User Name lbatko Shortcut to GS_Admin exe Session Administrator Ver 6 3 Figure 158 SAP User Name displayed in GSW Session Administrator 309 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Mobile Device Printing with SAPConsole One of the limitations of using SAPConsole is an ability to utilize local printers attached to an RF device Georgia SoftWorks provides a native method of printing to serial or tethered
62. Level Selection To switch from User to Administrator Security level you select Administrator and enter the Admin Password The Admin Password is 7062651018 Click OK This will enable all configuration and operations for the Administrator To switch from Administrator to User Security level select User and click OK A user password is not required Please see the tips section for these mobile device clients for any special tips for Application Protection e Intermec CK30 CK31 e Intermec CV60 e LXEM3X3 e Psion Teklogix 7535 Psion Teklogix 8525 e Symbol MC 9060G MC9090G e PSC Falcon 4410 67 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Backup and Restore the Georgia SoftWorks SSH Telnet Server At certain times you may encounter a scenario where your system needs to be rebuilt and you want to transfer the GSW and its settings This entails two steps 1 Back up the GSW UTS installation directory and all of its subdirectories 2 Back up the following registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters If you are using the SSH Server then you need to also back up the following registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE GeorgiaSoftWorks GSW_SSHD Parameters On 64 bit operating systems the key will be HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node GeorgiaSoftWorks GSW_SSHD Parameters On the rebuilt system you will need to Ly 2 Restore the GSW UTS Installation directory as on the origin
63. Options Figure 100 Session Monitor Descending Sort Order Figure 101 Session Monitor Select Session to Monitor Figure 102 Session Monitor Client Session Figure 103 Session Monitor Monitor Session Figure 104 Session Monitor Shadowing Figure 105 FIPS 140 2 compliant connections Figure 106 Session Monitor Terminate another session Figure 107 Session Monitor Terminate another session verification prompt Figure 108 Broadcast a message to all telnet sessions Figure 109 Enter broadcast message prompt Figure 110 Enter text of broadcast message cesses Figure 111 Send broadcast message confirmation prompt Figure 112 Broadcast message display on client terminal Figure 113 Select a specific user to send a message Figure 114 Send a message to a specific user Send Message dropdown Figure 115 Enter broadcast message prompt destined to a specific user Figure 116 Entering the broadcast message text to a single USCt Figure 117 Send broadcast message to a specific user confirmation prompt Figure 118 Session Administrator Exiting moccncioninnananonensararicearacicns Figure 119 True Client Side Printing Printing across the Internet or RAS Figure 120 True Client Side Printing Using Multiple Client Side Printers per User Figure 121 True Client Side Printing Enhanced Printing Override Figure 122 True Client Side Printing Open Print Method Figure 123 Unicode UTF 8 Enc
64. Order Form F ReadMe SSH2 F ReadMe UTS i M tout K fa Registration i PM tout l M Session Administrator A RL SSH2 User s Guide ho Uninstall a UTS Configuration Tool BL UTS User s Guide Figure 10 UTS Program Group The items in the shortcuts in the Program Group are e Certificate Mapping Tool for GSW SSH Shield Certificate to User account mapping for SSH customers e GS SSH Client This is the Desktop GSW SSH Client Use if the GSW SSH Server is installed e GS Telnet Client This is the Desktop GSW Telnet Client Use if the GSW Telnet Server is installed e Installation Status This displays the GSW UTS version the service status and if the GSW SSH Server is installed The version and service status is also displayed for the GSW SSH Server e Order Form Use this to fax an order to Georgia SoftWorks Print this form and fax it to GSW e ReadMe SSH ReadMe UTS ASCH text file containing current release notes and other late breaking important information for both the GSW UTS and SSH Servers e Registration Registration utility used to permanently activate the GSW UTS software e Session Administrator Powerful tool for monitoring shadowing sessions broadcasting and more e SSH Users Guide e Uninstall Used to remove the GSW UTS e UTS Configuration Tool e UTS Users Guide The complete User Guide in MS Word format for the UTS and SSH 14 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUA
65. SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Sample web page for systems with Java Plug in installed lt HE lt META NAME GENERATOR Content Microsoft Visual Studio 6 0 gt lt H lt BODY gt lt OBJECT classid clsid 8AD9C840 044E 11D1 B3E9 00805F499D93 WIDTH 640 HEIGHT 520 codebase http java sun com products plugin 1 2 jinstall 12 win32 cab Version 1 2 0 0 gt lt PARAM NAME JAVA CODE VALUE GSJC class gt lt PARAM NAME CABBASE VALUE GSJC CAB gt lt PARAM NAME type VALUE application x Java applet version 1 2 gt lt PARAM NAME port VALUE 23 gt lt PARAM NAME user value testl gt lt PARAM NAME password value testl1 gt lt PARAM NAME domain value gt lt PARAM NAME bkgColor value 008000 gt lt PARAM NAME HBTime value 20 gt lt PARAM NAME useEncryption value false gt lt COMMENT gt lt EMBED type application x java applet version 1 2 WIDTH 640 HEIGHT 520 CODE GSJC class archive gsjc jar port 23 user testl password testl domain bkgColor 000080 HBTime 20 UseEncryption false pluginspage http java sun com products plugin 1 2 plugin install html gt lt NOEMBED gt lt COMMENT gt No Java support for applet lt NOEMBED gt lt EMBED gt lt OBJECT gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt 278 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS
66. SSH2 Telnet Server provides the capability to execute commands on the client computer while in the SSH2 Telnet session This is accomplished through a utility gs exec client side command line This capability is fully developed when coupled with the Georgia SoftWorks File Transfer Utilities gs_put and gs_get Execution of commands on the client can be used to accomplish 1 Edit server files using a local GUI editor like MS Word 2 Run programs on the client that prompts the user for data and transfers the results back to the server 3 Automate file transfer from the server to the client run program that uses transferred file for input and then transfer the output data of the program back to the server 4 Useful in situations where you want to do part of the processing on the server and part on the client 5 Initiate program on client and transfer results to server when complete 6 Periodic initiation of client side program processing transferred data and or transferring data when complete 7 View graphic images on the client using a program such as Corel Draw or Microsoft Photo Editor when the image resides on the server 8 Run file or system level commands on the client synchronously with the server side script 9 AND MUCH MUCH MORE Command gs_ exec Description Command line utility that executes commands on the client from within a SSH2 Telnet session Syntax gs exec lt client side command line gt Arguments Ther
67. The batch file must be invoked for the Automatic Client Update to occur If you want to disable the Automatic Update of the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client then use the z command line option 78 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 When the Remote User connects to the GSW UTS Server computer and the versions do not match the User will see the following screen The Text Upgrade initiated is displayed While the appropriate client is being transferred a series of periods is displayed indicating the progress of the transfer GS Telnet Client 10 0 0 5 Upgrade initiated Figure 48 Automatic GSW Client Upgrade Initiated Once the transfer of the client is complete you will see a screen similar to the one below displayed requesting a key to be pressed to continue GS Telnet Client 10 0 0 5 Upgrade initiated New version of client software downloaded Your session will restart in a moment Figure 49 Automatic Client Upgrade Session Restart 79 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 After the session is restarted you will be prompted again for the Host Proceed and log on as usual with the proper GSW Client version for the GSW UTS Server for which you are connected lt EN GS Telnet Client pr Upgrade initiated New version of client software downloaded Your session will restart in a moment GS_Clnt exe for Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server for Windows NT 2000 2P 2003 Uist a 2 688 Ver 8 01 0012 Copyright lt C gt
68. Universal GSW mobile clients for Win CE 37 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Devices Qualified with Universal GSW Mobile Client for CE NET V4 2 Device Type GSW Client CE 6 0 Janam XG100 CE 6 0 ARMv5 gsce 4g exe Motorola MC9190 CE 6 0 ARMv5 gsce 4g exe Motorola Psion Teklogix Omni XT10 ARMv7 gsce 4ig exe Table 7 Devices qualified with Universal GSW mobile clients for Win CE continued 38 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 Devices Qualified with Universal GSW Mobile Client for Windows Mobile Mobile 6 1 Classic Device Model Device Type GSW Client Bluebird Pidion BIP 6000 Windows ARMv5 ppc2003c exe Mobile 6 1 Pro Intermec CK71 Windows Mobile ARMv7 ppc2003c exe embedded 6 1 Classic Intermec CN3 Windows Mobile 5 0 ARMv5 ppc2003c exe Honeywell Dolphin 9950 Windows ARMv5 ppc2003c exe Table 8 Devices qualified with Universal GSW mobile clients for Win Mobile 39 2015 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Devices Qualified with for Correct Operation with GSW UTS Device Model Device Operating System Type Bluebird Pidion BIP 6000 ARMv5 Android 2 3 7 Android 2 3 7 MobileDemand xTablet T7000 X86 Windows 7 Windows 7 Table 9 Other devices that operate with the GSW UTS If your device is not in the list above and it is an ARMv4 ARMv4i or X86 devices it is likely that a Universal GSW Mobile Client wil
69. User User name or Template to this specific Name This creates a folder with the name specified for the User Rename a Users Delete a User see footnote 46 Export the Local User configuration to a XML formatted file Import the Local User configuration from a XML formatted file 46 Make sure that the Grandfathered User is logged off or can safely be disconnected when Deleting or Renaming the Grandfathered User configuration 346 Domain User Configuration Property Pages a lviviviviviy d Grandfathered GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 User Templates e This is all user templates Expand to see list of User Templates All User Templates This is the root for all User Templates Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts Templates User Click to expand to see the user templates Click to collapse Right Click Operation Paste Import and New Add Add Create Default Contain Property Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Domain User Configuration Pages gt All User y Y Y Templates Paste Paste a copied User User name or Template to this specific User Template This creates a folder with the name specified for the User Template Import Import the User configuration from a XML formatted file New Create a new User Template This creates a folder with the name specified for the Template 347 GEORGIA
70. VK_F20 0x83 VK_F21 0x84 VK_F22 0x85 VK_F23 0x86 VK_F24 0x87 Table 32 Virtual Key Codes continued 139 JANUARY 27 2015 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Session Administrator support for Team Services Session Administrator support Team Services States Team Setvices status and state information is available in the GSW Session Administrator The last column in the Session Administrator is labeled TeamS for Team Services mA Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS Admin exe rec 10 0 0 254 china 10 0 0 140 ship 10 0 0 253 london 16 8 89 38 mexico 16 6 6 3 NewY ork 16 6 6 Chicago 68 25 16 29 5 china 68 725 16 48 mexico 68 25 16 49 B B Conn Figure 93 Team Services Session Administrator The Teams column indicates the state ot status of the session Below are the various states and their descriptions State Description Reason Sel User is in the Team Services Menu hotkey AXfer User has consented to Accept a Transfer F1 Xfer User is selecting the session for Transfer F2 ASwap User has consented to Accept a Swap F3 Swap User is selecting a session to Swap F4 AShr User has consented to Accept a Share F5 Shr User is selecting a session to partner F6 Shr The originator of a TS Share session is shared 16 Recov User is selecting a session to Recover F7 Table 33 Team Services State Table The System Administrator can view th
71. a variety of ways depending on the requirements For example a global logon script could be created for all telnet users In the example above we used user specific scripts for each salesperson that might use telnet Important Information User Name s SuperSalesMan and SuperSalesWoman Server Computer Name soloman Telnet Client Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client Client Operating System Windows 95 through Win Server 2012 R2 The only requirement is that the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client must being used Of course the Virtual printer must be defined as described in the Virtual Printer section The logon script for each user needs to have the following commands On the Server edit the users logon script k_ start bat and add the following commands net use 1pt3 soloman GwtnPrinterSharel set GWIN LOCAL PRINT METHOD Enhanced NOTE The above commands must appear in the logon script It is not sufficient to set these at the command prompt or in another batch file On the SuperSalesMan laptop open a command shell and enter the command Net Use LPT1 SSMLaptop SalesManPrinter persistent yes On the SuperSalesWoman laptop open a command shell and enter the command net use LPT1 SSWLaptop SalesWomanPrinter persistent yes Remember we are using the laptops default printer The persistent yes retains the LPT port mapping across reboots Initiate the Client session as gs_clnt exe rl LPT1 The portable printer must be co
72. an extra wireless mobile device Amos obtains the wireless mobile device On the mobile device Amos enters Team Services Recover by pressing F7 The mobile device display shows a list of suspended sessions Figure 87 SESSIONS CONNECTIONS DEVICES PERSON Team Services RECOVER ACC XTE Transfer ACC swap Swap Acc share Share Recover Info F10 Cancel Cancel Figure 88 After Team Service RECOVER New View Tools Session amp New View Tools Session EE Figure 86 Enters Team Services Figure 87 List of Suspended Ctrl x Sessions F7 and select session Amos is able to identify his session as SO by the User Id and the IP Address Amos presses number 0 to recover session 0 s0 Amos can continue his work exactly where he left off 126 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Session Information JANUARY 27 2015 Often it is useful to obtain Session Information about your current session Team Services Session Info can be viewed using the F8 key Session Identifier IP Address GSW Team Service Feature Pa csw Client 1720 Ae User Name Figure 89 Team Services Session Information The session information displayed consists of e Session Id Number The Session Id is a unique number assigned to the session by GSW Team Services e IP Address The IP Address of the client device e User Id The User Id is displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen In Fig
73. and SSH The new UTS Protocol will take effect for all new connections 245 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Utility Pack Utility Pack Configurable Georgia 3 Party SoftWorks Client Client Change Password Yes Yes Yes Connection Banner Yes Yes Yes Execute Command on Client Yes Yes No File Transfer Yes Yes No Launch GUI Application Yes Yes Yes Remote Reboot of Server Yes Yes Yes Remote Shutdown of Server Yes Yes Yes Remote Registration Yes Yes Yes Special Bell Processing Yes Yes Yes Special Bell Process for SAPConsole Yes Yes Yes TTY Name Yes Yes Yes Table 48 Utility Pack The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet server provides utilities for the users convenience The utilities reside in the installation directory The utility names are not case sensitive Arguments such as Windows passwords ate case sensitive Change Password command line utility Many times a user wishes to change their password A convenient method is to use the Georgia SoftWorks Change Password command line utility Command GS_ChPwd Description Command line utility that changes a user s password Syntax Gs ChPwd lt user gt lt computer domain gt lt newpassword gt lt oldpassword gt Arguments There are 4 required arguments a b lt user id gt The user id for which to change the password lt computer name or domain gt The computer name or domain lt new password gt the new p
74. any of the protocol changes will occur 377 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 UTS System Templates UTS System Templates 2 Global per system XX GSW UTS System Templates al S System Templates atlanta_master 4 2 london_master UTS System Templates are templates where you can store variations of your Active 1 85 User per session Configuration for fast and easy access Keep different configurations based on shifts departments teams locations etc System Templates allow you to copy paste delete rename import and export configurations so they are available when needed You can edit configuration values in UTS System Templates exactly as done with the Active Configuration Copy from your Active Configuration to UTS System Templates from UTS System Templates to UTS System Templates and from UTS System Templates to your Active Configuration You can also Import and Export configuration data Intuitive time saving operations have been included at every step Quickly create a Template configuration by copying the Active Configuration and then pasting on the UTS System Templates m 5 UTS Configuration e Global per systen UTS Configuration E Global per system 48 Active Configuration Mes 0 e o gt H User Paste pesin m a Copy 1 of ActiveConfiguration Import i User per session Fig 2 Aut
75. code DOSBoss MSDOS Application performance booster The Georgia SoftWorks DOSBoss dramatically improves system performance in situations when MSDOS applications are running under Microsoft Windows NT In fact some say it is incredible 104 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Many MSDOS applications run under Windows but do not perform well especially when multiple instances of them are being used at the same time This is without SSH2 Telnet in the picture This is because MSDOS applications do not know about Windows and assume they are the only application s running on the computer As a result the MSDOS applications are not always Windows friendly For example Start 3 instances of the Microsoft Edit program in 3 separate command prompt windows Next start the Performance monitor You will notice the CPU usage is very high even though you are not actively using the editors Your computer does not perform well when the CPU usage is high This problem occurs with many MSDOS applications To enable the Georgia SoftWorks DOSBoss put the following line at the beginning of your logon script lt telnet dir gt dosboss where lt telnet_dir gt stands for the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server Directory for example c gs_uts dosboss The above activates the DOSBoss with default parameters that satisfies most users requirements Note for power users You can specify additional command line parameters for the DOSBoss Valid command lines are
76. complete Welcome Screen Click Next Welcome to the Sentinel Runtime Installation Wizard It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this setup program Click Cancel to quit the setup program then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue the installation WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and intemational treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law Figure 16 SafeNet welcome screen second part 19 2015 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 6 The next screen displayed is the SafeNet License Agreement screen SAFENET SENTINEL LDK PRODUCT END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT INFORMATION PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE CONTENTS OF THE PACKAGE AND OR BEFORE DOWNLOADING OR INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT ALL ORDERS FOR AND USE OF THE SENTINEL LDK PRODUCTS including without imia on the Developer s K libraries utilises disketes CD_ROM DVD Sentinel keys the sofware component of SafeNet Sensnel LDK and the accept the license agreement 1 go not accept the license agreement achacha Newt Figure 17 SafeNet License Agreement 7 Read the license agreement and select I accept the license agreement and then Click Install SAFENE
77. cyan text on bright blue background 169 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE COLOR TRANSLATION TABLE ENTRIES Example 1 Change white on blue characters to red on white use this entry 17 74 Example 2 To change white on black characters to bright white on black use this entry 07 OF 170 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Automatic Logon 3 Party Clients AutoLogon Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Automatic Logon see page 355 Or use legacy style below This feature allows you to pre configure a list of IP addresses that will be able to connect and log on without any User ID Password or Domain prompting when using 3 Party Clients AutoLogon is useful in many situations however the real power of this feature is realized when coupled with the Session Saver page 144 and or used with RF Data collection devices for fast and easy connection establishment For example when a connection is broken due to a link failure you can reconnect without the time consuming UserID Password and Domain prompts and resume work exactly where you left off before the link failure Please see page 106 for details on Automatic Logon and page 108 Automatic Logon with 3 Party Clients Character Display Translation 3 Party Clients Use the GSW GUI Configuration Too Global Emulations see page 374 Or use legacy style below You may have a special situation or advanced application where it would be useful to transl
78. default monochrome mappings You may edit the file and alter the monochrome mappings to obtain the desired effects You can then experiment to get the exact mappings desired The format of the text file follows Legend I Intensity R Red G Green B Blue Foreground Background Your monochrome re mapping I R G B I R G B BLINK INT UND INV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 L 0 0 o0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 and so forth for all 256 possible mappings Foreground Background Your re mapping I R G B I R G B BLINK INT UND INV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 o 1 0 0 0 1 o 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 L 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 164 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The first and last 16 tabl ntries are pictured above Please s the fil colormap txt to see all 256 table entries Alt Keys Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Emulations Character Emulation see page 370 Or use legacy style below Many applications take advantage of the Alt key However many keyboards and terminal emulations do not support the Alt key The Georg
79. directories Optional Arguments c s Silent mode operation for GS_Put Disables the display of file transfer progress or other non error information messages to user d e log file path Silent mode for error messages to the user The e argument is used to disable the display of error messages to the user Tf the optional file path is included then the error messages are sent to the specified file on the Server Note No spaces are allowed between the e and the log file path 252 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE UTILITIES FILE TRANSFER SERVER TO CLIENT E gs put f lcorbalhintsidealers docx c books dealers docx This will copy the file corba hints dealers from the server to the client computer and save it as c books dealers docx You will see the progress and completion messages a gt m GS SSH Client 192 168 1 161 gt et Sa 2 NGS_UTS gt gs_put fiicorbarhintsdealers docx c books dealers docx 35_Put Version 8 03 0019 sopyright lt C gt Georgia SoftWorks 1997 2612 8x completed m Figure 128 File Transfer GS_Put Progress Status F W GS SSH Client 192 168 1 161 O C a gt NGS_UTSSgs_put f i corba hints dealers docx c books dealers docx 3s Put Version 8 83 0019 copyright lt C gt Georgia SoftWorks 1997 2612 otification from client received lt File closed OK gt Transfer completed gt GS_UTS gt Figure 129 File Transfer GS_Put Transfer Com
80. each domain Additionally the administrator may perform right click operations at the Domain level such as adding deleting domains creating default configurations etc 384 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Domain Name E UTS Configuration dd GSWLONDON 3 Global per system Eig Toer per session Domain Name Summary View Q default config Eh Domains 2 3 Quick View Information Q default config gt GSWATLANTA 0 T How many GSW UTS User configurations are defined for this domain name GSWLONDON 3 A charles GSWLONDON 3 amp heny i amp will There are configurations for a total of 3 users in the Domain GSWLONDON de Local Users 3 JP IP Address Range 2 pl E ols amp Grandfathered Users 4 we Determine exactly which configuration is used User Templates 5 Domain Name Users DOMAINS x LEN Specific Domain User If a configuration exists for a specific domain user then its configuration is used Note The black circle with a D All Domain Users White check indicates that Otherwise if a configuration exists for All Domain Users then that configuration is used If a configuration is not found for a specific domain user then the configuration for ALL DOMAIN NAME USERS is used Cancel Apply Help J Figure 203 GUI Tool Domain Names The Domain Name screen allows you to view quick status information such as how many user configurations are defined for this dom
81. emphasize certain words especially new terms or phrases when they are introduced Initial Caps Bold Words that appear in initial caps boldface represent menu options buttons icons or any object that you may click Courier This font represents anything you must type lt enter gt This represents the enter key Definitions for this document WINDOWS Unless otherwise noted refers to Microsoft Windows operating systems listed below Windows 7 8 VISTA 2008 2008 R2 2012 R2 Windows NT XP 2000 2003 versions ARMv4 The plus indicates to include later versions such as ARMv4 ARMv5 ARMv7 etc ARMv4i The plus indicates to include later versions of ARMv41 GSW Georgia SoftWorks Session Refers to either a Telnet or SSH Session depending on the product purchased SSH Refers to Secure Shell Version 2 SSHv2 unless otherwise noted TS Georgia SoftWorks Team Services User s Guide User s Guide and User s Manual are used interchangeably UTS Universal Terminal Server xx GEORGIA SOFTWORKS FEATURES AT A GLANCE DO IT RIGHT OR JANUARY 27 2015 NOT AT ALL Keep Network Traffic and ISDN cost down Session Saver Resume work in progress after link failure Encrypted Login and Data Stream Single Sign on through NTLM and Kerberos SSH Slow Link Internet Support Certificate Based Logon SSH Proprietary Performance Algorithms Data Compression Strong 128 bit Encryption available
82. event ids and descriptions in the file cannot be changed cot O 8B WN ER OD Ne 199 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Event Log File The log file is a comma delimited text file where the activity events are actually stored By default the maximum size of log file gsw_elog txt is 1 megabyte Once the file has reached the maximum size the file is renamed to gsw_elog bak and starts logging in a new gsw_elog txt This actually provides up to 2 megabytes of log information to the administrator The size of the gsw_elog txt can be changed in the registry See page 201 The GSW Event Log resides in the Log subdirectory of the Installation folder in a comma delimited file with the name gsw_elog txt Georgia SoftWorks Event Log File Name gsw_elog txt The format of the comma delimited file is as follows Field Description Data Type Description Event ID Integer Event Group ID Integer Useful for Filtering with Reports Login Id Text Quoted Text Field Domain Text Quoted Text Field Session ID Text Quoted Text Field Time Stamp Date Time YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Client Type Integer 0 3 Party 1 Georgia SoftWorks Encrypted Session Integer 0 Not Encrypted 1 Encrypted Event Specific Integer Integer Event Specific Text Text Quoted Text Field Table 43 GSW Event Log File Format An example of the data in the gsw_elog txt file may look
83. example to set the Session Reconnection Time to 1 hour you would enter set gwtn_reconnect_timeout 60 in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces are allowed when setting environment variables For example set gwtn_reconnect timeout 60 is correct set gwtn_reconnect_timeout 60 is not correct 145 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Reconnection based on User ID Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Failure Detection Recovery see page 398 Or use legacy style below Let s look at an example User Bob is using a RF Hand Held terminal and is performing a multi point inspection of an item Bob is navigating though many screens logging data during the inspection Half way through the inspection the Hand Held terminal fails It would be great if Bob could simply grab a spare Hand Held Terminal log in and continue his work in progress This is possible with Reconnection based on User ID The SSH2 Telnet server will determine if there are any Suspended sessions for user Bob If there are Suspended sessions then the SSH2 Telnet server will automatically connect Bob to the existing session The screen will be exactly in the same condition as it was when Bob was previously connected and Bob can continue work in progress For example to enable Session Reconnection you would enter set gwtn_reconnect auto by user in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces are allowed when setting environment variables Fo
84. features Each Enhanced Mobile Client has a T7ps section that should be reviewed To determine if your device has Enhanced Mobile Client please see the table on page 36 GSW Enhanced Mobile Clients with verified operation on Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 devices include the Intermec CK30 CK31 CV60 LXE MX3X Symbol MC 9060G MC9090G Psion Teklogix 7535 Psion Teklogix 8525 Psion Teklogix WORKABOUT Pro Other CE NET V4 2 5 0 based devices may be compatible but have not been certified as of this writing If you have a device that has unique capabilities and would like custom client features please contact us at sales georgiasoftworks com ot call 706 265 1018 for more information 32 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Select the correct GSW Mobile Client e If your device is a PPC 2002 then use the GSW mobile client setup program ppc2002c exe e If your device is a PPC 2003 Windows Mobile then use the GSW mobile client setup program ppc2003c exe e If your device is tunning Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 look at the table on page 36 to determine if an Enhanced GSW Mobile Client is available If so then use the GSW Enhanced Mobile Client Setup Program Identified in the table and be sure to look to see if any T7ps are available for that client e If your device is running Windows CE NET 4 2 and an Enhanced GSW Mobile Client is not available then you can use a Universal GSW Mobile Client o If your device type is ARMv4it then use gsce_4ig exe
85. in setting up True Client Side Printing e Defining Virtual Printer s on the Server This is the same for all printing methods e Adding the Georgia SoftWorks printer redirection commands to a logon script This is specific to the printing method chosen e When using the Enhanced Printing method these steps must be performed o Provide command line parameters when invoking the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client when using the Enhanced Printing method and o Map the destination printer using the Net Use LPT command on the client machine A Virtual Printer s is defined that redirects the output from your application The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server queries the Virtual Printer queue for new print jobs When a print job enters the Virtual Printer queue the originating user of the job is identified Once the user is known the associated printer is referenced and the print job is redirected to the proper printer Create a virtual printer on the server In creating a Virtual Printer the key information is the Printer Name the Share Name and the Port Up to three 3 Virtual Printers may be defined on the server This will allow up to three 3 printers to be used for each client A Printer Index is used to identify and correlate the various printer setups The printer indexes are 1 2 and 3 For the Virtual Printer Setup the Printer Name and Share Name require printer indexes The following setup is for a single printer Printer Inde
86. integrates and cooperates with the device feature Otherwise the GSW Mobile Client provides a user and administrative security level The administrator security level is allowed unrestricted access to the application The aser security level is not allowed to modify the configuration values or exit the GSW Mobile Client application The System Administrator can protect access to operations and values associated with the following menu items o File New File Open File Exit o Session Settings Upon selecting the menu item File you will notice that while at the user security level the menu items New Open and Exit ate disabled The same is true for the Session Settings menu item Chen CrO 25x60 Eur Ojal Figure 40 GSW Mobile Client Security Levels Only the administrator security level has access to these items When using the GSW Mobile Client Application Protection you can enable the administrator security level by selecting the menu item File Security as shown above The File Security menu item is enabled on Intermec LXE and Symbol devices The File Security menu item is disabled on Psion Teklogix devices because the GSW Mobile Client uses Psion Teklogix security levels and is settable under Start Security Upon selecting the Security menu item the Security level dialog is presented 66 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Security level 25x80 desu Gn Gon Eva LIP Figure 41 GSW Mobile Client Security
87. like 7 200 Laura 1E339C27B99 2000 09 15 15 42 22 1 0 1326 1 100 Rebecca 1E439C27BCD 2000 09 15 15 43 09 1 0 0 6 100 Joseph 5SA39C27C2C 2000 09 15 15 44 52 1 0 1326 1 100 Anna ep 17F39C27C39 2000 09 15 15 45 03 1 0 0 1 100 benjamin 12C39C27C66 2000 09 15 15 45 47 1 0 0 4 100 John 1E439C27BCD 2000 09 15 15 46 07 1 0 0 5 100 Wally 12C39C27C66 2000 09 15 15 46 37 1 0 0 1 100 Luke 12C39C27C66 2000 09 15 15 46 51 1 0 0 2 100 RaySpurg 12C39C27C66 2000 09 15 15 47 00 1 0 0 3 100 Doug 12C39C27C66 2000 09 15 15 47 12 1 0 0 3 100 Wanda 17F39C27C39 2000 09 15 15 47 20 1 0 0 200 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Defined Events are JANUARY 27 2015 1 100 Session Created 2 100 Session Suspended 3 100 Session Reconnected 4 100 Session Exited Normally 5 100 Session Exited Abnormally 6 100 Logon Failed 7 200 Print Job Redirected 8 400 File Transferred via Go PUT 9 400 File Transferred via GS GET 10 500 Command execution event sent to client Table 44 Defined Log Events Modify the Log File Size Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Power Features see page 367 Or use legacy style below This is how to change the registry key for the size of the Log File The size is specified in bytes and the default is 1000000 N
88. location Please make sure that all users are logged off or can safely be disconnected when renaming a domain name If the Domain Name folder contains User Folders then they ate moved to the path associated with the new name Delete a Domain Name Note If you Delete a Domain Name then all associated Domain Users that are connected will get an error This is because the folder that contains the Domain Name and Domain Users is deleted thus altering the path The running logon script will try to path to the original location Please make sure that all users are logged off or can safely be disconnected deleting a domain name 339 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 DOMAIN USER SPECIFIC aa Domain User A specific User within a specific domain Expand to see property pages This is the User Name for the specific Domain Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts DomainUsers Domain Name User Name Click to expand to see the property pages for the specific user Click to collapse Right Click Operation Paste Rename Delete Add User and Create Default Configuration Add Add Create Default Contain Property Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Domain User Configuration Pages a Domain User Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import INIA II SS ii Copy the User configuration to an UTS copy buffer T
89. more Multinational Character Support including Double Byte and Unicode characters Traditional amp Simplified Chinese support GSW Mobile Clients Support for Simplified Chinese font GB GSW Telnet Client for Pocket PC 2002 3 class of devices GSW SSH Telnet Client for Windows CE Net V4 2 5 6 devices including but not limited to LXE MX3X PSC Falcon 4410 Symbol MC9060G Intermec CK30 CV60 Psion Teklogix 7535 8525 WORKABOUT PRO IPv6 Supported Windows Powershell and custom shell support SCO Console DEC VT 100 220 320 420 Wyse 50 60 Symbol 3 x 40 series IBM 3101 IBM 3151 Perfect PC Automatic Logon Color Re Mapping Character Display Translation Team Services Breakthrough collaboration technology for Telnet SSH Share Transfer Swap Recover Sessions Session Administration Session Monitoring v Security Monitor other telnet users Observe dynamic screen activity exactly as it appears on their screen v Quality Assurance Remotely monitor data entry by employees v Training Senior application users remotely help trainee s v Debugging Developers remotely observe phenomenon described by users Session Shadowing Y Session monitoring with Interactive Input Command Line Options for programmatic control of Session Administration Logon Termination Scripting User IP or Global Based Y Allow a user to automatically enter a specific directory or application upon connection v Optionally rest
90. once2 bat goto start The line gs_clnt exe is the line that launches the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client For SSH the client name is gs_ssh exe Step 2 Add the command line parameter and save the file The Command Line Parameter used is Add the parameter vxml_file path Where v is the command line parameter to enable Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile support for GSW desktop clients xml file path is full path to the Vangard Voice AccuSpeech XML file 301 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 And thus the GS_SClnt bat file will be modified as shown below adding the command line parameters echo off start if exist oncel bat do call oncel bat if exist oncel bat do del oncel bat gs _clnt exe v c Program Files Vangard VoicelXgrammarl testGrammar xml Qif errorlevel 2 goto copy exit copy copy gs_clnt new gs_clnt exe gt gsnull txt if exist once2 bat do call once2 bat if exist once2 bat do del once2 bat goto start Save the file and desktop client configuration is complete 302 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 SAPConsole with the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet SSH Server SSH2 Telnet Connectivity for SAPConsole is not just a Good solution it is the Best Solution The speed and efficient bandwidth utilization for telnet SSH connectivity to Windows cannot be beat If SAPConsole and SSH2 Telnet Connectivity ate important to your business then your only choice is the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server
91. page 112 Team Services Transfer See page 134 Team Services Swap See page 135 Team Services Share See page 136 Team Services Recover See page 133 Team Services Left Justify See page 137 Team Services Hot Key Control See page 138 Team Services Hot Key Virtual Key See page 138 Strict Teams See page 129 366 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Power Features Event Logging 25 UTS Configuration de Global per system gt Active Configuration Automatic Logon Security Failure Detection Recovery Power Features Printing Team Services Emulations Bell Control Protocols gt UTS System Templates 2 s User per session JANUARY 27 2015 1 Event Logging Logging Session Activity Log Max Log Size E a UTS Event Log r UTS Event Log File Size Max Log Size h H r UTS Event Log Definition File Open Open gs_Idef tet file in Notepad r UTS Event Log File Open View gsw_elog bt file in Notepad Agent Log The UTS Agent Log file size in MB default is 1 mb UTS Event Log The UTS Event Log file size in MB default is 1 mb The configuration file gsw_Idef txt specifies the events that are maintained in the log file The log file is a comma delimited text file where the activity events are actually store
92. page 76 gs_color txt Specifies colors to re map page 169 gs_lb txt Specifies the IP Addresses of your load balancers See text file for more detail gsw_ldef txt Specifies events that maintained in the log file page 199 gs_logon txt Automatic logon Pre configuration file for 3 party clients page 171 gs_tinit txt Initialization characters to send to 3 party client page 172 gs_xchar txt Character translations definitions when sent to terminal display page 171 thosts Restrict Access based on IP address page 93 gs_l_usr txt Limit the number of connections by specific User ID page 97 gs 1 ip txt Limit the number of Connections from specific IP Addresses page 99 tsgroups txt Configure Strict Teams for Team Services page 129 323 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW UTS Configuration Tool Georgia SoftWorks is pleased to introduce the GSW UTS Configuration Tool The GSW Configuration Tool provides the user with a Graphical User Interface that is Intuitive Windows Explorer style tree view allowing you to navigate to the object of interest Familiar to use operations such as copy paste rename delete export import are applied to configurations on user or system basis Easy to identify icons color and shape coordinated to easy identification Time Saving Powerful Create new user configurations by copy paste Create default configurations for objects Quickly view
93. replaced or rebuilt and immediately restored to operation with full telnet capability The Georgia SoftWorks floating license is a hardware key that can be ordered for a USB Port or a Parallel port Parallel Port Floating License USB Floating License Figure 13 Floating License USB Port Figure 12 Floating License Parallel Port The Parallel Port Floating License is a Pass Through allowing Not attached to a Server normal function of the port The Parallel Port Floating License connects to a female parallel port on the server and does not impact functionality of the port for other uses It acts pass though allowing normal connections to the other side of the key USB LED Lights when Installed Table 1 Floating Licenses Parallel and USB Ports 16 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The SSH2 Telnet server will recognize the presence of the key and activate the softwate for the correct number of sessions and the proper date for which free version upgrades can be obtained It does not matter which parallel or USB port on the server the Hardware Key is installed as all ports will be scanned for the installation of the key The Floating License currently is installed using the manufacturer SafeNet previously Aladdin of the hardware key setup program It is described below The name of the hardware key is HASP4 and you will see it displayed in the setup screens The best drivers for the HASP4 are the HA
94. represents a specific Grandfathered User The user name is displayed to the right of the icon Expand to see property pages i e This icon represents User Templates Expand to see configurations for each specific 1 user template i This icon represents a specific User Template The template name is displayed to the LV right of the icon and the template configuration is available by expanding the object 39 DCA Default Configuration Allowed Items in this column may have a default configuration that applies to all child objects If a default configuration is defined the then black circle with the white check is overlaid in the right corner of the icon 40 A Property Page is a screen that allows the administrator to view edit the configuration properties of an item p 8 8 p 327 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS GSW UTS Configuration Tool Right Click Operations JANUARY 27 2015 Navigation within the UTS Configuration Tool offers time saving right click operations Different objects have different operations available Some operations are only available at appropriate times For example if an object has a paste operation it will only be available if a copy has first been performed The table below lists the Right Click operations available for Global per system configuration Global Configuration Root Contain Add Add Create Default ICON Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Domain User Configuration Ta Cb 1 GSW
95. s Bold ont rnistri inira a E E a E ra nnnn arena rara nnnnananno 277 Optional Patameter DPC OL ie aena EREEREER AAAA Dead noti cad EAEE A ETEA 277 Optional Parametet HB TUNE a i r BEEE N EEA EE A E AEE A E EE EE A EE 277 Optional Parameter use BBVUO osiris ria ieas i Ea Er EESE AREER EEL carre rn enn EE ENSE AAN AEEA NASEER 277 Optional Parameter printComima nd cccccccccccc cee cnn nacen o e pArA S ccc o nena een PA R E Ae Areia E 277 SAMPLE WEB PAGE FOR SYSTEMS WITH JAVA PLUG IN INSTALLED 278 SAMPLE WEB PAGE FOR SYSTEMS WITH MS IE 4 0 AND HIGHER 279 SAMPLE WEB PAGE FOR SYSTEMS WITH NETSCAPE COMMUNICATOR 280 SAMPLE WEB PAGE FOR SYSTEMS WITH OTHER BROWSERS 226 281 ALBLLET TL a A Gh hs verdant Sa e A A A A A 281 Georgia SoftWorks Java Telnet Client oooooo oooooocococoooo ooo 282 REQUIRED JAVA SUPPOR Dida e a bates 282 REQUIRED FIDES FOR TAE CO mata ia os oie NI AA eel ens 282 NVOKTNG THEGO JO ATA a aaa AS A AT ars 282 ENCRYPTTON Sree tect canny ts A A We se es EE so clad de EA cet Wt foal eres a BS a it 282 Frequently Asked Questions oooooccocooooooooo ee ee eee ne 284 Discussion Orphaned NTVDM s and Windows SSH2 Telnet Servers 290 VHAT ARE NTVDM S AND WHY ARE THEY IMPORTANT FOR WINDOWS SSH2 TELNET SERVERS i gosh a Sesh Sua ash wuts RA A A a Seah Sule PROSA ot Beh at Sees 290 VHEN ARE ON TVDM S CREATED 5 5 seco bs a A a ti eee 290
96. support via keyboard control The Alt Down combination puts the CK30 CK31 into a Screen Scrolling and Mouse Mode and brings up a pointer that can be manipulated by numeric keys Please see the Intermec manual for further details To dismiss the pointer enter the Al t Down again Note Keyboard data entry functionality is not fully available when in the Screen Scrolling and Mouse Mode Simply put dismiss the pointer prior to entering text 55 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Tips for Intermec CV60 Following ate a few Tips when installing the GSW SSH Telnet Client for the above device running Windows CE NET Version 4 2 1 Persistence over a Cold Reset After initial installation please run START Shutdown on the device Shutdown saves the device registry to persistent storage 2 Uses Standard Accelerators and Shortcuts for all CE NET 4 2 devices page 42 3 Startup Default Connection Settings e The file Application Data Georgia SoftWorks C753X default gswtc is loaded on startup if found e If the security level is user then the GSW SSH Telnet Client will attempt to connect 4 Application Protection Use the File Security dialog as described in the Application Protection page 66 section 5 Warm boot or cold boot the device after you install the client The GSW Mobile Client will automatically launch 6 The GSW Mobile Client is also accessible through Program Files and a Des
97. that allows different logon scripts to be launched based on the IP address of the client connecting page 207 User Name Logon Scripting This is a powerful feature that allows different logon scripts to be launched based on the User Name of the client connecting page 205 230 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Compatibility Pack The Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server allows connection with any RFC 854 compliant 3 party client This includes generic UNIX MAC Windows CE NT XP VISTA 2000 2003 2008 R2 2012 R2 Wireless clients and more Most telnet clients are RFC 854 compliant Many Network Terminal and terminal servers are as well The Georgia SoftWorks SSH Server allows connection with any SSH compliant 3 party client This includes generic UNIX MAC Windows CE NT Wireless clients and more Compatibility Pack Configurable Georgia SoftWorks 3 Party Clients Client RFC 854 Compliant N A No Yes Connect from 3 Party Clients Yes N A Yes Connect from Unix Yes N A Yes Connect from Windows 3 1 Yes N A Yes Connect form Windows 95 98 Yes Yes Yes Connect from Windows NT Yes Yes Yes Connect from Windows CE Yes Yes Yes Connect from Macs N A N A Yes Connect from Wireless RF Depends on RF Yes Terminals and Scanners Terminal Connect from Terminal Servers N A Yes Table 46 Compatibility Pack RF Terminals Bar Code Scanners The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server f
98. that domain Each user name folder will contain scripts associated with that domain user name LOCAL USERS The LocalUsers folder may contain a default configuration if configured for all Local Users Additionally subfolders will exist with the name of any local User Names configured Each user name folder will contain scripts associated with that local user name TEMPLATES The Templates folder contains two subfolders e System contains templates for Global per system configurations Each system template contains a XML file with the name of the template This can be copied to the active configuration or another system template e User contains templates for User per session configurations Each template will be a logon script batch file This script can be copied to any User per session configuration 351 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Logon Scripts Batch Files Logon scripts ate automatically created with the configuration GUI A logon script is created each time a User Per Session property page is created This includes gt b Domain User gt es Local User gt I P IP Address Range User gt as Grandfathered Users gt LJ User Template gt D Default Configuration For legacy Logon Script description see page 205 Registry Settings Registry settings apply to the Global per system configuration The GSW Configuration Tool eliminates the manual configuration of registry throu
99. the continuing maintenance cost of hardware and software Powerful and Useful Features such as Adjusted Logon Screen Size Adjusted Logoff screen size Configurable screen size Capability to adjust the Off Screen Fields back on to the screen Flexible translation of screen attributes with powerful new options not available in the SAPConsole VIIO Terminal Engine Pull Support of SAPConsole Profiles Contact Georgia SoftWorks for more information on the Rocket Terminal Engine Contact GSW Sales Or call Tel 706 265 1018 317 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Environment Variables Set by the User Many environment variables exist for the users convenience They are available to use in local and global login scripts to set defaults to eliminate prompting as well as setting values for special uses The details are described it the appropriate section in the User s Guide however we have included a quick reference list here gwtn_backspace_on_delete Specifies if the delete key performs a backspace action page 173 gwtn_color Sets Color or Monochrome presentation for 3 party clients page 163 gwtn_create_profile Specifies if a user specific registry hive will be create page 234 gwtn_clnt_no_x Specifies if the GSW Desktop clients display the x in the top right corner page 82 gwtn_ctrl_c_mode Sets lt control c gt behavior page 158 gwtn_enable_session_log Enables Disables long format session loggi
100. the environment variable in the logon script as trailing form feeds are enabled by default NOTE No spaces are allowed when setting environment variables For example 32 Has been observed in a SSH Telnet client on a version of the Palm OS 228 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 set gwtn_ff in passthrough y is correct set gwtn_ff in passthrough y isnot correct Passthrough Printing Print Data Buffer Size The GWIN_PP_PRINT_BUFFER_SIZE environment variable can be used to eliminate the condition where the user must hit lt ENTER gt multiple times for a print job to complete due to some clients prompting the user after each data block is recetved rather than just printing the data The environment variable for specifying the Print Data Buffer Size for passthrough printing is gwtn_pp print buffer size The default print data block buffer size is 500 bytes For example to specify a Print Data Buffer Size of 2000 bytes you would enter set gwtn_pp print buffer size 2000 in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces are allowed when setting environment variables For example set gwtn_pp print buffer size 2000 is correct set gwtn_pp print buffer size 2000 is not correct 229 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Client Identity and Uniqueness Knowing the exact identity of the client device connected is useful in many environments and required in others Several mechanisms can be used to obtain specific informatio
101. the group Windows does not instantaneously update the group membership after the user manager is closed Windows will update the group memberships if you logoff logon the desktop In the event that this does not work you may have to restart the Windows server after creating the group and adding users 24 Note Only Users can be added to the group GWTN MONITORS Other groups can not be added to GWTN MONITORS 175 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The standard Windows graphical User Management tools can be used to create the local group Gwin Monitors and add users to the group Tools to perform these actions are also available from the command line and you may find that they are faster and easier to use To add the group from the command line please log on as an administrator open a Command Prompt window on the server and run the following command net localgroup Gwtn Monitors ADD To add a user to the group run the following command net localgroup Gwtn Monitors username ADD username parameter must be replaced with the actual name of the user who will be allowed to run the GSW Session Administrator You need to restart the server after this command completes successfully To find out who is allowed to run the GSW Session Administrator use the command net localgroup Gwtn Monitors The command will provide the listing of the members of Gwtn Monitors 25 You must have administrative privileges to create gro
102. the number of sessions specified If it is disabled Oxffffffff then all of the sessions purchased are available otherwise then the MaxSessions Registry value is compared to the number of sessions purchased The smaller of the two numbers is used as the number of sessions to allow The key is HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CutrentControlSet Services GS_ Tnet Parameters MaxSessions The default value is Ox ff f f f That is disabled Other values limit the number of connections allowed to the value chosen This is how to change the registry key to limit the number of connections Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet services GS_Tnet Parameters MaxSessions 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 96 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 7 Enter the new value for the MaxSessions and click OK The new value will take effect for all new connections Restrict Number of connections by a Specific User ID Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Set Max Sessions 359 Or use legacy style below The system administrator may want to limit the number of simultaneous logons for specific User Ids This is esp
103. the users use the same printer only one mobile printer needs to be created in R 3 If multiple printers are desired each printer should use the same host spool access method and destination host values specified below 1 Create the mobile printer in R 3 using transaction SPAD e The device type should be ASCIIPRI or other device type for the particular printer being used e The Host spool access method is set to Print using SAP protocol type S e The Destination host is set to the machine running the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server This can be network name or IP address Note SAPLPD will need to be running on the host or the SPAD transaction may not allow creation of the printer e Set the Host printer to GwtnPrinterl e Leave all other fields as the default Do not select cover page or specify tray information DeviceAttributes HostSpoolAccMethod Output attributes Tray info Host spool access method S Print using SAP protocol Host printer GwtnPrinter1 Destination host Mi eE Status confirmation via polling Do not query host spooler for output status Figure 160 Sample SPAD transaction screen Modify RF device configuration to allow printing Each RF device and terminal emulation client has its own configuration to allow printing Some devices allow more control over printers For this application the printer should be dumb and the RF device should not intercept or inte
104. them to either a Domain User or Local User Additionally if the administrator manually creates folder is and logon script in the scripts folder then they will show up as Grandfathered users Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts Click to expand to see the list of Grandfathered Users Click to collapse Right Click Operation Add Delete Domain Copy Paste Rename Export Import New Add User Create Default Configuration Contain Property Pages so All Grandfathered Users 45 Using tools such as Notepad exe and Windows Explorer 345 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GRANDFATHERED USER SPECIFIC User Grandfathered A specific Local User This is the User Name for a specific Grandfathered User Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts LocalUsers User Name Click to expand to see the property pages for the specific user Click to collapse Right Click Operation Paste Rename Delete Add User and Create Default Configuration User Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Ade Ada Create Derauli Contam Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import Copy the user configuration to an UTS copy buffer This configuration can then be pasted either creating a new User Configuration object or overwriting and existing object Paste a copied
105. this method page 175 The Session Reconnect method can be configured on either a global or per user basis by utilizing Logon Scripts page 202 Two environment variables are used in configuring the Session Reconnect The environment variables for the Session Reconnect ate gwtn_reconnect Possible values are e auto_by_user and ip Reconnect based on User Id and IP Address e auto_by_user Reconnect based upon User Id And gwtn_reconnect_timeout specifies time in minutes for how long broken sessions will wait for the original user to reconnect This vatiable does not have to be set the default value is 0 It must be set to non zero for Session Reconnection to operate Note The User should be using the same terminal emulation during a reconnect that they were using when the failure occurred Session Reconnection Timeout Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Failure Detection Recovery see page 398 Or use legacy style below A system administrator may not want Suspended sessions to stay around indefinitely The amount of time in minutes that a user s session can be available for Session Reconnection is specified by the environment variable gwtn_reconnect_timeout Once this timer has expired for a user then Graceful Termination initiates This environment variable must to be set because the default is 0 minutes which is disabled This environment variable is ignored if the gwtn_reconnect environment variable is not set For
106. to different files or modify the default ones To see these files and their locations run PIF Editor and choose Windows NT If you are not satisfied with the performance of your MS DOS based applications on Windows NT try the following Windows keeps the same setting in the property right click of the MS DOS based applications e If the application is in a window and the video display performance is slow try full screen mode Windows screen folder provides this setting e Disable the Compatible Timer Hardware feature in the DEFAULT PIF or the application s program information file PIF under the NT specific section of PIF Editor Since this feature causes a decrease in performance it should be used only if it is required to make an application to run with Windows NT Windows program folder under Windows section provides this setting 292 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 elf the application is in a window and seems to pause periodically try disabling Idle Detection in the Advance section of that application s PIF Windows misc folder provides this setting in a form of a slider bar called idle sensitivity elf the MS DOS based application can be configured for printing choose LPT1 LPT2 over parallel port Most of the applications use Int17 to print when configured for LPT lt x gt If you select parallel port mode these applications print directly to printer ports Parallel mode is significantly slo
107. to save the GSW Mobile client configuration GSW Mobile Client For Windows CE View Session Help View Session Help New Open Save Save As Configuration Security Configuration Security 1 thomas32 telnet gswtc 2 stephen telnet gswtc 3 stephen telnet gsw 4 Win8Test gswtc 1 thomas32 telnet gswtc 2 stephen telnet gswtc 3 stephen telnet gsw 4 Win8Test gswtc Exit Exit 29 asw client ail 2 ls a 7 asw client dl eS Figure 146 Be sure to save your GSW Client configuration Figure 147 Select Save As File View Session Help Save As 5 OK X GJ Program F AGSW_Cint a Name default aswtc o Type Connection info gswtc v 27 csw client ail sT E E Figure 148 Select GSW configuration file name Click OK The configuration is completed Simply connect to the UTS and start talking 298 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 WINDOWS MOBILE CONFIGURATION To enable Vangard Voice when using the GSW Windows Mobile Client is simply modifying a line in the GSW Windows Mobile configuration file This is accomplished by first copying the configuration file to a workstation PC where editing is easier than on a device Next add the Vangard Voice Enabling configuration line This is done by setting the environment variable VVPath to the path of the Vangard Voice XML configuration file Then save the file and copy it back
108. with a quick view on the right side of the display of most of the Local Users configuration settings From the User Summary view it is easy to determine which property page to use to edit the configuration setting Each configuration setting resides within a frame with a label For example Logon Script is a label on the frame around the Home Folder configuration setting On the left side of the display is the property page icon with Logon Script as the name The Home Folder property is available in the Logon Script property page Simply click on the Logon Script property page to display its properties for editing There are a few exceptions to this direct association due to screen space but will still be easy to find UTS Configuration ds bill B pa Local Users 3 Global per system s User per session LL default config amp Domains 2 3 La default config amp User Configuration User Per Session Co tion Su View Automatically Terminate Session when User Exits iF Windows Create User Profile SW Client Control Display Application Title in Window Title Bar Display X close button in Windows Caption Bar Encrypt the UTS Telnet Session Vy GSW Client Control Yes Legacy Emulations TCP Receive Window Size Mode Legacy inano Figure 207 User Configuration Summary Labels and
109. with that User ID If the count of active sessions exceeds the configured count in the gs 1 usr txt file then the logon is denied A sample gs 1 usr txt file with examples is installed with the software It can be easily modified and used for your purposes GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Restrict Number of connections from a Specific IP Address Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Set Max Sessions 359 Or use legacy style below The system administrator may want to limit the number of simultaneous logons from specific IP Addresses This is especially useful for ASP environments where many users access the GSW UTS from locations that can be identified by a specific IP Address The system administrator may want to limit the number of simultaneous connections for a vatiety of reasons that range from server resource allocation to purchased access Restrictions based on the number of sessions originated from specific IP Addresses are enforced when the file gs 1 ip txt exists IP Addresses with connection restrictions counts are listed in the gs_1 ip file For each entry in the gs_1 ip file two fields are specified The IP Address and the Count How to set up IP Address Count Restriction Notice the file in the GSW UTS installation directory qe L 34 txt The file must reside in the Georgia SoftWorks Windows Universal Terminal Server installation directory NOTE The System account must have permission to read the gs_1 ip txt file
110. would enter set gwtn_reconnect auto by user and ip 146 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example set gwtn_reconnect auto by user and ip is correct set gwtn_reconnect auto by user and ip is not correct Session Saver Required Session License Count Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Failure Detection Recovery see page 398 Or use legacy style below When configured to use the Session Saver Reconnect Method it is important to make sure that the number of sessions purchased will accommodate the Session Saver requirements With Session Saver configured the UTS will save a session that was abnormally disconnected and wait for the user to reconnect If the user reconnects during the configured window of time then the UTS will present the user with his former session The UTS Session Saver must temporarily use two 2 sessions the one saved in memory and the new session being connected in the reconnection process Once the user is reconnected to his former session then the UTS will close the second session and return its associated license to the pool of available licenses Please note that each of the sessions counts towards the license count purchased even though the second session is used only for a temporary time Once the user is reconnected to his former session then the UTS will close the second session
111. you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEASYSTEM CurrentControlSetlservices GS_Tnetl Parameters Protocol 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value fot the Protocol and click OK The new Protocol will take effect for all new Telnet connections 243 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 SSH IP Protocol Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Protocols see page 377 Or use legacy style below The SSH IP protocol version can be selected to either use Pv4 IPv6 or both This SSH IP Protocol is defined using a registry key value The key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters szProtocol Possible values are ipv4 pv or both ipv4 Use IP version 4 ipv6 Use IP version 6 both Use both IP version 4 and IP version 6 default The default value is both This is how to change the registry key for the SSH Protocol Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks Windows SSH2 Telnet Server is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM Current
112. 0 0 0 194 mexico 10 0 0 238 london 16 6 6 6 chicago 10 0 0 194 mexico 10 0 0 238 london 16 6 6 6 chicago 10 0 0 194 mexico 10 0 0 238 london z 10 0 0 6 chicago 10 0 0 194 Georgia SoftWorks Session Administrator Ver 8 61 2481 Users Actual screen shot in the GSW Lab of 2481 sessions connected during pre release testing GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Copyright Georgia SoftWorks 1997 2015 All Rights Reserved User s Guide Version 8 06 January 27 2015 Microsoft Windows Windows Pocket PC Windows Mobile Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows VISTA Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows NT Windows 98 Windows 95 are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation SAP SAPConsole are trademarks of SAP AG LXE Intermec Janam Psion Teklogix Psion Teklogix Omni XT10 Symbol PSC Falcon Unitech VMware Honeywell Honeywell Dolphin 6500 Honeywell Dolphin 9950 Honeywell LXE Thor Intermec CK71 Intermec CN3 Motorola Motorola MC9190 MobileDemand MobileDemand xTable T7000 Datalogic Datalogic Elf Datalogic Falcon X3 Vangard Voice AccuSpeech are trademarks of their respective companies THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LICENSOR MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORA
113. 015 Team Services HOT KEY Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Team Services see page 366 Or use legacy style below The Team Services menu is entered by a hot key sequence The default Team Services hot key sequence is Ctrl x that is depress C 7 then x and then release the keys Both elements in the sequence are configurable because your application may already have Ctrl x defined or there may be a more convenient key or key sequence for your environment TSHotKeyCtrl You can configure the TS hot key sequence to use the control key or not use the control key The variable TSHotKeyCt rl is a registry key value This registry key sets the default behavior for all users O disables the requirement for the CTRL key to be pressed to activate the TS Menu 1 enables the requirement for the CTRL key to be pressed to activate the TS Menu default The key is TSHotKeyCtrl DWORD HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS Tnet Parameters TSHotKeyCtrl TSHotKeyVK You can configure the TS hot key sequence to use a different key instead of x The x is represented in our settings by its virtual key code and the common values are listed in the tables below The values in the table are specified in hexadecimal In the registry editor when entering a value for TSHotKeyVK be sure that the base is set to hexadecimal The variable TSHot Ke yVkK is a registry key value This registry key sets the default behavior for a
114. 2008 2008 R2 2012 R2 serious We have a philosophy of continuous improvement and we are committed to Continuing to be the leader in innovation with Telnet SSH servers for Windows Providing the fastest most robust and secure terminal server for Windows Meeting the demands of industrial and commercial applications with a rock solid dependable product Providing a level of customer service not experienced before with Telnet SSH for Windows GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Users Guide Speed Robustness and Ease of Use define the character of the Georgia SofW orks Universal Termanal Server software for Windows 7 8 VISTA 2008 R2 2012 R2 NT XP 2000 2003 The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server is the industrial quality software foundation supporting the suite of GSW server products including the GSW Telnet Server the GSW SSH Server the Session Administrator and numerous remote access utilities Thank you for purchasing the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server Software for Windows You will be pleased with the performance and robustness provided with this product Ease of use will be a significant time saver when using the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server software Complicated keyboard sequences are not required to map to the actual keys you want to send The GSW UTS was developed to meet a need in the market that allows users to operate in a fast reliable and uncomplicated fashion Windows is transformed into a
115. 2015 Tips for PSC Falcon 4410 Following are a few Tips when installing the GSW SSH Telnet Client for the above device running Windows CE NET Version 4 2 The PSC Falcon 4410 has the capability for full application lockout The steps for implementation of this feature follows 1 Application Protection Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Run gsce 4ig exe on your PC and install the GSW Universal Mobile Client for ARMVAL Configure the GSW Mobile Client as required for your environment When satisfied with the configuration from within the GSW Mobile Client perform the menu item File Save and save the settings in Program Files GSW_Clnt default gswtc And this will automatically generate the file Program Files GSW_Clnt default cab From within the GSW Mobile Client switch to User Mode using the menu item File Security File View Session Help Figure 33 Switch from Administrator to User Mode 61 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Step 5 On the device launch the File Manager and create the Folder FlashFX Disk CAB And copy the device files Program Files GSW_Clnt default cab Program Files GSW_Clnt c753x cab to the folder created above default cab Properties OK x 753x cab Properties OK E Properties EY 753x cab Type CAB File Location FlashFX Disk CAB Size 371 bytes Modified 10 10 2005 3 13 30 PM _ Hidden C System 3 deta
116. 3 User per session User Configuration Q default config Power Features Summary View gt amp Domains 2 3 Ed Local Users 6 Transfer Use Default Session Activity Log Enable EQ default config E r Team Services r Event Logging bill Swap Use System Default Log Character Translate Disable Logon Script L Windows Share Use System Default Y GSW Client Control Emulations Recover Use System Default Me Legacy Left Justify Use System Defaut Print Queue Poll interval i Printing L Team Services amp Event Logging Failure Detection Recovery Trailing FormFeeds Enable Eel pat Me a tom m Open Printing Print Command JP IP Address Range 2 i y Grandfathered Users 4 e 4 User Templates 5 GwtnPrinter2 r Printing Print Method r Pass Through Printing GwtnPrinter3 GwtnPrinter4 GwtnPrinter5 GwtnPrinter GwtnPrinter7 GwtnPrinter8 GwtnPrinterS Cancel Apply Help A Figure 213 GUI Tool Local Users Power Features Summary The Power Features Summary View provides a quick view of the e Team Services configuration See page 112 e Log Files configuration e Session Activity Log Gee page 202 e Log Characters Translate See page 204 e Printing Configuration e Print Method See page 213 e Print Queue Poll Interval see page 318 e Pass Through Printing Tr
117. 398 IP Address RANGE asn e A tons canceled teas dsr EA th ets Aaa loris 399 Grandfathered USES E A A NE BO te Aa dee a 400 User LEMPIAES A a pees aaa NS ee a a cs SN ees IN Te Ne daa 401 System Signature IMPORTANT PLEASE READ 20 402 xii GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Specifications midi Sd be ee Sale wid wees levee dd ds 403 GSW SSH2 TELNET SERVER OPERATING SYSTEM PLATFORMS oooooooooooo 403 GSW TELNET CLIENT OPERATING SYSTEM PLATFORMS ooooooooooooooooo 403 Desktop CHENES 225 ces a lid dd 403 Mobile Clio a a A ai 403 Java Clients A ppl ets oi ai 404 GSW SSH2 TELNET SERVER SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS oooooooooooo ooo 405 MEMO E A E AA A A A A A a E 405 PLOCOSS SE ES A AAA AAA A A aan se 405 Disk Re guirements A A A id 405 Technical Support Contact Information o ooooocococooooo oo 406 xiii GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Table of Figures Figute GSW UTS Components da Figure 2 GSW UTS Telnet Server Components Figure 3 GSW UTS SSH Server Components Figure 4 32 bit platform alert Figure 5 GSW UTS x64 Initial Setup Dialog Figure 6 GSW UTS Setup Installation Options Dialog Figure 7 GSW UTS Installation Path Figure 8 GSW UTS Installation Progress Mete Figure 9 GSW UTS Installation Setup Succeeded
118. 5 IP address of ACME accounting location 1 machine 198 68 35 21 IP address of ACME accounting location 2 machines 198 68 35 25 IP address of ACME accounting location 3 machines 198 68 35 26 Edit the file thosts and add the following lines Here is the list of hosts that are allowed to log in via SSH2 Telnet 198 68 35 21 ACME accounting location 1 machine 198 68 35 25 ACME accounting location 2 machine Let s not allow location 3 until the office reopens 198 68 35 26 ACME accounting location 3 machine it Restrict users access to a specific application The system administrator may optionally limit a user to run a specific application This is accomplished using thec_start bat file logon scripting technique A detailed example and description is on page 206 Restrict connections from 3 Party Clients This feature allows connections only from the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client This is another level of security that the system administrator can configure Many times the system administrator will not want users using any generic client to connect to his or her system The variable EnableRFC854Clients isa registry key value This Registry key enables or disables the ability to restrict connection from 3 party clients If it is disabled then only users using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet client are allowed to connect The key is HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CutrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Paramete
119. 5 Team Services Share The variable TSEnableShare isa registry key value This registry key sets the default behavior for all users 0 disables Team Services Share for all users 1 enables Team Services Share for all users The key is TSEnableShare DWORD HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CutrentControlSet Services GS_ Tnet Parameters TSEnableShare An environment variable may be set on either a Global or Per User basis to override the default configuration specified by the Registry parameters described above The environment variable for Team Services Share is gwtn ts enable share Possible values are Y or N or y or n This allows you to have a set of users that can have different Team Services privileges than specified in the Registry key value NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example To enable Team Services Share the following line should be present in the user s logon script set gwtn_ts enable share Y is correct set gwtn_ts enable share Y is not correct 136 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Team Services Left Justify Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Team Services see page 366 Or use legacy style below Team Services Left Justify specifies the placement of the Team Services dialog information If you are not using the mode con command you may see some screens displayed with part of the information hidden as show in Figure 91 This can be corrected using Left Justify as sho
120. 6 11 18 16 59 11 16 16 48 11319 11 84 Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn 828 7784 4446 4268 7612 6988 3368 14872 12528 24856 26132 3636 36124 23246 28626 Y 13816 11540 17 EJE TE Axfer london Shr 4 Session Administrator Ver 8 01 39 User lt s gt Georgia SoftWorks Figure 99 Session Monitor Menu Sort Options 178 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 You may also reverse the sort by re checking the User Name menu item or by clicking the column heading again Click the heading to toggle between the ascending and descending sort order Again note the arrow beside the column heading to indicate the sort order Session Administrator CAGS UTS GS Admin exe london 4 don AF 1 14 1 2 Gon Conn Figure 100 Session Monitor Descending Sort Order 179 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Monitoring SSH2 Telnet Sessions Session Monitoring is the method used to locally observe the display on a remote SSH2 Telnet session As the data displayed on the remote SSH2 Telnet client an exact copy is sent to the Session Monitor too The display is exactly the same as the display being presented to the remote session Session Monitoring is transparent to the client being monitored and does not impact their performance To select a SSH2 Telnet session to monitor first highlight the session to monitor This is accomplished e
121. 69 16 16 5 Cor a PE Conn 16 6 6 Conn 16 6 6 Conn Conn Conn Conn london 6 Goi 9 a A A 23 Conn rec 16 i 16 a Ss Conn l 3 2 2 Conn Conn Conn 42 Userts gt _ Figure 104 Session Monitor Shadowing You ate now connected to the other SSH2 Telnet session observing the screen activity exactly is appears to the other user Both you and the original user are now able to enter data into the session To end shadowing the other SSH2 Telnet session depress lt ctrl z gt You are returned to the Session Administrator screen 182 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 SSH FIPS 140 2 Sessions The GSW SSH Server has a FIPS 140 2 option available for purchase The Session Administrator can be used to verify that a GSW SSH FIPS 140 2 compliant client is connected to the GSW SSH FIPS 140 2 compliant server These connections are identified by an asterisk prepended to the User Name in the Session Administrator as shown below conn Conn Conn Co Figure 105 FIPS 140 2 compliant connections 183 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Terminating SSH2 Telnet Sessions To select a SSH2 Telnet session to terminate first highlight the session to terminate This is accomplished either by moving the up down arrow keys or clicking on the particular session Once selected either depress lt DEL gt or click the menu item Session to display the drop down item Tenwinate You may now select Terminate
122. 88 16664 9316 29784 24144 10296 30124 16168 29612 16 6 6 236 16 6 6 38 16 6 6 3 16 6 6 38 16 6 6 5 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 3 16 6 6 38 10 0 0 230 10 0 0 3 10 0 0 230 10 0 0 254 10 0 0 238 16 6 6 38 10 0 0 253 Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Rfer ASwap Swap Akfer Shr 69 16 04 69 16 M4 9248 11548 146 6 6 5 10 0 0 238 Conn Conn mexico london Shr 4 Georgia SoftWorks Session Administrator Ver 8 61 39 Userts gt Figure 98 Session Monitor Observing Telnet Sessions The initial display is sorted by the Logon Time for each session Note the Arrow adjacent to the Logon Time heading The session that has been logged on the longest is displayed first and the most recent is displayed last The display may be sorted by User Name Logon Time Process ID IP Addtess or State You can use the zew menu item to select the column to sort on or you may click on the column heading EX Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe Sort in System Order ser P User ogon Time ID ession roadcast IP Address 16 6 0 3 16 6 6 3 16 6 80 3 16 6 0 38 16 6 8 38 10 0 0 253 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 238 10 0 8 238 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 238 10 0 0 238 ID Mon State TeamS Sort Sort Sort Sort on Sort P Sort tate Sort S Task 11 16 a A BG 11 16 16 54 11 1
123. A a aa ES oh a EAO a aE ES 47 Free F nction Keysni nae ros ineo aAa VA TAERE A AEAEE EA SATE ATO a KA EA ATA AKEE AS 47 Application Launch BypasSisososiiniri sieni E E EE OSESE EA Ea NEEE EEE oahi 47 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Simplified Chinese Font Support cccccecccssesscssscsseeseeeeceecesecasecseesecsaecaseeseesccsaecnseeseeseeseceaecaeeeseeseceaecaeeeseeseceaecaeeaeeeeeeaees Configuration and Application PersistnCe cccccccscsssessseesceseeseesecseeecseeeecuseescesecseeseceeecsseecnaeeseeseeseeseseeneenserens GSW Universal Mobile Client Persistence cccceeceeccssssesesscscsesscsessssesesscsssaesescsessssesecscsssesecsasaesesscsssassesesecsssanseseeeses Mobile Client Configuration Persistence cccccsseessssscesecseesecesececessecseesecesecaaecaeeecesecaaecseesececeaecaaecseeeeenaeenaeens Mobile Client Application Persistence oooocnocnncnonicononoconnnoncnncononnnn conc nono cononcnnnnono Mobile Client Persistence Instructions ononcononnconnnnnononnnonocnonononann nac rn cn cononono nacos GSW Pocket PC 2003 Universal Mobile Client PersisStenCe onninoninnnonnnnnonncononccninanannnos PPC 2003 Configuration PersiStenCO ooooccnnonnncnonnnonononcnnnoncnncnnonnono nono nonc cn noncnnnnono PPC 2003 Application
124. ACME Mexico location in Seaside ships partially assembled components to the New York locations All the locations are connected to a single server running the 100 session copy of the GSW UTS The system administrator needs to launch a different application for each group described above This is can be accomplished using GSW UTS Logon Scripting based on IP Addresses We can start editing the gs ip rt txt file but first let s make a chart of the locations the IP addresses and the logon scripts The chart on the next page contains the information needed to set up the IP Based Logon scripting 209 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 ACME New York North 164 10 15 1 164 10 15 220 c nynrcv bat Building Receiving Dock 164 10 15 211 164 10 15 221 164 10 15 212 164 10 15 222 164 10 15 213 164 10 15 223 164 10 15 214 164 10 15 224 164 10 15 215 164 10 15 253 164 10 15 216 164 10 15 226 164 10 15 217 164 10 15 254 164 10 15 218 164 10 15 228 164 10 15 219 164 10 15 229 164 10 15 255 ACME New York North 164 10 16 1 164 10 16 23 c nynman bat Building Manufacturing 164 10 16 10 164 10 16 23 Floor Guns 164 10 16 11 164 10 16 24 164 10 16 12 164 10 16 25 ACME New York North 164 10 16 50 164 10 16 90 c_nynqua bat Building Manufacturing 164 10 16 60 164 10 16 100 Floor Quality Assurance 164 10 16 70 Guns 164 10 16 80 ACME New York North 164 14 12 210 164 14 15 220 c_nynsh bat Buildin
125. AM running Windows XP RF DTIO Interface The GSW UTS has a built in interface to work with the GSW RF Directed Terminal Input output Engine The GSW Directed Terminal I O Engine is an add on component that intercepts a specific set of terminal input output operating system calls initiated by your application and directs terminal I O through a specialized high performance interface within the GSW Universal Terminal Server UTS A new performance standard is realized when using the GSW Directed Terminal I O Engine with the GSW UTS for Windows Large systems will experience a dramatic performance improvement as well as a substantial increase in the number of sessions on a setvet The GSW DTIO Engine is specialized software focused on a narrow set of goals The objectives are to provide significant performance improvements and a higher number of sessions on a server than previously possible due to processing bottlenecks and CPU Limitations Please visit the GSW website for more information on the GSW RF DTIO Engine GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Team Services Team Services is about collaboration and efficiency GSW Team Services provides your mobile device users a breakthrough in telnet SSH technology that shatters all prior usability and efficiency standards by allowing for unprecedented user collaboration and cutting the costs of hardware The implications are enormous GSW Team Services has the potential to radically transform the cl
126. ANUARY 27 2015 Special Bell Processing Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Bell Control see page 376 Or use legacy style below The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server can intercept a special character written to the application s screen and send a bell character to the terminal in the place of the intercepted character The number of times that the bell will sound is also configurable The default count is 1 The Special Character Location and Bell Count are defined using Registry Values Usually the application can identify a normally unused position on the screen that can be used for the placement of the special character This location is specified in the registry as described below Registry Parameters are located HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters BellX column of the bell character initialized to Oxffffffff which makes it inactive BellY row of the bell character initialized to Oxfffffff amp which makes it inactive BellChar value of the bell character initialized to 0x87 BellCnt value for the number of times that the bell will sound initialized to 0x01 All four parameters work for all types of clients including the gs_admin In order to disable the feature set BellX or BellY to Oxf ff ffff NOTE 1 The Special Character will be automatically replaced with a space character on the screen NOTE 2 The top left screen position is defined as 1 1
127. Client If you are using the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client for Pocket PC 2002 3 Windows Mobile class machines then the following configuration steps may be helpful Installation of the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client on Pocket PC 2002 3 class is described on page 33 1 On the Pocket PC device select one of the following depending on the class of device For Pocket PC 2002 Start GSW SSH2 Telnet For Pocket PC 2003 Start Programs GSW SSH2 Telnet This selection will launch the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet client 2 When your run the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet client you will be prompted for the connection info as on the picture left below Encryption Port Use s amp t v 3 User Heartbeat Interval fo Automatic logon C Unicode session Password Domain Figure 151 SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Configuration Host Prompt Figure 152 SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Configuration Options Screen 3 Click the Options button to verify the connection options 4 Press the OK button to leave the Options screen 5 Press the OK button again to accept the connection info and connect to the server 304 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 6 Wait for the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client to connect to the server You should see the SAP logon screen similar to one on the picture below left taunt UN Save changes to SAPCnx gswkc Figure 153 SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Configuration Logon Screen Figure 154 SAPCons
128. Configuration Property Pages Pivivivivivly Y Local User Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Copy Copy the User configuration to an UTS copy buffer This configuration can then be pasted either creating a new User Configuration object or overwriting and existing object Paste Paste a copied Logon Script User User name or Template to this specific Name This creates a folder with the name specified for the Logon Script Rename Rename a IP Address Range Logon Script Delete Delete IP Address Range Logon Script see footnote 44 Export Export the Logon Script User configuration to a XML formatted file Import Import the Logon Script User configuration from a XML formatted file 44 Make sure that the Users associated with this IP Address Range are logged off or can safely be disconnected when Deleting or Renaming the IP Address Range based User configuration 344 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Grandfathered Users JANUARY 27 2015 os All This icon represents ALL Grandfathered Users Grandfathered Users This is the root for all Grandfathered Users Grandfathered users are users defined in a previously installed version 8 02 or earlier of the UTS Folders with the name of a user in the scripts folder that contain logon script are considered Grandfathered Users Their logon scripts remain in the scripts folder until the administrator moves
129. ControlSet services GS_Tnet Parameters szProtocol 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value for the Protocol and click OK The new SSH Protocol will take effect for all new SSH connections 244 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 UTS Protocol Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Protocols see page 377 Or use legacy style below The UTS protocol can be specified to use Telnet SSH or Both You must be registered to use SSH before it can be selected The UTS Protocol is defined using three registry key values The keys are HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters LsnOnLoopbackOnly HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_ Tnet Parameters AllowTelnetWithSSH HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_ Tnet Parameters UseGSW_SSHD As shown in the table below set the registry key values to obtain the desired protocol PROTOCOL LsnOnLoopbackOnly AllowTelnetwithSsH UseGSW_SSHD Telnet 0 0 0 SSH 1 0 0 Both 0 1 1 Table 47 Registry Key Values for UTS Protocol Table The default UTS protocol is Telnet when SSH is not installed The default UTS protocol is SSH when SSH is installed NOTE 1 Other combinations are undefined and are not supported by the UTS configuration NOTE 2 Enabling Telnet and SSH may compromise security goals You must understand the ramifications if you enable both Telnet
130. DOS application Alternatively you may need issue the mode con lines 24 command Note if you issue this command you will not see the last row of your application Alt Key Support for all emulations Alt keys are completely supported For 3 party client Alt key operations see page 165 Control C Configuration Support for all SSH2 Telnet Clients Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Control C see page 393 Or use legacy style below There are different expectations as to the function of the behavior when lt control c gt is depressed The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server allows configuration of the behavior for lt control c gt by setting an environment variable in a logon script The environment variable for the lt control c gt behavior is gwtn_ctrl_c_mode The modes of conttol c behavior ate e key lt control c gt will be sent to the application as a character value of decimal 3 e event lt control c gt will be sent to the application as a signal event which can be trapped e auto The SSH2 Telnet Server will attempt to get the application s lt control c gt settings and send either event or key whichever appears to be appropriate Sometimes the SSH2 Telnet server will make the wrong choice and you will have to override with an explicit setting This is the default setting when the gwtn_ctrl_c_mode is not set For example to select Event Mode lt control c gt behavior you would enter set gwtn_ctrl1_c mode e
131. EORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Is there any way to get the bell to sound on the client For customers that have control over the development of their own applications the answer is yes Please see page 266 for detailed instructions Is there any way to get the bell to sound on the client when using SAPConsole after a reconnect Please see page 268 for special bell processing utility Gswbell exe when using SAPConsole Can I start and stop services when connected via SSH2 Telnet Yes The commands net start and net stop provide this ability Please execute the net start or net stop from a Windows command prompt for the details on the net commands and parameters Can I configure user information when connected via SSH2 Telnet Yes The commands net user net account etc provide this capability Please execute the net user or net account from a Windows command prompt for the details on the net commands and parameters Control C is not working as expected What can I do Several valid behaviors exist for Control C The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server allows explicit configuration of the behavior for control c on either a global or per user basis by using the environment variable gwtn_ctrl_c_mode see page 158 I changed the IP Address of my Server and SSH2 Telnet does not work anymore After changing the IP address you should stop and start the SSH2 Telnet Server
132. ERVER Network Primer wih Ipd Service Printer Name WrkGrpPtrt Network Primer wih Ipd Service Name WrkGrpPtr2 Soloman printer has been set up with Printer Name GwtnPrinter2 PrinterShare GwtnPrinterShare2 Logon Script for First Workgroup Directory C GS_UTS Scripts UserName For each user in workgroupl Filename k_start bat net use lpt2 soloman GwtnPrinterShare2 Set GWIN LOCAL PRINT M OD open set GNIN_ LOCAL PRINTCMD2 lpr S 192 32 200 200 P WkgGrpPtrl ts Logon Script for Second WorkGroup Directory C GS_UTS Scripts UserName For each user in workgroup2 Filename k_start bat net use lpt2 soloman GwtnPrinterShare2 Set GWIN LOCAL PRINT METHOD Open Set GWIN LOCAL PRINTCMD2 lpr S 192 32 200 201 P WkgGrpPtr2 s Figure 122 True Client Side Printing Open Print Method Continued on next page 226 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Important Information IP Address of the first Host providing the Ipd service 192 32 200 200 Printer Name WrkGrpPtr1 IP Address of the second Host providing the pd service 192 32 200 201 Printer Name WrkGrpPtr2 Server Computer Name soloman Telnet SSH Client Any No Restriction Operating System Any No Restriction The only requirement is that an pd service exists for the printer to be used In this case the network printer provides the service Of course the Virtual printer must be defined as described in the Virtual Printer section The logon script k_
133. EXAMPLE CONFIRM OPERATION OF SPECIAL BELL PROCESSING Perform these steps for a quick test to verify that the Special Bell Processing is operating This example is useful for testing purposes Objective The Bell will sound when the character 5 is entered on the 15 column of the 3 row on the screen As indicated above user the registry editor to set values for the BellX to 15 Of BellY to 3 03 and BellChar to 5 35 Next start a SSH2 Telnet session At the command prompt clear the screen go to 3 line and start typing character 5 until you get to column 15 When you get to the 15th column you should hear the bell and the digit 5 will not be visible because SSH2 Telnet server will replace it with space 267 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSWBELL Special Bell Processing for SAPConsole Special Bell processing is available for SAPConsole users For expected Bell Operation after Session Saver Reconnects the SAPConsole must be launched via the Gswbell utility Use the appropriate command for your UTS edition 32 bit or 64 bit Command gswbell for x86 32 bit UTS edition Command gswbell x64 for x64 64 bit UTS edition Description GSWBell is a command line program that is usually entered in your GSW UTS logon scripts Please review Logon Scripting A command line argument is used to specify the SAPConsole Gswbell will launch SAPConsole Syntax Gswbell lt sapconsole file path gt sapcnsl exe Sap
134. GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Universal Terminal Server for Windows 7 8 VISTA 2008 R2 2012 R2 and Windows NT XP 2000 2003 For GSW Telnet Server and GSW SSH Server Users Guide THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server for Windows 7 8 VISTA 2008 R2 2012 R2 NT XP 2000 2003 Copyright 1997 2015 Georgia SoftWorks All Rights Reserved Public Square 17 Hwy 9 South PO Box 729 Dawsonville Georgia 30534 Telephone 706 265 1018 Fax 706 265 1020 http www georgiasoftworks com GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Reliable Consistent Full Featured while providing incredible performance es Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe ile iew ession roadcast User Name Logon Time Process ID Mon IP Address State TeamSJ chicago 69 711 13 24 41612 10 0 0 194 Conn Info 10 0 0 194 mexico 10 0 0 238 london z 16 6 6 6 chicago 10 6 0 194 chicago 10 0 0 194 chicago 10 0 0 194 london 16 6 6 6 chicago 10 6 0 194 chicago 10 0 0 194 london 16 6 6 6 chicago z 10 0 0 194 chicago 10 0 0 194 london 16 6 86 6 rec z 10 0 0 106 rec 16 6 6 166 rec 16 6 6 166 rec 10 0 0 186 mexico 10 0 0 238 london 16 6 6 6 mexico 10 0 0 238 london 16 6 6 6 mexico 10 0 0 238 london 16 6 6 6 chicago 10 0 0 194 mexico 10 0 0 238 london 10 0 B 6 chicago 10 0 0 194 mexico 10 0 0 238 london 16 6 6 6 chicago 10 0 0 194 mexico 10 0 0 238 london 16 6 6 6 chicago 1
135. GIA SOFTWORKS Security Summary E 3 UTS Configuration 5 Global per system 42 Active Configuration Automatic Logon Failure Detection Recovery Power Features Emulations Bell Control Protocols UTS System Templates 2 s User per session JANUARY 27 2015 4 Security Security Summary View Telnet Encryption Access Control Telnet E Maximum Sessions Allowed to Connect limited only by your o ion Restricti Allow 3rd Party clients to connect FIP Telnet Encryption y y Connection Restrictions Access Control View File By IP Address connections by User ID connections by IP Address Figure 179 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security Summary The Security Summary View provides a quick view of the e Telnet Encryption See page 88 e Access Control 93 e Connection Restrictions See page 93 e FIPS Restrictions See page 92 and allows viewing of the relevant text files e Telnet Encryption by IP Address See page 91 e Connection Restrictions by IP Address See page 99 e Access control for the number of connections by a User ID See page 97 e Access control for the number of connections by an IP Address See page 99 356 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Security Telnet Encryption 5 4 UTS Configuration Telnet Encryption a Global per system G4 Active C
136. GUI Active Configuration Emulations Character Translation GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Terminal Initialization GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Bell Control GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Protocols Global System Templates cccccnconnacarrasasnn JANUARY 27 2015 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Figure 199 Global System Template Individual Figure 200 Cascading Configuration Selection Figure 201 GUI Tool User Default Configuration Figure 202 GUI Tool Domains cececceeeesteeeeseeees Figure 203 GUI Tool Domain Names Figure 204 Domain Name User Figure 205 GUI Tool Local Users Figure 206 GUI Tool Local User Summary onconconocncnnnoncanrnronnenrnress de Figure 207 User Configuration Summary Labels and Property Page association Figure 208 GUI Tool Local User Logon Script Figure 209 GUI Tool Local User Windows Figure 210 GUI Tool Local User GSW Client Control Figure 211 GUI Tool Local Users Emulations Figure 212 GUI Tool Local Users Emulations Figure 213 GUI Tool Local Users Power Features Summary Figure 214 GUI Tool Local Users Power Features Printing Figure 215 GUI Tool Local Users Power Features Team Services Figure 216 GUI Tool Local Users Power Features Event Logging Figure 217 GUI Tool Local Users Failure Detection Recovery Figure 218 GUI Tool IP Address Range
137. IDE HEARTBEAT Gs _clnt exe H1800 specifies a heartbeat time of 30 minutes 1800 seconds 30 minutes Normally there is no need to change this value To disable the Client Side Heartbeat set it to 1 To change the Client Heartbeat modify the command line parameter as described in the section on GSW Telnet and SSH Client command line options Usage page 76 Note If an Inactivity Timeout occurs and the Session Saver is active the Session will be suspended otherwise graceful termination will be initiated if specified 20 The file name for the GSW SSH client is gs_ssh exe 151 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Graceful Termination of DOS Applications Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Failure Detection Recovery see page 398 Or use legacy style below The Georgia SoftWorks Windows Universal Terminal Server is outstanding in the case of a link or remote PC failure we attempt to gracefully terminate the executing DOS application therefore saving important data that may otherwise be lost Many applications are terminated by sending a sequence of characters to the application such as ESC ENTER Applications may have specific sequences We allow a termination string to be defined as an environment variable in the k_start bat orc start bat file When a session is to be terminated due the client heartbeat timer expiring or the server side inactivity timer expiring then the defined termination string will be sent to the asso
138. ING TO MY LOCAL PRINTER WHEN CONNECTED ACROSS THE INTERNET OR RAS I have sales people that SSH2 Telnet to the server to get reports from a variety of locations They carry laptops with portable printers and SSH2 Telnet to the server either through the Internet or via RAS They need to get customer and shipping information printed The sales application software that they use prints to Ipt3 How do they have printer output sent to their laptop portable printers This is an excellent opportunity for the Georgia SoftWorks Enhanced True Client Printing Method Remote Locations Corporate Server Laptop Name SSMLaptop User SuperSalesMan LAN WAN or INTERNET User SuperSalesWoman DIALUP Laptop Name SSWLaptop Client Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client for Windows The virtual p Printer Name GwtnPrin PrinterShare GwtnPrinterSharel Client Operating System The attached printer f r eac rectory C GS UTS Scriots SuperS5SalesMan and is using LPT1 SuperSalesMan laptop name SSMLaptop tart bat printer Share Name is SalesManPrinter net use lp soloman GwtnPrinterSharel p name SSWLaptop oman laptop printer Share Name is SalesWomanPrinter The Printer driver is set to Generic Text Command line used to initiate the GSW SSH2 Telnet client s cint exe r1 LPTl Figure 119 True Client Side Printing Printing across the Internet or RAS 217 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Note The Logon Scripts can be implemented in
139. JANUARY 27 2015 Sample web page for systems with MS IE 4 0 and higher lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt META NAME GENERATOR Content Microsoft Visual Studio 6 0 gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt Insert HTML here gt lt applet code GSJC class name GSJC width 640 height 520 gt lt param name cabbase value gsjc cab gt lt param name port value 23 gt lt param name user value testl gt lt param name password value testl gt lt param name domain value gt lt param name bkgColor value 008080 gt lt param name HBTime value 20 gt lt param name useEncryption value false gt lt applet gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt 279 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Sample web page for systems with Netscape Communicator lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt META NAME GENERATOR Content Microsoft Visual Studio 6 0 gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt Insert HTML here gt lt applet code GSJC class name GSJC archive VALUE gsjc jar width 640 height 520 gt lt param name port value 23 gt lt param name user value testl gt lt param name password value testl gt lt param name domain value gt lt param name bkgColor value 008080 gt lt param name HBTime value 20 gt lt param name useEncryption value false gt lt applet gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt 280 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Sample web
140. L OR WRITTEN REGARDING THE PROGRAM OR DOCUMENTATION AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT THE PROGRAM WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE IN NO EVENT WILL GEORGIA SOFTWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PROGRAMS COPYING WHILE YOU ARE PERMITTED TO MAKE BACKUP COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE FOR YOU OWN USE AND PROTECTION YOU ARE NOT PERMITTED TO MAKE COPIES FOR THE USE OF ANYONE ELSE LICENSE YOU ARE LICENSED FOR A SPECIFIC NUMBER OF CONCURRENT OR SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIONS TO A SINGLE WINDOWS 7 8 NT XP VISTA 2000 2003 2008 R2 2012 R2 SYSTEM THE NUMBER IS SPECIFIED IN YOUR PURCHASE AGREEMENT ANY ATTEMPT TO INCREASE THE NUMBER OF SIMULTANEOUS OR CONCURRENT CONNECTIONS EITHER INTENTIONAL OR UNINTENTIONAL IS IN VIOLATION OF THIS AGREEMENT THE GEORGIA SOFTWORKS WINDOWS 7 8 NT XP VISTA 2000 2003 2008 R2 2012 R2 TELNET SERVER SOFTWARE MAY BE INSTALLED ON A SINGLE WINDOWS 7 8 NT XP VISTA 2000 2003 2008 R2 2012 R2 SYSTEM GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Table of Contents
141. Menu Figure 149 Select the GSW Windows Mobile client configuration file Note the Globe Icon Copy the file back to the device to the appropriate folder on the device The configuration is completed Simply make a connection with the GSW Mobile client to the UTS and start talking 300 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Desktop Client configuration for Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Configuration of the desktop client is easy and requires the addition of a command line parameter that specifies the path to the Vangard Voice XML file Learn more about desktop client parameters on page 73 Notes e The UTS and Desktop client version must be 8 04 or greater e Vangard Voice runtime must be installed and XML file must reside on the client machine Step 1 Open the desktop client batch file Following is an example for specifying client command line parameters The GS SSH2 Telnet Client shortcut invokes the batch file GS_SClnt bat for Telnet or GS_SSSH bat for SSH which in turn launches the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client The GS_SClInt bat and GS_SSSH bat files reside in the GS_UTS installation directory The contents of the batch files look as follows echo off start if exist oncel bat do call oncel bat if exist oncel bat do del oncel bat gs_clnt exe if errorlevel 2 goto copy exit COpy copy gs clnt new gs clnt exe gt gsnull txt if exist once2 bat do call once2 bat if exist once2 bat do del
142. NET 4 215 06 ppc2002c exe gsce_4ig exe Pocket PC 2003 gsce_4g exe DEVICE il Win Mobile 2005 WM5 6 gscex86g exe EN aes Intermec CK30 ppc2003c exe Intermec CV60 gsce_x86 exe LXE MX3X Psion Teklogix 7535 gsce_4i exe GSW CLIENTS Psion Teklogix 8525 aH Psion Teklogix WITH E TELNET amp SSH2 WorkAbout Pro Symbol MC9060G gsce_4 exe GSW CLIENTS ARE INCLUDED AT NO EXTRA COST Figure 27 GSW Client and Operating System Diagram 29 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Client Support for Voice Enabled Control Georgia SoftWorks has collaborated with Vangard Voice Systems Inc to develop and implement the required software to enable the UTS Mobile and Desktop clients to operate with AccuSpeech Mobile their enterprise voice solution Vangard Voice System s solution creates a custom voice user interface for controlling existing mobile devices application and business processes Configuration is simple The robust full featured GSW UTS installed at thousands of mission critical location around the world coupled with Vangard s AccuSpeech Mobile provides a reliable and innovative solution that is nothing less than a quantum leap in mobile workforce productivity The GSW Clients are now voice enabled for operation with AccuSpeech Mobile so workforces can voice collect access and transact information while performing and focusing on the task at hand GSW UTS Mobile and Desktop clie
143. OFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Syntax 2 Terminate All Telnet SSH Sessions The T operation does not use any additional arguments This command terminates all SSH2 Telnet sessions EXAMPLE THE GSW GS_ADMIN COMMAND LINE UTILITY SYNTAX 2 TERMINATE ALL SESSIONS The following is the syntax to use the GS_ADMIN command line utility to terminate ALL SSH2 Telnet sessions GS ADMIN T Syntax 3 Obtain a snapshot of the SSH2 Telnet Server Status The I operation creates the file gs_ainfo txt that contains the current status information for the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server The file is created in the root GSW SSH2 Telnet Server installation folder The file contains similar information as displayed in the Session Administrator main screen EXAMPLE THE GSW GS_ADMIN COMMAND LINE UTILITY SYNTAX 3 STATUS 1 The following is the syntax to use the GS_ADMIN command line utility to create the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server Status Information file GS ADMIN 1 You can also specify the filename and path for the information file EXAMPLE THE GSW GS_ADMIN COMMAND LINE UTILITY SYNTAX 3 STATUS 2 The following is the syntax to use the GS_ADMIN command line utility to create the GSW SSH2 Telnet Status information file and put it in the file folder c telnetstatusltime with the filename mondaynoon txt GS ADMIN IC telnetstatus time mondaynoon txt Information File Layout The file uses standard Windows ini format rules File I
144. ORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Technical Support Contact Information In order to keep Technical Support Free please help us to keep our cost down 1 Gather all relevant system information 2 Write your question down This not only helps us but also helps you in articulating the question If the question is not an emergency please use e mail at support georgiasoftworks com We try to respond within 24 hours Please use the email support tips described below when emailing support Or Call 706 265 1018 EST M F 9 00 a m to 5 00 p m and have your Product ID ready Email Support Tips To expedite support for suspected problems please perform the following test steps below to help us diagnose the issue 1 Disconnect all users Make sure that no other user connects at the time of the test 2 Wait 5 minutes 3 Delete all log files from the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server installation Log subdirectory on the computer running the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server Usually c GS_UTS Log 4 To expedite resolution reboot the Server if possible 5 Duplicate the problem 6 Send us at support georgiasoftworks com a A description of the problem including User ID s Domain and IP Addresses b All files in the Georgia SoftWorks log folder It is usually located at c gs_uts log but may be different depending on the installation folder selected c The logon script associated with the user experiencing the problem That is the c_ start b
145. Persistence c cceccesecseesceeeceseeseeeseeecesecaecseeeeceaeeeaeeneees PPC 2003 Persistence Instructions sio dace tues p iia E did deca dle iii Tips Jor Intermec CR 302 CKI A sive coves essa A A Savalas Ga aaah aS ER Han ee N r Lipsfor Intermec CVO 0 gives sas A A Tips for PSION TEKLOGIX WORKABOUT Pro 7535 and 8525 devices Tips for SYMBOL MC 9060G MC9090 devices ccccsecceseesceseeseesetseeeceeeecseescesecseesecsesaeceseecaaeeseeaeeseeaesteeeeneerees Lips for LXE MX3X Dev ies seinan A ais Tips for PSG Falcon 44 LO ni oaasi AS A ea ele ap A A da sR Oca Rete Application PYOLECH ON snene aeaa A A A Tea eas Pag ays E OE PER ea eased ee Backup and Restore the Georgia SoftWorks SSH Telnet Server 68 How to use the GSW Universal Terminal Server for Windows 69 GRORGIA SOFTWORKS CLLENT raai ma eina a ii A gg Aa ew one sl See 69 AOS EA A A A A A A A risas 69 Login ID A A A Ad ds 70 DOMAIN MEL A A A lA ii bt ias 72 Georgia SoftWorks Desktop Client Command line options Description 73 GSW Telnet and SSH Client command line options USA ooonnnninnnnnnninnnnnnconnncnnenanna rra nn anna rana arca 76 Automatic Update of Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client cccccccccccccseccseeseessceeeceseceecuseceeesceeseeeseenseseseensennsenaes 78 Application Title Display lt o did A dd ds Ai bd 81 Desktop Client Display X in Top Right Cornet c cccccccccsscsssessesseesceseeseesecseeecseesccesseesessesaeceeeeceeeeseeaece
146. Property Page association 388 Local User bill E gE i GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Local User Logon Script 5 4 UTS Configuration 1 Logon Script Global per system 8 s User per session User Configuration Local User bill 42 default config Logon Script Configuration Options lomains re na ceja m User Home Folder Upon connection you can specify the folder f in which the user is deposited rl dafn caang Home Folder Bow Ef bill se Example d users tom o This will deposit user tom into the folder Windows d ucerc tam whan ennnartad GSW Client Control This can be used to restrict a user toa Emulations p Automatically Terminate Session when User Exts Application specific application When the user exits the d Legacy application the session is terminated Ifnot Power Features Tamias Sonion Wien User bas Apiai terminated the user is left at a command Failure Detection Recovery prompt fh pat Power Users This determines the name of fb tom 2 f al o Fano Paned fo A odaat Laat 4P IP Address Range 2 Edit Logon Script The Logon Script is important for correct 8 Grandfathered Users 4 Edit operation Please view your script below User Templates 5 until you need to edit Click button to the left Location EAGS_UTS scnpts LocalUsers illk_start bat to edit in Notepad
147. R Doug can you help the new hire Steve He is at the loading dock and is havin g some problems scanning incoming parts Thanks Larry About to send Broadcast Message to lt doug gt Are you sure lt ancel gt Figure 117 Send broadcast message to a specific user confirmation prompt 191 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Selecting lt OK gt will send the broadcast message to SSH2 Telnet user doug Selecting lt Cancel gt will abort the broadcast message The message will be displayed on the client terminal similar to the figure below Schedule a Broadcast Message You can schedule a broadcast message using Georgia SoftWorks Broadcast command line utility and your favorite scheduling program The GSW Broadcast utility allows you to send a message to ALL active SSH2 Telnet sessions or to a specific session You can identify the specific SSH2 Telnet session by User Name and or IP Address The text of the message that is sent is specified in an ASCII text file GS Blast iip_ address uuser name file path Command GS_BCast Description Command line utility that Broadcasts sends a text message to one or all active SSH2 Telnet sessions Syntax GS_BCast iip address uuser name lt file path gt Arguments There are 2 optional arguments and 1 required argument 1 17p_address The i parameter is followed by the IP address corresponding to the SSH2 Telnet session or sessions to send the broadcast mess
148. RANSFER Figure 69 After Team Service TRANSFER The session Sam was using is terminated during the process freeing Sam to take his lunch break 121 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Swap The Team Services Swap operation takes two sessions on two devices and moves the session on the 1 device to the 2 device and moves the session on the 2 device to the 1 device Each session is preserved and will resume exactly where it was when the swap occurred In the diagram below we have two people Doug and Andy Each has a session and a device Doug wants to use Andy s wireless mobile device to scan some items his truck mount device cannot reach Andy still needs to work but can finish his work with the truck mount With TS Swap Doug can transfer his session to Andy s device while simultaneously transferring Andy s session to Doug s truck mount device Both can continue their work in the application and not even have to log off DEVICES PERSON SESSIONS Team Services SWAP CONNECTIONS Figure 70 Before Team Service SWAP Doug asks Andy if they can Swap devices Andy consents and enters Team Services and presses F3 to enter Accept Swap mode Andy s display shows he is session id s5 Acc xfer Transfer ACC swap Swap Acc share Share Recover echto Cancel 5 oew cien r B Figure 71 Enter Team Services Ctrl x 3 esw cine 9 Al Figure 72 Accep
149. RY 27 2015 You can view the GSW Software Installation Status Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server UTS Georgia SoftWorks SSH Shield Georgia SoftWorks RF DTIO Engine Georgia SoftWorks RF FormMaker Figure 11 GSW Software Installation Status This information indicates that the GSW UTS is installed and running The version is also displayed and will indicate if the 64 bit edition is installed The GSW SSH Server SSH Shield is also installed The installation status also indicates that the Georgia SoftWorks RF Directed Terminal Input output DTIO Engine are not installed This item will only be checked as installed and running if it was purchased and installed GSW RF DTIO boosts performance and can increase the number of sessions that an application can handle in many environments Please visit GSW website for more information on the RF DTIO Engine The installation status also indicates that the Georgia SoftWorks RF FormMaker is no installed This item will only be checked as installed and running if it was purchased and installed The GSW RF FormMaker gives Visual Basic programmers the ability to quickly develop forms for display on RF Devices used in Client Server environments Please visit GSW website for more information on the GSW RF FormMaker 15 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Registration Note If you are performing a fresh install of the 30 day trial copy you do not need to register the software Skip
150. S 1 SAPConsole Standard SAPConsole installed from SAPGUI CD 2 Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server e Configured for local printing 3 SAPLPD e A known method of printing to local client printers that is supported by R 3 SAPLPD is installed by default with SAPGUI on SAPConsole machine 4 Sapscript e All labels printed on a tethered printer are in fact a sapscript form Newer methods such using BAR ONE for R 3 from Zebra allow WYSIWYG label designs to be uploaded into a sapscript form Creating labels this way does not require learning the printer s command language 5 R 3 Printing e Utilizes standard R 3 printing capabilities All setup is completed in transaction SPAD To R 3 a tethered printer appears like a local printer attached to the SAPConsole machine 311 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Configuration Details Steps To Configuration 1 Install and Configure Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server 2 Configure SSH2 Telnet Server for Mobile printing 3 Configure each SAPConsole user for local printing 4 Install and configure SAPLDP on SAPConsole machine 5 Configure mobile printers in R 3 6 Modify RF device configuration to allow printing 7 Create sapscript form containing barcode label for mobile printer 8 Determine or create R 3 printing logic e g an R 3 transaction to print label using the proper sapscript form 312 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Install and Configure Georgia
151. S2 Internal report to GSW 12 ERROR_WAIT Internal report to GSW 13 ERROR_UNEXPECETED NOTIFICATION Transfer aborted Unexpected notification from the agent 14 ERROR_SET_CONTROL_HANDLER Transfer aborted The CTRL C handler could not be set 15 UNDEFINED 16 ERROR_INVALID_CLNT Transfer aborted Client software is not the GSW Client 17 ERROR_GET_GSCLNT Transfer aborted Client type could not be determined 18 ERROR DISK FULL Transfer aborted Disk is full on client 19 ERROR_STDIO Transfer aborted Call to the standard C Library failed 20 ERROR_WIN32 Transfer aborted WIN32 Subsystem Error 21 ERROR_SYNC Transfer aborted Session encountered unrecoverable synchronization errors User needs to establish a new session before a file transfer can be used again 22 UNDEFINED 23 ERROR_TCP_SEND Transfer aborted Connection broken during transfer 24 ERROR_ABORTED BY USER Transfer aborted User pressed CTRL C or CTRL Break 25 ERROR_SESSION_ SUSPENDED Transfer aborted Session became suspended Table 49 GS_PUT Error Levels The usage of the errorlevel variable in an automated file transfer batch file might have the form EXAMPLE UTILITIES GS_PUT ERRORLEVEL USAGE IN BATCH FILE begin c GS_UTS gs_put d corba hints dealers doc c books dealers doc if errorlevel 25 goto ERROR SESSION SUSPENDED if errorlevel 24 goto ERROR ABORTED BY USER if errorlevel 23 goto ERROR TCP SEND if errorlevel 21 goto ERROR_SYNC
152. SOFTWORKS USER TEMPLATE SPECIFIC JANUARY 27 2015 User Template A specific Local User This is the User Template Name for a specific User Folder UT Click to expand to see the property pages for the specific user template S 1 Click to collapse Installation Folder scripts Templates User Template Name Right Click Operation Paste Rename Delete Add User and Create Default Configuration Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Add Domain Add User Create Default Configuration Contain Property Pages ay User Template Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Copy the User configuration to an UTS copy buffer This configuration can then be pasted either creating a new User Configuration object or overwriting and existing object Paste a copied User User name or Template to this specific Name This creates a folder with the name specified for the User Rename a User Template Delete a User Template Export the User Template configuration to a XML formatted file Import the User configuration from a XML formatted file 348 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GUI Migration for Existing Users For those customers that ate used to the pre GUI method of configuration the UTS you have two options Continue to use the legacy UTS con
153. SP HL drivers 17 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Floating License Hardware Key Installation Instructions Note If you are using a USB Floating License on a Windows NT system ran the file aksnt4usb exe prior to the following steps 1 Copy the files from the Floating License folder hardkey on the provided CD to the hard drive on yout server 2 Run the HASPUserSetup exe program and follow the installation instructions After installation of the hardware key install the GSW Telnet Server as described on page 10 if it is not already installed See the GSW SSH Server User s Guide for installation instructions of the GSW SSH Server 3 Ifyou have User Account Control enabled you may get a prompt that says Do you want to allow the following program to make changes to this computer Click Yes a User Account Control Do you want to allow the following program to make changes to this computer F Program name Sentinel LDK Verified publisher SafeNet Inc File origin Hard drive on this computer v Show details No Change when these notifications appear Figure 14 User Account Control 18 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 4 You will first see the SafeNet formerly Aladdin initial Welcome Screen Welcome to the Sentinel Runtime Installation Wizard Computing space requirements Figure 15 SafeNet welcome screen computing space requirements 5 You will first see the SafeNet
154. Service SWAP Figure 71 Enter Team Services Ctrl x Figure 72 Accept Swap Mode F3 Note the session id is s5 Figure 73 Enter Team Services Ctrl1 x amp press F4 Figure 74 Selects 2 to Swap with s5 Figure 75 After Team Service SWAP Figure 76 Before Team Service SHARE Figure 77 Enters Team Services Ctrl x Figure 78 Accept Share Mode F5 Note session id is s5 124 Figure 79 Enters Team Services Ctrl x amp presses F6 124 Figure 80 Selects 2 to Share session id s5 124 Figure 81 After Team Service SHARE Figure 82 Undoing the Share Figure 83 Exit typed in Share Figure 84 Before Team Service RECOVER Figure 85 After Accident but before Team Service RECOVER Figure 86 Enters Team Services Ctrl x Figure 87 List of Suspended Sessions F7 and select session Figure 88 After Team Service RECOVER Figure 89 Team Services Session Information Figure 90 Team Services Tasks Menu Figure 91 Left Justify Disabled Figure 92 Left Justify Enabled Figure 93 Team Services Session Administrator Figure 94 Team Services Session Administrator SHARE Figure 95 Team Services Session Administrator Sort Figure 96 Team Services Session Details oonocmm Figure 97 Select graphics option for 3rd party client Figure 98 Session Monitor Observing Telnet Sessions Figure 99 Session Monitor Menu Sort
155. SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server 1 Install SSH2 Telnet Server as per instructions in the User s Guide There are no special installation options for mobile printing 2 Create a Windows account for each user that will utilize mobile printing The username MUST match the user s SAP R 3 login name 3 Create script subdirectory e g C GS_UTS script rfuser for user rfuser and create the k_start bat login script file for each user Configure SSH2 Telnet Server for Mobile printing 1 Create a virtual printer on the SAPConsole machine In creating a Virtual Printer or local mobile printer the key information are the Printer Name the Share Name and the Port The following steps are required to setup the printer Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen Select Settings then printers Double click on Add Printer The add printer window opens Select My Computer and Click on Next Select the lpt1 port Do NOT enable print pooling Click Next From the Manufactures list select Generic From the Printers select Generic Text Only Click Next Name your printer GwtnPrinter1 NOTE This name is required Click Next Select Shared and name the printer GwtnPrinterSharel NOTE This name is required Click Next After the printer is created double click on the printer icon Pause the printer by selecting the menu item Printer and selecting Pause Printer This printer must remain paused at all times Thi
156. System Templates 2 s User per session Figure 191 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Default Domain The Emulations Default Domain screen provides configuration for e Domain Name See page 270 371 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 __ Emulations Negotiate Windows Size E UTS Configuration i Negotiate Window Size a Global per system by dei NAWS Negotiate About Window Size 3 Party Clients Automatic Logon i rd nis etection Recovery Enable Negotiate about Window Size telnet option Power Features Default is disabled 3 4 Emulations s Note The GSW clients handle window size automatically i Character Emulation Default Domain DOCG Color Mappings Character Translation Terminal Initialization Y Bell Control HE Protocols oe UTS System Templates 2 s User per session Figure 192 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations NAWS Negotiate About Windows Size The Emulations Negotiate Windows Size screen provides configuration for e NAWS Negotiate Windows Size Telnet Option See page 168 372 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Emulations Color Mappings 25 UTS Configuration Color Mappings Global per system A E E 4 Active Configuration Color Mapping for Monochrome 3 Party Clients i A
157. System going down for maintenance at 8 46 pm Please log off by 7 45 pm or call me at 265 1618 for special request Thank You Administrator About to send Broadcast Message to ALL telnet sessions Are you sure lt K gt lt ancel gt Figure 111 Send broadcast message confirmation prompt Selecting lt OK gt will send the broadcast message to all active SSH2 Telnet sessions The message will be displayed on the client terminal similar to the figure below Selecting lt Cancel gt will abort the broadcast message EN GS SSH Client 10 0 0 6 ls 2 System going down for maintenance at 8 06 pm Please log off by 7 45 pm or call me at 265 1618 for special request Thank You Administrator OK ENTER Figure 112 Broadcast message display on client terminal 188 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The exact display of the broadcast message will conform to the specific terminal display characteristics in a typical manner If the display has fewer columns then the message will wrap at the end of each row etc The broadcast message will remain on the client terminal until the message is acknowledged The SSH2 Telnet client terminal display will return to the exact terminal display prior to the reception of the broadcast message after the broadcast message is acknowledged the message by depressing lt RETURN gt or lt ENTER gt If multiple broadcast messages are sent before previous messages are acknowledged only th
158. T SENTINEL LDK PRODUCT END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT INFORMATION PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE CONTENTS OF THE PACKAGE AND OR BEFORE DOWNLOADING OR INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT ALL ORDERS FOR AND USE OF THE SENTINEL LDK PRODUCTS including without imita on the Developers Kf libraries u es diskees CD_ROM DVD Sen nel keys the software component of SafeNet Senanel LDK and he do not accept the license agreement Figure 18 SafeNet License Agreement Read and Accept 20 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 8 The SafeNet Ready to install screen is displayed Click Next Click the Back button to reenter the installation information or click Cancel to ext the wizard Wise Installation Wizard Figure 19 SafeNet Ready to Install 9 The SafeNet Updating System screen is displayed Validating install IS E3E Figure 20 SafeNet Validating Install 21 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 10 The SafeNet Successfully Installed Screen is displayed Click Finish Sentinel Runtime has been successfully installed The Sentinel HASP Run time Environment uses port 1947 to communicate with local and remote components If you use a firewall ensure that it does not block this port Click the Finish button to exit this installation Figure 21 SafeNet Successful Installation 11 Plug the hardware key onto the parallel or USB port on the serv
159. Telnet clients handle window size automatically regardless of the parameter value Domain Specification using 3 Party Clients Please see the section 3rd Party Client Default Domain Override on page 271 for further information 168 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Color Re mapping All Clients This feature allows you to re map or change the colors the user will see when using the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server Modify your application colors so they are easy to read on a gray scale device without any source code changes Also re map your application colors to fit a customer s look and feel without source changes A text file is used for specifying the colors to re map The name of the file is gs_color txt and is installed in the GSW UTS root directory If you want different color mappings on a per user basis then place the es_color txt file in the user s directory in the Scripts folder see Logon Scripting on page 205 The first column lists the original attribute bytes and the second column lists translated attributes Attributes not included in this file are left un translated The FP character in the first column designates a comment line Attribute Attribute Bit Value Description FOREGROUND BLUE 0x0001 Text Color contains blue FOREGROUND_GREE 0x0002 Text Color contains green FOREGROUND_RED 0x0004 Text Color conta
160. TelnetWithSSH HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_ Tnet Parameters EnableRFC854Clients HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters GSW_FIPSOnly HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters LsnOnLoopBackOnly Set each registry key value to the following AllowTelnetWithSSH 0 361 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EnableRFC854Clients 1 GSW_FIPSOnly 0 LsnOnLoopBack 1 ALLOW ALL CLIENTS TO CONNECT Telnet SSH both FIPS 140 2 compliant clients and non FIPS 140 2 compliant The variables GSWFIPSOnly EnableRFC854Clients and AllowTelnetWithSSH ate registry key values Used in conjunction with specific values these Registry keys enable or disable the ability to restrict connection only by GSW SSH clients The keys are HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters AllowTelnetWithSSH HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters EnableRFC854Clients HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters GSW_FIPSOnly HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters LsnOnLoopBackOnly Set each registry key value to the following AllowTelnetWithSSH 0 EnableRFC854Clients 1 GSW_FIPSOnly 0 LsnOnLoopBack 1 362 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Failure Detection Recovery 43 UTS Configuration i amp Failure Detection Recovery Global per system Es A
161. Templates 2 s User per session Access Control Number of Connections by USER ID Restrictions based on the number of USER ID Open Open gs_l_usr bd file for editing Sessions are enforced with the file gs_1_usr txt Access Control Number of Connections by IP Address Range Restrictions based on the number of connections from an IP Address are enforced Open Open gs ip b file for editing with the file gs_ _ip txt __ A Figure 182 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security Connection Limits The Connection Limits screen provides configuration of the e Maximum Sessions allowed See page 96 and allows viewing of the relevant text files e Access control for the number of connections by a User ID Gee page 97 e Access control for the number of connections by an IP Address See page 99 359 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Security FIPS Restrictions E 3 UTS Configuration 1 FIPS Restrictions 5 Global per system pa nee FIPS 140 2 Access Control Automatic Logon Security Telnet Encryption m FIPS 140 2 Access Restrictions Connection Restrictions Connection Limits C Restrict Access to GSW FIPS 140 2 Compliant Clients L AFIPS Restrictions Failure Detection Recovery C Restrict Access to GSW SSH clients both FIPS 140 2 Compliant clients and non FIPS 140 2 compliant Power Features Emulations Bell Control Protoco
162. Tnet Parameters LsnOnLoopBackOnly Set each registry key value to the following AllowTelnetWithSSH 0 360 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EnableRFC854Clients 0 GSW_FIPSOnly 1 LsnOnLoopBack 1 RESTRICT ACCESS TO GSW SSH CLIENTS both FIPS 140 2 compliant clients and non FIPS 140 2 compliant The variables GSWFIPSOnly EnableRFC854Clients and AllowTelnetWithSSH are registry key values Used in conjunction with specific values these Registry keys enable or disable the ability to restrict connection only by GSW SSH clients The keys are HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters AllowTelnetWithSSH HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters EnableRFC854Clients HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters GSW_FIPSOnly HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters LsnOnLoopBackOnly Set each registry key value to the following AllowTelnetWithSSH 0 EnableRFC854Clients 0 GSW_FIPSOnly 0 LsnOnLoopBack 1 RESTRICT ACCESS TO SSH CLIENTS both FIPS 140 2 compliant clients and non FIPS 140 2 compliant The variables GSWFIPSOnly EnableRFC854Clients and AllowTelnetWithSSH are registry key values Used in conjunction with specific values these Registry keys enable or disable the ability to restrict connection only by GSW SSH clients The keys are HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters Allow
163. Transfer GS_Put Error Message File NOTE You must use the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet client to use the GS_PUT file transfer utility The gs_put errorlevels are described later in this section page 258 256 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GS_GET Transfer from Client to Server Efficient file transfers from the Client to the Server computer are easily accomplished when using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client A utility called GS_GET is included in the SSH2 Telnet server installation directory Command gs_get Description Command line utility that copies a file from the Client to the Server Computer Syntax gs_get lt source_file_path gt lt destination_file_path gt Arguments There are 2 required arguments a lt source_file_path gt The file path to the file on the client Uses Client computer drive letters and directories b lt destination_file_path gt The file path for the destination on the server Uses Server computer drive letters and directories Optional Arguments Please see GS_Put for examples of the optional arguments c s Silent mode operation for GS_Get Disables the display of file transfer progress or other non error information messages to user d e Disable the display of error messages to the user o eflog_file_path Disable the display of error messages to the user but send them to the specified file Use server drive letters EXAMPLE UTILITIES FILE TRANSFER CLIENT TO SERVER gs
164. UPPORT FOR ALL SSH2 TELNET CLIENTS 158 Emulation Pack iii ob owe shee eh eb Gd WE eee a ia 159 SRD PARTY CETENTS a tn a fav dete Maree Ease ees ct og Sea ee a Sarah ee aaa SS es 159 Terminal Emu de de Mt e ee eta a teh Cate 159 Graphic CHAVACICNS 2 A A A A diri 161 Color or Monochrome Presentations izreden arees ite i E E E EEA TE NEEE A EEEE EE 163 Color Mapping Jor Monochrome crisser introisset eE E EA EEE EEEE ERTE O EEEE EENEN eie 163 Modification of Color Mapping for Monochrome u s cccccccscseccecesseevetseesecnseescuseusceseeseesecueeeecsseseseeseeseceeeesneeetenaeats 164 ALEK CYS A A cota Ac heats 165 ESC Delay sce sds A A A hen etal orate dc dali 167 Enable NAWS consta oc UUs sty Bhs wiih bate AEE GANS SMe Nea E ote Me ES the ibaa oho E Medes 168 Domain Specification using 3 POLE CONS ernn e E A e le ee O 168 COLOR RE MAPPING ALL CLTENTS 00 a ae ies sand A Sa ope doa a tears a 169 AUTOMATIC LOGON 3 PARTY CLIENTS AUTOLOG N 2s cesauw ene sean so 17 CHARACTER DISPLAY TRANSLATION 2 PARTY CONTENTS uns eae er 71 TERMINAL INITIALIZATION 3 PARTY CLIENTS sei aa e ac 172 Backspace on Delete For Third Party Clients c ccccccsccecssscesesseesesseesecnseescesesseeseeseesecesecnseesenseeseeaeeeeaeeeenseaeets 173 Two Cells per Unicode Character For Third Party Clients ccccccccsccsssesceseseesessevsessessecuseeecnseeseesesseeeenteesenseets 174 Power Features Pack o ooooocococococnoononronoar eee eee
165. User configuration is the same name as a Grandfathered User Name then the Local User or Domain User configuration will be used Grandfathered users are configured just like Local and Domain Users Grandfathered configuration can be copied to Local Users Domain Users and Templates Local User and Domain User configurations can not be copied to Grandfathered Users All new user configurations should be either a Local or Domain User or IP Address based and thus no provision is made for creating new Grandfathered Users O Icon Meaning This icon represents ALL Grandfathered Users Expand to see configurations for each specific local user mM rm gt eon wow wer ra o oT 1e cea ee e Figure 219 GUI Tool Grandfathered Users The Grandfathered Summaty View and Specific Grandfathered User configuration provides e User Configuration for the Grandfathered User Note Grandfathered Users contain the same property pages as all session users Each page is described in the Local Users section For details on each property page please see page 388 400 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 User Templates 3 UTS Configuration 5 User Templates 5 Global per system g User por session GSW Universal Terminal Server UTS User Templates QQ default config fl Domains 2 3 dl Local Users 3 UTS System Templates are templates where you can store variations of your User C
166. When using the Session Reconnect Method the system administrator must ensure that there are enough sessions available for Session Saver to have a session for the transitory logon session used to reconnect to the saved session Please note that a one 1 session license will not be able to use Session Saver with the Session Reconnect Method because the suspended session will use the only license purchased 18 Which we will call the total pool of license sessions available 147 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Complete Session Cleanup The Georgia SoftWorks UTS for Windows provides features that ensure that all SSH2 Telnet sessions are properly terminated even during abnormal client and link failures Many internal session cleanup methods are automatic others are configurable using the different Inactivity and Heartbeat timers termination strings and scripts Properly terminating telnet sessions ensure that all sessions are available for use and that problems do not accumulate over a long term Complete NTVDM Cleanup The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server has employed very complex and sophisticated proprietary algorithms to detect identify and eliminate orphaned NTVDM s directly initiated by applications when using SSH2 Telnet In many cases orphaned NTVDM s or processes can consume all of the servet s processing power rendering the server crippled or useless Realizing that NTVDM cleanup is essential in industrial
167. Works Telnet and SSH Client UN Install To uninstall the Georgia SoftWorks Windows Software follow these instructions 1 Click the Start button on the Windows Task bar go to Programs 2 Find the Georgia SoftWorks line To the right select uninstall and follow the instructions To reinstall the software you will need to re register the software 31 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Mobile Clients Georgia SoftWorks provides mobile clients for PPC 2002 PPC 2003 Windows Mobile and Windows CE NET 4 2 5 0 class devices As with the GSW desktop clients the GSW Mobile Clients ate no extra cost which can amount to a substantial savings GSW Mobile Clients are categorized into Universal Mobile Clients and Enhanced Mobile Clients An overview of each follows GSW Universal Mobile Clients Overview GSW Universal Mobile Clients eliminate the need for operation verification for specific devices by GSW The Universal Mobile Client can simply be installed by the customer This opens a broad range of compatible devices while maintaining the rich feature set provided by GSW Mobile Clients Universal Mobile Clients for Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 The GSW Universal Mobile Clients for Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 are designed to be compatible with all Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 systems running on ARMv4 ARMv4i and x86 based devices Each device type requires a particular Universal Mobile Client The Mobile Client and the location of its setup program
168. _MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet services GS_Tnet Parameters AltPrefix Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify Enter the new value for the Alt Prefix and click OK The new AltPrefix will take effect for all new sessions 166 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 ESC Delay Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Emulations Character Emulation page 370 Or use legacy style below Third party clients will send escape sequences on certain occasions For example when a function or arrow key is depressed a sequence of data is transmitted that starts with the escape character 0x1b When the escape character is received the server must determine if this escape is part of an escape sequence or simply an escape key The server uses the ESC Delay value to determine how long to wait for the next character after an escape is received to consider it part of an escape sequence If a character is not received within this time then the escape is considered to be an escape key otherwise it is the start of an escape sequence The default value is 5 500ms You may want to increase this value if you see that escape sequences are not going through and being displayed on the screen rather than being interpreted For example if you type F10 and see odd character starting with or This is most likely to happen with terminal servers or other slow links like RAS This is how to change the registry key for the Escape Delay Not
169. _get c books dealers doc d corba hints dealers doc This will copy the file c books dealers doc from the client computer and save it as d corba hints dealers doc on the server NOTE You must use the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client to use the GS_GET file transfer utility The gs_get errorlevels are described later in this section page 260 257 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GS_PUT Error Values gs_put exe uses the shell errorlevel variable to report transfer results to the shell The shell errorlevel variable reports transfer results to the shell The errorlevel variable is usually used in batch files in automated processing environments Error ERROR VALUE DESCRIPTION Level 0 ERROR_SUCCESS Transfer Successful 1 ERROR SHARED MEMORY Transfer aborted Internal shared memory could not be accessed 2 ERROR USAGE Transfer aborted Command line invalid 3 ERROR SOURCE FILE Transfer aborted Source file could not be accessed 4 ERROR_INFO_SLOT_ENV Transfer aborted Internal environment variable was not found 5 ERROR_INVALID_ INFO SLOT Transfer aborted Internal environment variable had invalid value 6 ERROR_SYNC_OBJECTS Internal report to GSW 7 ERROR_GET MUTEX Internal report to GSW 8 ERROR_ABANDONED Internal report to GSW 9 ERROR_SET_EVENT Internal report to GSW 10 ERROR_OS1 Internal report to GSW 11 ERROR_O
170. able as a choice if the session selected in not in the Suspended state or if you are not connected via a SSH2 Telnet connection Select Aztach You are now Attached to the Suspended session You will observe the screen exactly as the user was seeing it when their session was broken due to client or link failure Interactive Input capabilities are available to resume work in progress When you exit the SSH2 Telnet Session you are not returned to the Session Administrator tool but are disconnected just as the user of the original session would have been had they exited the SSH2 Telnet session 185 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Send a Broadcast Message to SSH2 Telnet Sessions The capability to send a message to either a single or all SSH2 Telnet sessions is available via the Session Administrator This is useful in many situations when the system administrator needs to communicate information to one or all users usually regarding system status or maintenance This saves the system administrator time because the need to make multiple phone calls or physically contacting the users is not necessaty An example could be that the system administrator would want to notify all users to be logged off by a certain time due to system maintenance Another example may be to send a message to a specific user requesting that they help another user Broadcast a message to ALL SSH2 Telnet Sessions To send a message to all currently active SSH2 Telnet se
171. age Optional 2 uaser_name The u parameter is followed by the user name corresponding to the SSH2 Telnet session or sessions to send the broadcast message Optional 3 lt file_path gt the path to the ASCII text file that contains the broadcast message Required If the i and u arguments are omitted then the broadcast will be sent to all active SSH2 Telnet sessions These argument may be combined as a Logical OR condition to provide more flexibility in choosing the destinations for the broadcast message EXAMPLE THE GSW BROADCAST UTILITY SCHEDULE A BROADCAST MESSAGE Send the broadcast message contained in the ASCII text file systemdown txt which resides in the directory C mybroadcastmessages systemdown txt to all telnet sessions GS BCast C Iimybroadcastmessages1systemdown txt 192 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE THE GSW BROADCAST UTILITY TO A SINGLE USER Send the broadcast message contained in the ASCII text file givemeacall txt which resides in the directory C mybroadcastmessages givemeacall txt to user dong GS BCast udoug C mybroadcastmessages givemeacall txt The real power of the GSW Broadcast utility is that you can use your favorite scheduling program to schedule execution of the GSW Broadcast utility at a later time Georgia SoftWorks does not support nor endorse any scheduling programs The ones mentioned below are listed as examples o
172. ailing FormFeeds and Print Buffer Size See page 228 e Open Printing Print Command See page 223 394 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Local User Power Features Printing E ES UTS Configuration Printing Global per system 2 45 User per session amp User Configuration Q default config Power Features Printing Co tion My Domains 2 3 a de Local Users 3 Pass Through Printing a Q default config js E bill Trailing Form Feed H amp Logon Script Y Windows i GSW Client Control Y Emulations Legacy Power Features e Team Services Y Event Logging GwinPrinter1 E a pd Detection Recovery a a tom P IP Address Range 2 H Grandfathered Users 4 8 User Templates 5 r Open Printing Print Command Cancel Apply Help Figure 214 GUI Tool Local Users Power Features Printing The Power Features Printing provides configuration of e Print Method See page 213 e Print Queue Poll Interval See page 318 e Pass Through Printing Trailing Form Feeds and Print Buffer Size See page 228 e Open Printing Print Command See page 223 395 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Local User Power Features Team Services E UTS Configuration i Team Services Global per system a s User per session User Configuration Local User bill amp default config P
173. ain name The administrator may also perform right click operations at the Domain Name level such as adding deleting users for this Domain Name creating default configurations etc 385 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Domain Name User and Summary 3 UTS Configuration charles Global per system 048 User per session amp User Configuration Domain GSWLONDON User charles 2 default config User Per Session Co ion Sum View ies py i Logon Script GSW Client Control con Home Folder SOS isplay Application Title in Window Title Bar A GSWATLANTA_1 0 Display Title in A GSWLONDON 3 Automatically Terminate Session when User Exts No Display X close button in Windows Caption Bar a Lae Encrypt the UTS Telnet Session E a henry indows En 8 will Create User Profile Yes m Legacy H dep Local Users 3 TCP Receive Window Size Mode JP IP Address Range 2 Grandfathered Users 4 H 5 User Templates 5 r Emulations Terminal Emulation Prompt Graphics Mode Prompt Presentation Prompt m Power Features r Team Services ___ Event Logging Printing Use System Defaut Session Activity Log Yes Print Method None Log Character Translate No Print Queue Poll Interval 5 seconds r Pass Through Printing Use Use Use Trailing FormFeeds Enable Print Buffer Size 500 bytes Use System D
174. ains information which webmasters need to create web pages including the Georgia SoftWorks Java Telnet Client 274 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Required Java support Java language 1 1 or higher enabled browser The above includes Internet Explorer 4 0 and higher Netscape Communicator 4 7 and higher Required Files for the GSJC The Georgia SoftWorks Java Client may be distributed as a jar file cab file or a set of class files Required Files e gsjc jar This is the Java archive file for all browsers supporting jar files For example Netscape Communicator or Internet Explorer with the Java Plug In JRE 1 2 OR e gsjc cab This is the cabinet file used for Internet Explorer Browsers when Java Plug In is not used Client Side Printing All Browsers Client side printing requires the Java 1 2 Plug In JRE 1 2 Unless you are using IE 4 0 e Java 1 2 Plug In This is required for client side printing Required Files for Client Side Printing with Internet Explorer 4 0 If you are using Internet Explorer 4 0 or higher you can simply use the gsjc cab file INSTEAD of the esjc jar and the Java 1 2 Plug In is not required Client Side Printing Capabilities Client Side Printing is implemented through the print command applet parameter This parameter specifies the print command that is used locally client machine to print the spool file The print command specified depends on the printing facilities available to your cl
175. al Edit using GUI Editor 249 Example Utilities Execute program on Client View Image on CliOMt ooooncnccincninnnc mo 250 Example Utilities Execute program on Client Quick Directory Listing ats 251 Example Utilities File Transfer Server to Client cccccsceeseescsteeseeeeeeees 253 Example Utilities File Transfer Server to Client Silent Mode eeeceseseeseeeeeeeeee ees 254 Example Utilities File Transfer Server to Client Silent Mode ErTOTS ooooonocnccnoccconoooo oe 255 Example Utilities File Transfer Client To Server doy Example Utilities GS_PUT Errorlevel Usage in batch file Example Utilities GS_GET Errorlevel Usage in batch file x Example Launch Notepad on the server via SSH2 Telnet 263 Example Utilities Reboot WindowS 264 Example Utilities ShutDown Windows System 265 Example Remote REGISTRATION via SSH2 Telnet cooooconnccoccnonocnconoconcnnnonnconccnnonnonnnonnco nooo nono nonnc neon nonnnnns 266 Example Confirm Operation of Special Bell Processing cceseeseseceseeecneeecseeecseeseceeesesecaeeecneeseeneeaeaes 267 Example Utilities GSWBell for SAPConsol ccccecesssesccesecseesecesecaeceaecaeeeecaecaaecseceeaecaaecaeeeeeeeeeaeenaeens 268 xix JANUARY 27 2015 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Typographic Conventions Italics are used to
176. al exe upon connection for the user login id nurse The Physician s office application is in the directory c medical Step 1 Create directory c gs_uts scripts LocalUsers nurse Step 2 Create batch file k start bat Step 3 Add line to k_start bat c medical medical exe Step 4 Save file and exit Now when the User login id nurse connects to the Windows system via SSH2 Telnet the application medical exe will automatically be started When the user exits the medical package the Windows Command line prompt is displayed allowing other activity to occur EXAMPLE LOGON SCRIPTING USER RESTRICTED TO EXECUTE ONLY A SPECIFIC PROGRAM Here is an example script that will allow the User login id bill only to execute the amortization program amortize exe The amortization program resided in the directory d amor Step 1 Create directory c gs_uts scripts DomainUsers bill Step 2 Create batch file c_start bat Step 3 Add line toc _start bat d amor amortize exe Step 4 Save file and exit Now when the User Login ID bill connects to the Windows system via SSH2 Telnet the application amortize exe will automatically be executed When the user exits the amortization package the SSH2 Telnet session will terminate 206 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Global Logon Scripts There are situations where the system administrator may want to have the same logon script executed by all the users upon connection Instead o
177. al system Re run the GSW UTS setup program If using the GSW SSH Server re run the GSW SSH SHIELD setup Restore the registry keys that were backed up in step 2 above Re register the software using the standard registration procedure or install the Floating license 68 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 How to use the GSW Universal Terminal Server for Windows Georgia SoftWorks Client Note The example below is for the GSW Telnet Server however the same procedures apply to the GSW SSH Client unless noted Follow these instructions to open the Georgia SoftWorks Client window 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click Programs 3 Move the mouse cursor to Georgia SoftWorks UTS entry 4 Click to the right where you see GS Telnet Client At this point the Client window is open and you will get the host prompt Figure 42 Host At this prompt you should enter the hostname that you wish to connect The hostname is the name your Windows computer is referenced by via TCP IP This can be a text string or an actual IP address This name will appear in the client windows title bar Example Host Soloman OR if you know the IP address you can enter the address Host 100 100 100 101 Or Host lt ENTER gt This will connect to the local host You must be at the server for this to work Useful for testing 69 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Figure 42 Host Prompt After t
178. alid In approximately 40 seconds the Windows computer will reboot 264 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Shutdown command line utility for Windows The System Administrator may need to shutdown a Windows system remotely The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server provides a command line utility that will shut down a Windows computer Command GS_Shutd Description Shutdown a Windows computer The computer will shutdown in about 40 seconds after the command is executed GUI users will receive a notification Syntax Gs_Shutd Computer Arguments There is 1 optional argument computer name the name of the computer to shutdown If the computer name is omitted then the Windows computer that the command is executed will be shutdown Notes Administrative privileges are required to run this command Warnings The system administrator must be sure that they want to shutdown as all user sessions will be disconnected EXAMPLE UTILITIES SHUTDOWN WINDOWS SYSTEM Shutdown the computer soloman Gs Shutd soloman You will then be prompted with You have requested to shutdown soloman If you continue all applications with unsaved data will be forcibly closed in 40 seconds Do you really want to continue Yes No You must type either Yes or No and press lt enter gt Y or N is not valid In approximately 40 seconds the Windows Computer will shutdown 265 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Remote Registration Util
179. am can be m i in Notepad enabled disabled based on the IP address using the configuration text file gs_ipenc txt Cancel Apply Help J 2 Figure 180 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security Telnet Encryption The Telnet Encryption configuration screen provides configuration of e Enable Telnet Encryption See page 89 e Only GSW Encrypted Telnet Clients See page 102 And Opening and editing the text file to enable or disable telnet encryption based on IP Address e gs ipenc txt See page 91 357 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Security Connection Restrictions 4 3 UTS Configuration 4 0 Global per systema i Active Configuration coi Automatic Logon E Security Telnet Encryption a Connection Limits FIPS Restrictions dk Failure Detection Recovery Power Features Emulations Bell Control 4 Protocols UTS System Templates 2 s User per session JANUARY 27 2015 Connection Restrictions Access Control Client Type Clients allowed to connect to UTS 3rd Party Clients Access Control IP Address Open Open thosts file for editing Restrict connections to GSW clients or allow 3 Party clients to connect also Note GSW clients are always enabled Restrictions based on IP address are enforced when the file thosts exists The IP addresses of interest are listed in the thosts file In short only IP addresses lis
180. am Service text then intelligent abbreviations are used so you can view the essential information in the zorzal font for your application This works well with the small hand held mobile device displays as well as the larger truck mount displays No magnifying glass is required to read the text nor do you have to be a detective to decipher the meaning of the abbreviations The three most used Team Services screens ate e Team Services Main Menu e Team Services Accept Mode Display e Team Services Select Session Menu Below is an example of the full text of the Team Services tasks menu on the left and the abbreviated text on the right In order to maximize the readability alternate abbreviations are used based on the number of columns and rows defined Team Services Main Menu Abbreviated Team Services Tasks f of GSW Client g f of GOW Client 4 Yy 4 Dk Set the number of columns and tows for yout application and ACC xfer Transfer New iew Tools Session GSW Team Services will display all the text or abbteviate it based on your configuration ACC swap Swap Acc share Share Recover ee LTO Cancel New View Tools Session Table 23 Team Services Tasks Menu Abbreviations Note that Accept is abbreviated Acc and transfer uses the common abbreviation xfer while the words won gt session mode and suspended are completely omi
181. ample with the e argument results in the display show below fi Fe 7 J E GS SSH Client 192 168 1 161 2 NGS_UTS gt gs_put s Ze ft corba hints dealers docx c nooks dealers docx 2 GS_UTS gt Figure 132 File Transfer GS_Put Error Message Suppressed Even though an error occurred due to the misspelled file name no error message is displayed to the user Taking this example one step further the administrator can have the error messages sent to a log file by including a file path to the e argument The administrator must provide a log file name and path For example gs put s ef transferlog tlog txt f corba hints dealers docx c nooks dealers docx This will send any error messages to the server file tlog txt at the specified path on the f drive If the file does not exist it will automatically be created NE Continued on Next Page 255 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 r fas GS SSH Client 192 168 1161 bore 2 NGS_UTS gt gs_put s ef transferlogwtlog txt f corba hints dealers docx c nook s dealers docx SENGS _UTS gt Figure 133 File Transfer GS_Put Send Error Messages to a File A screen shot of the error message in the log file is shown below r gt gt gt I tlog tet Notepad T y et See file dt Format Yiew Help 26852 19 Notification from client received lt Error creating file on the client machine lt No such file or directory gt gt Figure 134 File
182. and environment variable The environment variables ate GWIN LOCAL PRINT CMD1 GWIN LOCAL PRINT CMD2 GWTN LOCAL PRINT CMD3 GWTN LOCAL PRINT CMD9 They correspond to the handling of print jobs sent to GwtnPrinterl GwtnPrinter2 GwtnPrinter3 GwtnPrinter9 And the syntax of the command is set GWIN LOCAL PRINT CMDx PrintCommand s Where e PrintCommand is any valid printing command and arguments 223 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 e s_ is the Georgia SoftWorks argument placeholder for the print job e xis the printer index created on the server The print method and capture is determined by setting the environment variable GWTN_LOCAL_PRINT_CMDx The most commons commands are the print d orthe lpr printing commands Other printing commands may be used as the user s needs dictate If the client printer is a shared printer that is visible from the server then you should use the print d command The lpr command should be used when the host provides an pd service The user should be knowledgeable of the print command selected The syntax of the print d command could be set GWTN LOCAL PRINT CMDx print d clientcomputername sharename s Note the s is typed exactly as it appears Do not replace the s with a file name The system replaces the s with the current NT generated spool file as you print to your printing port Note You ate not printing to that temporary file from your application
183. any of the Session Administrator features are available from the command line The features available include Monitoring Shadowing and Terminating Session s Additionally you can create an ASCII text file on demand that will contain a snapshot of the information contained on the Session Administrator main screen The GS_ADMIN command line utility provides the capability to launch Session Monitoring or Session Shadowing etc from your own application Command line arguments are used to specify the operation feature and the session to perform the operation on Command GS_ADMIN Description Command line utility that performs GS_ADMIN functions The gs_admin command line utility has three possible syntaxes Syntax 1 GS_ADMIN m s t pPID iIP uUser k Syntax 2 GS_ADMIN T k Syntax 3 GS_ADMIN I Infofilename k Arguments The number of arguments depends on the operation selected m is for monitoring S is for Shadowing LE is to terminate a specific session T is to terminate all sessions p select by Process ID PID fi select by client s IP Address u Select by user s name k keep running gs_admin after completion of the operation This argument is valid with all 3 syntax formats 7I is to create a snapshot of the SSH2 Telnet Status information in the file gs_ainfo txt default or specified filenam Syntax 1 is used to Monitor Shadow or terminate a specific session Syntax 2 is used to Terminate
184. apping See page 163 e Color Re Mapping See page 169 e Character Translation See page 171 368 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 e Terminal Initialization See page 172 369 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Emulations Character Emulation 45 User ies Global per system Active Configuration i Automatic Logon Security Failure Detection Recovery Power Features Emulations Character Emulation Default Domain Y Negotiate Window Size Color Mappings 4 Character Translation Y Terminal Initialization Bell Control Y Protocols UTS System Templates 2 per session JANUARY 27 2015 i Character Emulation Character Emulation 3 Party Clients Refresh character eir 52 Refresh Character causes the UTS to repaint the screen This is useful in environments that may occasionally drop characters The refresh character may be modified to suit your application Default value is ox12 lt ctrl r gt Third party clients will send escape sequences on certain occasions When the escape character is received the server must determine if this escape is part of an escape sequence or simply an escape key The server uses the Escape Delay value to determine how long to wait for the next character after an escape is received to consider it part of an escape sequence If a character is not received within this time then the escape i
185. are identified in the table on page 34 GSW Universal Mobile Clients for Windows Pocket PC Windows Mobile 2003 WM5 WM6 The GSW Universal Mobile Clients for Pocket PC 2002 and Pocket PC 2003 are designed to be compatible with all Pocket PC and Windows Mobile systems running on ARMv4 based devices The Windows Pocket PC and Windows Mobile devices that are based on the ARMv4 architecture each require a particular Mobile Client The Mobile Client and the location of its setup program are identified in the table on page 33 In some cases for particular devices there may be features available that may not be obvious When appropriate we have provided special instructions on how to take advantage of those features Additionally there may be devices that have been verified for correct operation Please review page 37 to see if your particular device has special instructions tips or has been officially qualified In many mission critical environments operation verification by GSW may be a requirement If your company would like operation verification please contact us at sales georgiasoftworks com or call 706 265 1018 for mote information GSW Enhanced Mobile Clients for Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 Overview In addition to the Universal GSW Mobile Clients specialized or Enhanced Clients are available for many devices that take advantage of device specific features Device specific features range from special key and light operation to application locking
186. are3 GwtnPrinterShare4 GwthPrinterShare5 GwtnPrinterShare6 GwthPrinterShare7 GwtnPrinterShare8 or GwthPrinterShare9 215 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Set virtual printer redirection commands in logon script For each user that is using the Georgia SoftWorks True Client Side Printing redirection commands must be added to their logon script First the Virtual Printer must be associated with the printer device that the user wants to use This is the device that the application will select when printing This can be accomplished with the net use command It is of the form net use lptx servercomputername GwtnPrinterSharey Where e Iptxis the printer port that the application sends the printer output typically Iptl for Dos applications e servercomputername GwtnPrintetSharey is the specification for the virtual printer The printer share would be either GwtnPrinterShare1 GwtnPrinterShare2 GwtnPrinterShare3 etc The next is an environment variable that indicates the True Client Side Printing method chosen The environment variable is GWTN_ LOCAL PRINT METHOD and valid values ate e Open e Enhanced The syntax is set GWTN LOCAL PRINT METHOD Open ot set GWIN LOCAL PRINT METHOD Enhanced If the environment variable does not exist then the True Client printing method is the Default printing method This prints as if the user is sitting local at the server There is no setup required for the Default printing me
187. arked as Read Only Mark the filesas Read Only In this case the persistent CAB folder location is F lashFX Disk CAB however the persistent folder is device manufacturer and model specific 51 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Step 6 Copy the application cab file defined in the Application Persistence section page 49 to the Persistence folder on the device Mark itas Read Only Step 7 Now you should be able to cold boot the device and the client should automatically launch with the correct configuration GSW Pocket PC 2003 Universal Mobile Client Persistence PPC 2003 Configuration Persistence The GSW Mobile Client configuration is saved as a cab file which is a compressed archive package definition format For each created session configuration there will be a corresponding CAB file For example if a session was saved with the name lukexp gswtc then a corresponding cab file with the name lukexp cab is automatically created Non session specific configuration data is stored in the CAB file cppc2003 cab When these files are placed in the persistent CAB folder on your device the GSW mobile client configuration is restored upon reboot The persistent CAB folder location is device manufacturer and model specific PPC 2003 Application Persistence The GSW Mobile Client application is available as a cab file which is a compressed archive package definition format The cab file location and name of the application is
188. ase Lookup Application SDLA located on a server at their headquarters They sell access to the SDLA to companies where pricing is based on the number simultaneous connections Each company accesses the SDLA via the Internet from undetermined or varying locations Each company that purchases access to the SDLA is provided a User ID on the ACME server that everyone from their company shares Currently AMCE has sold access to the SDLA to six companies Four companies purchased three connections each the remaining two companies purchased twelve connections each ACME wants to restrict each company to the number of sessions that they have purchased The ACME System Administrator can configure the gs_1 usr txt file that specifies the number of sessions allowed for each User ID The Information for each company is BigBrain Intelligence bbrain 12 Vigorous Investments viginv 3 Sweet Apple Suppliers sweeta 3 Warehouse Storage warstore 3 Sure Shipping Co surship 3 Wireless Security Wiresec 12 Figure 54 Security Restriction based on User ID Count This is how to set up the gs_1_usr txt file to limit the number of connections for each company Edit the file gs 1 usr txt and add the following lines Be sure to start in column one bbrain 12 viginv 3 sweeta 3 warstore 3 surship 3 Wiresec 12 Each time a logon request occurs the GSW Universal Terminal Server determines the number of active sessions associated
189. assword lt old password gt the old password EXAMPLE UTILITIES CHANGE PASSWORD The user smith wants to change his password on the computer soloman from fast to superfast Gs ChPwd smith soloman superfast fast 246 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Connection Banner A custom banner can be displayed to the client upon connection to the host The connection banner is useful for displaying security and legal notices and other information that the user should see BEFORE logging on to the host To enable a connection banner perform the following steps 1 Create the text of the banner in an ASCII text file 2 Save the file and name it banner txt 3 Place the file in the directory lt telnet server root _path gt When a user connects the SSH2 Telnet server looks for the existence of the file banner txt in the SSH2 Telnet root directory and displays the text before the LOGIN prompt is issued Please make sure that the complete text can be displayed on a single console screen to ensure easy readability 33 This is the installation directory for the telnet server 247 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Execute Application on Client from within a SSH2 Telnet Session Bridge the Gap between GUI processing and a character oriented protocol An incredibly powerful utility that facilitates client side processing of server side files when using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client The Georgia SoftWorks
190. ate characters sent to the terminal to a different character or string of characters Normally you do not need to get familiar with this section however the capability is present for advanced requirements This feature allows you to translate or replace the characters the user will see on 3 Party Clients and RF Terminals when using the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server You may translate a single character to one ot more up to 10 characters other characters A text file is used for specifying the characters to translate The name of the global file is gs_xchar txt and is installed in the SSH2 Telnet server s root directory Each row in the file specifies a character to translate and the replacement character s Characters not included in the file are left un translated The specifications of the characters are byte values in hexadecimal each separated by a single space The character in the first column designates a comment line The first value in each row specifies the character to be translated The character or list of characters that replace the original character follows For example the following entry in the file will replace all lower case letter a with upper case A when sent to the terminal 61 41 Note Remember that hex 61 is ASCII lowercase a and hex 41 is ASCII uppercase A Another example The following entry in the file will replace the PC bottom right corner character with the string using the DEC Spec
191. ath See page 236 390 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Local User GSW Client Control JANUARY 27 2015 ES UTS Configuration 1 GSW Client Control Global per system 5 45 User per session User Configuration Q default config GSW Client Control Co ion Options H a Domains 2 3 E de Local Users 3 Logon Script Windows f GSW Client Control i Emulations Failure Detection Recovery El a pat Yes Edd tom Display X close button in Windows Caption Bar Y JP IP Address Range 2 Grandfathered Users 4 H 5 User Templates 5 You may want the Application Title to display in the title bar of the GSW Client Windows Title area The Default is No You may not want to display the X close button in the title bar top tight torner The Default is Yes Enable to encrypt the UTS Telnet session data stream Note Be sure the GSW client is configured to encrypt also This requires that the UTS Telnet Encryption system parameter is set Figure 210 GUI Tool Local User GSW Client Control The GSW Client Control provides configuration for e Display Application Title in Window Title Bar See page 81 e Display X close button in Windows Caption Bar See page 82 e Encrypt the UTS Telnet Session See page 88 391 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Local User Emulations UTS Config
192. ation Logging For Third Party Clients cesce 204 POGON SCRT PAE NG EERE A A A SEE OEE A AUD ie SS ee GIR ES ee 205 USER LOGON SCHIP US vie cats sec A Seren faa Coates iia 205 Global Logon SCH US sagen ras Shas asada aa ASS dai 207 IP Address Based Logon SCH Ups sneri i se sot shan sons e588 an oa iia 207 PROGRAMMATIC ACCESS TO THE SSH TELNET SERVER ooooooo ooo ooo 212 TRUE CLIENT SIDE PRINTING PRINTING THE WAY YOU WANT IT 213 Default Print ia dt 213 Enhanced Printing ick iok TERN ea ee dat Soak Hose aE ena eae el aa SR cate crease 213 Open PANAS ec Rieke sects ccc A e eons ihe Laces E R EE E AE EEE E E EEE E ii 213 Setting up True Client Side Printings iieii iieiea EEE EE EE EEE EE a iE i raa e oode 214 Create a virtual printer On the SEVek ieii iioii iiiaio e eiior a en i a E E a o liii aieri i aiiai 214 Set virtual printer redirection commands in logon SCHiPt ccccecesceesesseseeenseescuseeseesetseeeceeeecuseseesceseeseesecseeneeaeeats 216 Enhanced Print Method issnin tt A ad 217 Open Print MELO ss case hen sede Tatas te aside At Dd idas 223 Passthroush Print MethO dota ii i e e io AA tl tadas 228 CLIENT TDENTITY AND UNTQUENESS iros aysiu ocd Goi ada aia dss sas oi a patas a 230 Compatibility Pask orrore oR iaa As a rd 231 RF TERMINALS BAR CODE SCANNERS assa eam se a e a e e ees 231 RF Devices using Power Save or Sleep Mode c cccccccecsccesessseteessesecuseescesecseeseceeeecceesceseeseeaeseseecnssesensee
193. ation on the SSH Server FIPS option When the FIPS 140 2 option is enabled on the GSW SSH server FIPS 140 2 compliant connections can be identified by using the Session Administrator Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe pos sou 5 B E 5142 10 9 0 124 Conn vare house _ 5 E 5144 16 80 8 116 Conn 66 05 88 14 The Asterisk indicates that these sessions are True GSW FIPS 140 2 connections 51236 a 10 8 8 12 A AAA 86 85 08 14 A True GSW FIPS 140 2 connection is when both the Server and the Clients are FIPS 140 2 compliant and enabled FIPS 140 2 Complant GSW Clients FIPS 140 2 Compliant GSW SSH2 Server Lonn FIPS Certticate 2560 Conn FIPS Certificate 825 Conn FIPS Ceariticate 2918 Conn Conn Conn Co nn FIPS Certificate 918 No Asterisk indicates that these sessions are NOT True GSW FIPS 140 2 connections Figure 53 Session Administrator view FIPS 140 2 sessions A True GSW FIPS 140 2 connection is identified by an asterisk prepended to the username in the session administrator This means that a GSW FIPS 140 2 compliant client is connected to a FIPS 140 2 compliant server Both ends are compliant and thus you can have confidence that this is a GSW True FIPS 140 2 compliant connection Usernames without an asterisk cannot be confirmed as FIPS 140 2 compliant 92 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Connection Restrictions The system administrator may restrict acc
194. atorthe k start bat file that resides in the scripts folder in the GSW SSH2 Telnet Installation directory d And of course your contact information Or Call 706 265 1018 EST M F 9 00 a m to 5 00 p m and have your Product ID ready 406
195. ause rem Put your code to run23 app here goto labelend label14002 echo About to run app14002 pause rem Put your code to run14002 app here goto labelend DO 0 DW 0 DM label14005 echo About to run app14005 pause rem Put your code to run14005 app here goto labelend DODO DW 0D Y label14006 echo About to run app14006 pause rem Put your code to runl4006 app here goto labelend a DW label14010 echo About to run app14010 pause rem Put your code to run14010 app here goto labelend labelend 273 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Georgia SoftWorks Java Telnet Applet Note This feature applies to the Telnet Server only The Georgia SoftWorks Java Client GSJC is an applet that allows you to add web based capabilities to your MS DOS or Win32 Console application Leverage platform independence for remote access to the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server by providing access from the most popular browsers such as MS IE and Netscape Allow telnet connectivity from any platform with TCP IP based connectivity and a Java 1 1 or higher enabled browser This can include platforms ranging from RF Terminals to mainframe computers Many of the powerful features found in the standard Georgia SoftWorks telnet client such as Mouse support DOS Character Mode Color Graphics excellent keyboard support and client side printing are now available in the GSJC This section cont
196. ave a set of users that can have different Team Services privileges than specified in the Registry key value NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example To enable Team Services Transfer the following line should be present in the user s logon script set gwtn_ts enable transfer Y is correct set gwtn_ts enable transfer Y isnot correct 134 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Team Services Swap The variable TSEnableSwap is a registry key value This registry key sets the default behavior for all users 0 disables Team Services Swap for all users 1 enables Team Services Swap for all users The key is TSEnableSwap DWORD HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters TSEnableSwap An environment variable may be set on either a Global or Per User basis to override the default configuration specified by the Registry parameters described above The environment variable for Team Services Swap is gwtn ts enable swap Possible values ate Y or N or y or n This allows you to have a set of users that can have different Team Services privileges than specified in the Registry key value NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example To enable Team Services Swap the following line should be present in the user s logon script set gwtn_ts enable swap Y is correct set gwtn_ts enable swap Y is not correct 135 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 201
197. ay will be similar to the figure below GUI Version Number jee SOW UTS Conigaston ver 107 040 LA UTS Cention C UTS Contigereten a GSW GUI Configuration Click to Expand nl Expanded le _ aa Per User Configurations are Displayed ich on to expand Wer contuurcins stan TIPS Figure 161 Initial Configuration Screen Navigating is intuitive and similar to Windows Explorer Use the mouse and click on the to expand items and the to collapse them Global or User objects are displayed on the left pane and context appropriate configuration status or description is displayed on the right pane As you expand items you will notice a variety of icons that are associated with configurable objects from either an organizational or directly configurable viewpoint 326 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 UTS Configuration Tool ICONS The following table lists each icon and a brief description ICON DCA DESCRIPTION 1 ke Georgia SoftWorks UTS Configuration Tool tree root 2 e Global per system UTS Configuration Settings A A This icon represents the Active System Configuration for the UTS Expand to see configurations property pages for the Active Configuration This icon represents all the UTS System Templates Expand to see all the individual System Templates This icon represents a specific UTS System Template T
198. basis Both Global and User configurations provide the capability to create templates Templates allow the administrator to create configurations and store with names of their choosing The administrator may want certain configurations for specific locations departments users or circumstances Templates allow the administrator to create and save the various configurations The saved configuration can simply be copied to the Global Active Configuration in the per system case or to the specific User configuration in the Per User case when needed There is no need to reconfigure from scratch or remember all the details each time Default configurations can be applied to e All Users All Domains Domain Names Local Users e All Domains e All Users in a Domain Name e All Local Users The administrator can define a default configuration at none some or all of the objects listed above If a configuration does not exist for a specific user then the configuration tree is traversed to determine if a default configuration exists The administrator can set a few default configurations for most users and then have specific configurations for specific cases This minimizes the configuration required and ensures that the proper configuration is used 325 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Launch the GSW Configuration Tool From the Start Button select the Georgia SoftWorks UTS and then select the GSW Configuration Tool The initial displ
199. bet bane ioaad etaa eenia 127 OPEN TEAM SERVICES TASKS MENU ui pen De ea 128 STRICT TEAMS CONETGURATION Load Resina So acd es Gua ade e da 129 TEAM SERVICES CONFIGURATION AND SECURITY o o ooooocooonononoononon 132 Team Services RECOVETY iii tia a r ee tirao rinda 1353 Team Services LLANO aii it tte 134 Tem SVCS SWAP EI Orina Sola tado osos ade path dede dende dedo ith de de 135 Team S rviCes SHALE es ti aE 136 Team Services Left Justify ss sexed eck ha A A titi 137 Team Services y ONES IDO APR E E RAS 138 SESSION ADMINISTRATOR SUPPORT FOR TEAM SERVICES 140 Session Administrator support Team Services States cc ccccccccccsecsseeseeesceseceesesecsaecceeaeeeseecseecseeaeeeseeeseeeseenseneeeaes 140 System Administrator support for Team Services Share cooioninniinninninannccinccnncnnnrcanrr nina nn 141 TEAM SERVICES TROUBLESHOOTING Lead dls a ds les 142 Failure Detection and Recovery Pack o oo ooooooooooooooooo oo 144 SESSION SAVER atte e id ad a ae 144 Session Reconnection Timeout ccccccccescecesccsescecesecsececesecseacecssecseaeecssecseaeecsaecseaeecsaecseseecsaecseaeecsaecseeeeeaeceeeeeeaeees 145 Reconnection based on User ID a a aa a aaae Ea e ae eea aa ae Een ae a a EN aaas 146 Reconnection based on IP Address and User ID ccccccccccceccssssesseeeceeescuecseesecuseeecnseesensesseeaesueseecnseesenseeieeaeeneeaeens 146 Session Saver Required Session License COUNL ccccccsssseessseeseese
200. bile Client For Windows CE Printing Font Yangard Voice i Printing Font Vangard Voice lt E Enable Vangard Voice V Vangard Voice XML File Path Vangard Voice XML File Path Configure Path Configure Path Ey asw Client dl E E a asw Client al Ab le a Figure 141 Vangard Voice tab on GSW Mobile Client for Win CE Figure 142 Click the Checkbox to enable Step 2 Configure the path to the Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile XML file Click on Configure Path button 296 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Browse to the folder where the Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile XML file is located specified by Vangard Voice installation In the example below it is in the Program Files folder and named Samp1App xml Select the file and click OK GSW Mobile Client For Windows CE Open P 5 3 Program Files aa SamplApp xml Type vangard Voice XML files v Name SamolAbb xrnl Type vangard Voice XML files v y a csw Client all 2 ala a csw Client all 2 ala Figure 143 Navigate to the Vangard Voice XML file Figure 144 Select the file and click OK Printing Font Vangard Voice lt gt Enable Vangard Voice V Wangard Voice XML File Path Program Files Sampl4pp xml 27 asw client il 2 ala Figure 145 Click OK again 297 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Be sure
201. bled default 1 enabled If the Bypass parameter is not present in the file then the default value used is 0 disabled Simplified Chinese Font Support Simplified Chinese fonts are supported when using the GSW Mobile Clients for Windows Pocket PC 2003 WM5 WM6 Windows Mobile The setup is the same as described for the Windows CE NET 4 2 5 0 mobile clients 48 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Configuration and Application Persistence It can be frustrating and time consuming if your configuration information is lost over a reboot which is common with Windows CE and Pocket PC operating systems GSW has provided a reliable mechanism to ensure that the GSW Mobile Client application and configuration can be persistent across all types of reboots Instructions vary depending of the type of GSW mobile client being used Please review the appropriate section for your client e GSW Enhanced Mobile Clients Follow the Tips section for your device Do not follow the Configuration Persistence configuration below for the GSW Universal Mobile Clients See page 36 for Enhanced Client Tips e GSW Pocket PC 2003 Universal Mobile Clients Follow the instructions on page 52 e GSW Universal Mobile Clients for Windows CE NET 4 2 Follow the instructions below GSW Universal Mobile Client Persistence In brief the steps are simply to configure the device save the configuration and move our CAB files to a persistent folder Mobi
202. c cccccctcsceseceeesenveeseesesseeecseescseeseesecsecsecaaeecaseeseesecsesaeceseecaeeseeaeeseeesneeetenees 93 Restrict users access to a Specific application c cccccccececcceseesseeeesseescuseeseesecsesecuseesceceeseesecseeaecseesenseeseesecseseeneeerenaes 95 Restrict connections from 3 Party Clients 95 Restrict access based the number Of CONNECHONS cccccseesssseeesseeeceseeseuseceeeecseeecsesscesecseeaeceseeenseeseeaeeeeeeeneeeeenaes 96 Restrict Number of connections by a Specific User ID v ccecccccscesseececesseeseeseeeecuseescsesseeseceseceeescnseeseeseeseeeeeneeeeenaes 97 Restrict Number of connections from a Specific IP AddresSS ccccccecsceesetsseseenseescuseeseusecsesecseescnseeseeaeeseeneeneeenenaes 99 vi GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Restrict connection to only encrypted sessions Telnet cccccccccccccceesceseceteceseceseesceeaceescecseeeseeeseeeeeseenec
203. can configure the gs_1 ip txt file that specifies the number of sessions allowed for each User ID The Information for each company is Heath Matters Inc 192 71 34 107 20 Live Long Insurance 170 40 255 231 25 Grow Tall 164 10 15 210 164 10 15 220 20 Pharmaceutical 164 10 15 211 164 10 15 221 They want access from 164 10 15 212 164 10 15 222 any the following IP 164 10 15 213 164 10 15 223 Addresses to work 164 10 15 214 164 10 15 224 164 10 15 215 164 10 15 225 164 10 15 216 164 10 15 226 164 10 15 217 164 10 15 227 164 10 15 218 164 10 15 228 164 10 15 219 164 10 15 229 164 10 15 230 Sharp Doctors for You 205 20 63 0 25 Sharp Doctors for You Through has a large range of 205 20 63 255 IP Addresses that are valid Figure 55 Security Restriction based on Count from IP Address This is how to set up the gs_1_ ip txt file to limit the number of connections for each company Edit the file gs 1 ip txt and add the following lines 192 71 34 107 20 170 40 255 231 25 164 10 15 210 164 10 15 230 20 205 20 63 25 Each time a logon request occurs the GSW Universal Terminal Server determines the number of active sessions associated with that the originating IP Address If the count of active sessions exceeds the configured count in the gs 1 ip txt file then the Logon is denied Note 1 An Address range is specified in line 3 164 10 15 210 164 10 15 230 20 This translates to include all IP Address
204. ce the Telnet Interface is disabled GSW Core Server Protocol and Application GSW Application Interface Resulting Software Module Interfaces Installer Product s GSW Server Products ee GSW Telnet Server e GSW SSH2 Server The features utilities and clients are provided by the GSW UTS Unless noted all features and utilities are available to all GSW Server Products Telnet Interface Universal Terminal Server B GSW SSH2 SHIELD SSH2 Interface Figure 1 GSW UTS Components Overview The GSW UTS supports a wide set of emulations that allows connections from most third party clients Compliant 3rd party clients can exist on any operating system Of course GSW Clients are offered for Windows operating systems Pocket PC 2002 2003 class devices and other RF devices A list of these Windows Operating Systems is on page 28 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW UTS Telnet Server The standard protocol interface included with the GSW Universal Terminal Server is the Telnet Interface No application or protocol interface installer is required The product purchased is the GSW Telnet Server The installation setup is quick and easy You can be up and running in the matter of minutes The GSW Telnet Server is composed of the GSW UTS and the Telnet Interface Product The GSW Telnet Interface does not require an Application Interface Installer as it is the standard interface coupled with the GSW UTS and is automatically A GSW include
205. ce the convenience and power of the client Please see page 73 for detailed descriptions of these parameters The GSW SSH2 Telnet Clients automatically update to the appropriate version for the GSW UTS Server when connected2 The GSW clients are available on a wide variety of operating system platforms ranging from Windows to Pocket PC 2002 2003 See the table on page 28 for a detailed list of GSW clients available for each platform 2 This feature is operational with version 6 26 003 and above GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Georgia SoftWorks UTS Product Configurations GSW UTS Components Overview The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server is the core server software module that provides the reliability consistency robustness and powerful features that has distinguished GSW Server Products The design of the GSW UTS facilitates integration of protocol and application interfaces producing industrial quality server products The protocol and application interfaces available for the GSW UTS are the GSW Telnet Interface and the GSW SSH Interface The GSW UTS is not sold as a standalone product The standard protocol interface provided is the GSW Telnet Interface Protocol Interfaces other than the telnet interface require an application interface installer to add the interface to the GSW UTS The application interface installer for SSH is the GSW SSH Shield When the SSH application interface installer installs the SSH Interfa
206. characters which occupy two character cells in Microsoft Windows will also occupy two character cells in 3 party clients is gwtn_two_cells_per_uc Possible values are Y or N ot y or n Y Enable occupying two cells in 3 party clients default N Disable occupying two cells in 3 party clients For example to enable you would set gwtn_two cells per uc Y in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example set gwtn_two cells per uc Y is correct set gwtn_ two cells per uc Y isnotcortect 174 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Power Features Pack As you would expect the most powerful and useful features are standard with the Georgia SoftWorks UTS for Windows Everything from True Client Side Printing Logon scripting Session Monitoring and Session Shadowing to Programmatic access to the server These are not marketing or sales features but useful and powerful features requested and used by SSH2 Telnet users around the world Power Features Pack Configurable GSW Clients ae Party Client Session Administrator Yes Yes Yes Observe Sort client Sessions Monitor client Sessions Shadow client Sessions Attach to client Sessions Terminate client Sessions Send Broadcast Message to client Session s Details Get info on Session Launch via Command Line Event and Activity Loggin
207. ciate GSW UTS Grandfathered Users Backward Compatibility Feature H A Domains 2 3 Hd Local Users 3 JP IP Address Range 2 Sey yy Grandfathered Users 4 O How many GSW UTS Grandfathered User configurations are defined Grandfathered Users 4 There are configurations defined for 4 grandfathered users assembly Bg receiving UTS Grandfathered Users are user configurations that existed in the pre GUI configuration gh shipping version of the GSW UTS Instead of forcing users of previous installs to re configure due to the stockroom implementation of a new configuration interface GSW provided a compatibility path to migrate H 2 User Templates 5 configurations when convenient For those familiar with the non GUI version Grandfathered Users configurations logon scripts are defined in the scripts folder It is recommended that the Grandfathered Users be moved to either the Local Users configuration or a Domain User configuration for better clarity distinction and organization However it is not required and the user configurations will operate in the Grandfathered Users configuration as expected en Determine exactly which configuration is used When a connection is initiated the GSW UTS checks for IP Address based configurations Local User and Domain User configurations before checking for Grandfathered User configurations a If a User Name in either the Local User or Domain
208. ciated application Approximately 3 seconds later the session is terminated if still running The termination string is a comma delimited list of keystrokes that you want to send to the shell or your application before it is terminated due to either the Client Heartbeat timeout or the Server Side Inactivity timeout No extra white space is allowed The string is not case sensitive For example you must specify shift c to produce a capital C Note Termination String Syntax is also used with GSW Mobile Client Macros when remapping function keys The following control key designators are defined e shift e alt e ctrl The following special characters are defined e ESC e ENTER e TAB e PGUP e PGDOWN e HOME e END e LEFT e RIGHT 152 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 e UP e DOWN e DEL e BACKSPACE e COMMA e Fl e F2 and so on through F12 Also a special operator is defined e Sleepxx This special operator will pause the output to the shell for xx seconds This gives the application time to process the input This is very useful when saving files to disk and for applications that flush the keyboard buffer By default a 1 second pause is injected between keystrokes however some specific cases may require the use of the Sleepxx operator to introduce additional delay To ensure graceful termination you may want to enter the string e x i t ENTER to exit the shell Once the specified application is
209. ciated with Failure Detection Recovery on the tight side of the display There are a few exceptions to this direct association due to screen space but will still be easy to find E UTS Configuration i Active Configuration 5 Global per system Active Configuration Summary View Protocols Telnet Encryption UTS Protocols Allowed Telnet Connection Restrictions Telnet IP Version Support IPv4 and IPv6 gt nee a SSH IP Version Support IPv4 and IPv6 i n Failure Detection Recovery Power Features Printing Team Services Event Logging Emulations Character Emulation Failure Detection Recovery Default Domain Server Side Inactivity Timeout Disabled Negotiate Window Size Tae econ 1 Color Mappings Character Translation Terminal Initialization Bell Control Protocols UTS System Templates 2 s User per session Telnet Encryption Access Control c son Restrictions FIPS Restrictions m Power Feature Team Services Color Mapping for Monochrome 3rd Party clients Character Display Translation 3rd Party clients Terminal Initialization for 3rd Party clients OK Cancel Apply Help J 2 Figure 177 Active Configuration Summary View Property Page and Frame Relationship 354 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Automatic Logon UTS Configur 4 3 UTS Configuration i A
210. commercial and mission critical applications a great amount of design and development resources were expended to ensure proper operation in this area Server Side Inactivity Timer Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Failure Detection Recovery see page 363 Or use legacy style below Server Side Inactivity Timer allows implementing an optional administrative policy to terminate sessions after a period of inactivity Note For RF Users with devices that have Power Save or Sleep Mode enabled please see page 232 for suggested settings For example ACME Company purchased Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server with a single session User Bob connects a session locks his office and goes home No one else can connect due to the licensing limit If data keyboard or mouse events is not received from a client within the specified server side inactivity time then the client session is terminated This feature is useful to ensure that an abandoned 3 party client session is terminated properly releasing the telnet session for others to use The Server Side Inactivity Timer is used only if the dient side heartbeat is not used This timer is a registry key value and is in seconds The key is HKEY_ LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CuttentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters InactivityTimeout The default value is Oxffffffff that is 1 That is disabled This is how to change the registry key for the Server Side Inactivity Timer Note You must be on th
211. configure 5 Telnet Ports Edit the file Services file as described above Add the following entries Notice that you may use any of the one hundred port names and that they do not have to be in order gstnetl 23 tcp gstnet2 14002 tcp gstnet5 14005 tcp gstnet6 14006 tcp gstnet10 14010 tcp Telnet will now listen on the above five ports To further take advantage of this feature you can use the environment variable gwtn server port to access the port number associated with your current session 3 For backward compatibility gstnetl is the same as gstnet lratnet and telnet Ifgstnetl is found then gstnet lratnet and telnet are not considered 272 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 To view the port number associated with your session at the command prompt enter echo sgwtn_ server ports If you have multiple telnet ports configured you may want to have a different task process the information that comes in on each port Here is an example of a logon script which uses the port information to branch to different tasks based on the port number if Sgwtn server port 23 goto label23 if Sgwtn server ports 14002 goto label14002 if Sgwtn server port 14005 goto label14005 if Sgwtn server port 14006 goto label14006 if Sgwtn server ports 14010 goto label114010 echo port not found pause goto labelend label23 echo About to run app23 p
212. console arguments Atguments Optional arguments Any SAPConsole arguments are simply added to the command line in the format required by the SAPConsole Notes Administrative privileges are required to run this command EXAMPLE UTILITIES GSWBELL FOR SAPCONSOLE Launch SAPConsole with GSWBell utility C gs_uts Gswbell c sap sapcnsl exe 268 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 TTY Name The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server creates a tt y name on a per session basis This is available for viewing or use by customer created programs The environment variable created is gwtn_ tty And is set to dev t typmmm where mmm represents the socket number handle for user s session Client Scroll Bars You may enable scroll bars on the Windows client window This is accomplished by changing the buffer size for the DOS window You must be careful that the application can handle a modified buffer size Unpredictable display results will occur if this is not the case For GSW Mobile Client scrollbar options please see page 43 269 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Setting a Default Domain Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Emulations see page 371 Or use legacy style below In some instances the System administrator may want to eliminate the prompting for a domain when the user is connecting to the SSH2 Telnet server This can be accomplished by setting the default domain registry variable This works for 3 party cl
213. csaeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseseseeneeeaes 36 Universal GSW Mobile Clients Special Tips or Qualifications List 37 Extended Features for Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 Devices cccccccscccescessceteteecseceeeeseeeseecscenseeseeeseenstenseseseenseneeaes 41 tay CONS ia 41 Allow Suspend Power Saving Feature cccccccesccesecssesscesecesecsecseeeeeesecaaecsecsecaecaaecaeeseesseeaecaaecseeeeaecaaecseeeeeaecaaeeaeeseees 41 B ep sound Correct Opera iio dad es ed id Mina ii ae he 42 Menu Accelerators Shortcuts aiii tocarlo tonada eee 42 Simplified Chinese Font Support ccccececsesscesscsseeseesecescesecaseeseeseceaecaseesenseceaecneeescescesecaaecaeeeseeseceaecaeeesesseceaecaecaeenseeaees 42 Select Configuration Tor SOSS1O10s 3 lt 5 c 5 vos dacs deca ke cash sage cases diia kote ieshaoeaes 43 Portable Session Configuration A Real Time Saver cccceeccesecssesscesecesecseeeeeeceseceaecseeecesecaaecseeeeaecaaeaaecaeeeeeeaeenaeens 43 Last Active Session Memory No Scrollbars Options ida AA ad RA A da AAA ai Automatic Logon for Mobile Clients csinosan a E EEE O EE E EE AES 45 Keyboard Macros ceencsenvcieerchiriusia isinsi tirent ii eiA E a E iE A nehi 46 Break Out SegUctC ivesievsisieisarivosiiciiict stirii datada eS E ai i E DE ETA dad EEEE SEREAS A SKEER iii KEKSE PEE aa 47 Extended Features for Pocket PC 2003 and Windows Mobile 2003 WM5 WM6 Devices cccccccsecsseeseseetseeses 47 Keyboard Mattos 0 og ata al nade en Saini AEE
214. ct the GSW_Lnch exe Click OK and the filename of the Executable is filled in Name GSW_Lnch EXE Type Executables exe y Or OM mA Figure 38 File Selection Dialog 64 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Next Select the Win tab and make sure that the Show Taskbar checkbox is clear Falcon Desktop ernie tice OK x E Select the Win Tab and make sure that the Show Taskbar checkbox is clear O Taskbar Enabled F Also make sure that the Windows CE O Start Menu Enabled Desktop Enabled checkbox is clear 7 Windows CE Desktop Enabled Note These settings will be applied when OK is pressed Falcon GF 3 3 04 Pu GA Figure 39 Falcon Clear Win Tab Checkboxes Make sure the two checkboxes ate cleat Step 8 Cold boot the device The GSW Mobile Client will automatically launch and connect after the boot 65 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Application Protection Many times System Administrators request the capability to protect certain configuration values associated with the application from being inadvertently or accidentally modified by users Georgia SoftWorks Mobile Clients either provide this functionality or integrates and cooperates with devices that contain this feature The GSW Mobile Clients accomplish this protection by recognizing a user and a password protected administrator security level If the device provides a user and administrative level the GSW Mobile client
215. cted when Deleting or Renaming the User configuration 342 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 IP Address Ranges IP All IP Address Ranges This icon represents ALL IP Address Range based User Configurations Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts Click to expand to see the specific IP Address Range logon scripts Click to collapse Right Click Operation Paste Rename Delete Add User and Create Default Configuration Add Add Create Default Contain Property Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Domain User Configuration Pages IP All IP Y Y Y Address Ranges Paste Paste a copied User User name or Template to this specific IP Address Range Logon Script This cteates a folder with the name specified for the IP Address Range logon script Export Export the configuration to a XML formatted file Import Export the User configuration to a XML formatted file 343 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Specific IP Address Range This icon represents a User Configurations that is associated with an IP Address Range Address Range Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts Click to expand to see the property pages for the specific user configuration Click to collapse Right Click Operation Paste Rename Delete Add User and Create Default Configuration Add Add Create Default Contain Domain User
216. ctive Configuration ae F pupitre us Server Side Inactivity Timeout 4 Securil i 7 ae etection Recovery Server Side Inactivity Timer i e 4 Power Features i aie Serret Side adha limenu If data keyboard or mouse events is not received from a Emulations E client within the specified time then the client session is i Bell Control ee terminated i Protocols NOTE This setting does not apply to GSW clients where UTS System Templates 2 Client Side Heartbeat is enabled default setting amp User per session Server Side Heartbeat Timer Server Side Heartbeat Timer Sets the frequency in seconds which to poll the 3 party client zT for presence If the client is not present then Graceful Time seconds Termination if configured is initiated JV Enable Server Side Heartbeat Timer Client Side Heartbeat Timer for GSW Clients ja GSW Clients support a Client Side Heartbeat Timer to aid in the detection of failed links or failed remote devices The client will send a heartbeat to the server at specified time intervals If the UTS server does not receive data in the specified time the connection is terminated Note This is a client side parameter and is set on the client Graceful Termination of DOS Applications The Georgia SoftWorks Windows Universal Terminal Server is outstanding in the case of a link or remote computer failure We attempt to gracefully terminate the executing DOS applicatio
217. d Bremer SERVER Universal Terminal Server Telnet Interface Universal Terminal Server Telnet Interface Figure 2 GSW UTS Telnet Server Components GSW UTS SSH Server The GSW SSH Server is obtained by purchasing the GSW Telnet Server and the GSW SSH Shield The GSW Telnet Server provides the GSW UTS and the SSH Shield is the application and interface installer for the GSW SSH interface First the GSW Telnet Server is installed Next the GSW SSH Shield is installed Again the installation is quick and easy NOTE When the SSH Interface is installed the GSW Telnet Interface is un installed This is done for secutity reasons as many view telnet as unsecured and thus should not be available to malicious third parties Product Product Product The GSW SSH2 Shield replaces the Telnet Interface with the SSH2 Intertace Universal Terminal SSH2 Interface Server SSH2 Interface SSH2 Shield Disconnects the Telnet Protocol Interface com B GSW TELN ER Universal Terminal Server Telnet Interface Figure 3 GSW UTS SSH Server Components GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Installation Installation is simple and quick The same installation program installs the server software and the client software The installation software will prompt you for a full or client only installation if on a Windows system and automatically install client software if on a Windows 95 98 system GSW UTS 32 bit and 64 bit Edition
218. d By default the maximum size of log file gsw_elog txt is 1 megabyte Once the file has reached the maximum size the file is renamed to gsw_elog bak and starts logging in a new gsw_elog txt Figure 188 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Power Features Event Logging The Event Logging configuration screen provides configuration for e Session Activity Log Max Log Size 202 e UTS Event Log File Size Max Log Size See page 201 and allows viewing of the relevant text files e UTS Event Log Definition File See page 200 e UTS Event Log File See page 199 367 Cancel Apply Help GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Emulations Summary JANUARY 27 2015 25 UTS Configuration Emulations Global per system eS Emulations Summary View i Automatic Logon Security i Failure Detection Recovery i H Power Features BET cians fa E Bell Control e Protocols 500ms 2 gt UTS System Templates 2 s User per session Figure 189 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Summary The Emulations Summary View provides a quick view of the configuration for e Refresh Character See page 237 e Escape Delay See page 167 e Alt Prefix See page 165 e Domain Name See page 270 e NAWS Negotiate Windows Size Telnet Option See page 168 and allows viewing of the relevant text files e Color M
219. d such as user resizing window Windows i Default On amp GSW Client Control 4 Emutations Log International character translation of UTF 8 GB2312 and a Default Off P IP Address Range 2 Grandfathered Users 4 8 User Templates 5 coa o tw 2 Figure 216 GUI Tool Local Users Power Features Event Logging The Power Features Event Logging provides configuration of e Session Log Enable See page 202 e Log Character Translate See page 204 397 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Local User Failure Detection Recovery Er ES UTS Configuration Failure Detection Recovery Global per system a s User per session User Configuration H Q default config Failure Detection Recovery Session Saver Hd Domains 2 3 amp amp Local Users 3 i Reconnect based on User AND IP Address specifies j o As Lm that if session is suspended for a particular user E d bill from a particular IP address when that user logs E A Logon Script FE IT on again from that IP Address they will be Windows C Userid automatically reconnected to the suspended 4 GSW Client Control session and resume exactly where they left off Emulations HE Legacy Power Features A 5 on the Failure Detection Recovery Detection Recovery econnect Wait Timer minutes Po A a gt pat initiating Graceful Termination if configured tom HP IP Address Range 2
220. d Cards An IP address wild the IP Address Example A 10 0 0 Example B 192 5 Example C ze Wild Cards can be used in IP Address Ranges too 208 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Logon Script Filename The logon script filename associated with the IP address can be any name that you choose however it must start with eithera k_ orac_ The k and c correspond to the analogous behavior as the k_ start batandc start bat See page 202 EXAMPLE IP BASED LOGON SCRIPTING The ACME Company has a New York location and a Mexico location The New York location has a north building that has a receiving dock a manufacturing floor and a shipping dock Each area uses different applications to update a common database The Receiving dock uses fork lifts with vehicle mounted RF devices The application used by the receiving dock is a custom developed application The ACME manufacturing floor workers use hand held RF devices mostly basic scanner guns The Quality Assurance Engineers on the manufacturing floor use Pocket PC 2003 devices to enter comments and other information The Quality Assurance Engineers use a different application than the manufacturing floor workers The New York Shipping dock workers use hand held RF devices again mostly basic scanner guns Like before they have yet another custom application The shipping dock workers and the manufacturing floor workers are multi talented and can perform either duty The
221. dard C Library failed 20 ERROR_WIN32 Transfer aborted WIN32 Subsystem Error 21 ERROR_SYNC Transfer aborted Session encountered unrecoverable synchronization errors User needs to establish a new session before a file transfer can be used again 22 UNDEFINED 23 ERROR_TCP_SEND Transfer aborted Connection broken during transfer 24 ERROR _ ABORTED BY USER Transfer aborted User pressed CTRL C or CTRL Break 25 ERROR SESSION SUSPENDED Transfer aborted Session became suspended Table 50 GS_GET Error Levels The usage of the errorlevel variable in an automated file transfer batch file might have the form An example for GS_GET EXAMPLE UTILITIES GS_GET ERRORLEVEL USAGE IN BATCH FILE begin c GS_UTS gs_get 1 if errorlevel 25 goto ERROR_SESSION SUSPENDED if errorlevel 24 goto ERROR ABORTED BY USER if errorlevel 23 goto ERROR TCP SEND if errorlevel 21 goto ERROR_SYNC if errorlevel 20 goto ERROR_WIN32 if errorlevel 19 goto ERROR _STDIO if errorlevel 18 goto ERROR DISK FULL if errorlevel 16 goto ERROR_GET GSCLNT if errorlevel 15 goto ERROR INVALID CLNT if errorlevel 14 goto ERROR _ SET CONTROL HANDLER if errorlevel 13 goto ERROR UNEXPECTED NOTIFICATION 260 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS go go go go go go Eal echo ERRO echo ERROR_ WIN32 echo ERROR_WIN32
222. de Key lt control c gt will be sent to the application as a character value of decimal 3 lt control c gt will be sent to the application as a signal event which can be trapped The UTS will attempt to get the applications lt control c gt settings and send either event or key whichever appears to be appropriate Sometimes the UTS will make the wrong choice JP IP Address Range 2 and you will have to override with an explicit amp Grandfathered Users 4 setting 8 User Templates 5 Control C Configuration Screen Sizes other than 25x80 You may place the Mode command as described on page 259 in a logon script to set screen sizes Please note that most UNIX Telnet SSH2 clients default to 24 rows while Windows and DOS applications default to 25 rows Thus you may have to adjust your UNIX SSH2 Telnet client row count settings to see all the rows of your Windows or DOS application Alternatively you may need to issue the mode con lines 24 command Note if you issue this command you will not see the 25 row of your application Note The Mode Con command is configured in your logon scripts ox Cancel Apply Help J Figure 212 GUI Tool Local Users Emulations The Legacy page provides configuration for e Control C See page 158 393 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Local User Power Features Summary E UTS Configuration 4 Power Features Global per system 0 4
223. default configuration defined This is the root of the User per session All Domains configuration object Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts DomainUsers Click to expand to see the specific Domain Names and the default domains configuration if it exists The example below Figure 169 shows one domain name GSWATLANTA and a default configuration defined UTS Configuration Global per system 8 s User per session E y Domains 1 3 GSWATLANTA 3 E default config pa Local Users 2 JP IP Address Range 2 Grandfathered Users 1 User Templates 5 ror default config Figure 169 Domains Expanded Click to collapse Right Click Operation Add Domain and Create Default Configuration Add Add Create Default Contain Property Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Domain User Configuration Pages All Y Y Domains Add Domain Name Add a Domain Name to the UTS Per session configuration This creates a folder with the name specified for the domain 41 This creates a domain name for the UTS configuration tool only and not for the operating system 337 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Create Default Configuration A default User per session configuration is created that will apply to any session if that session does
224. default is 1000000 Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location The key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters AgentLogFileLength 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet services GS_Tnet Parameters AgentLogFileLength 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value for the Agent LogFileLength and click OK If users are already connected the UTS service should be restarted for the new value to properly take effect 202 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enable Disable Session Long Format Logging Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Power Features Event Logging see page 397 Or use legacy style below An environment variable is available on User per session basis to enable brief or long format logging If enabled only system startup and tear down and some runtime events are logged such as user resizing window Long format logging is the default The environment variable for the brief or long format session logging is gwtn_ enable session log in the Logon Script Possible values are Y or N ot y or n Y Enable long format logging defau N Disable long format logging
225. delay high bandwidth networks For greatest efficiency the receive windows should be an even multiple of the TCP Maximum Segment Size MSS Some RF Terminals may experience connectivity problems because they time out before data transmission reaches them In this scenario you may want to reduce the value of the TCP Windows Size parameter Reducing the value of TCP Windows Size causes an acknowledgment for data received to be sent to the RF Terminal sooner A quicker acknowledgment lowers the possibility that the RF Terminal will time out while waiting for an acknowledgment However it also increases the amount of network traffic and causes slower throughput The UTS uses the Microsoft command line interperter a cmd exe often called the Command Prompt as the default shell You can override this behavior and specify a path toa custom shell executable For example you may want to use E Windows PowerShell as the default shell You would enter the path such as C Windows system32 WindowsPowerShell v1 o powershell exe For those migrating from cmd exe to another shell please remember that each shell has its own commands to interace with the operating system Commands used to make directories change cet do tw Figure 209 GUI Tool Local User Windows The Windows Configuration options provides configuration for e Create User Profile See page 234 e TCP Receive Window Size See page 233 e Custom Shell P
226. e Specifies our client side heartbeat You need that parameter for the session cleanup See page 151 i Enable SSH client to use FIPS 140 2 when connecting to SSH server Note SSH Server must be installed and FIPS must be Enabled Only valid with SSH client SSH client only Activates public key authentication by specifying the path to the private key file Ipath_to_private_key_file k Disables the mouse in the telnet or SSH session m SSH client only Specifies Single Sign On through Kerberos over GSSAPI n SSH client only Specifies Single Sign On through NTLM over GSSAPI pPassword SSH and Telnet client Specifies password for the user Use if user has no password Notice that this is a lowercase p SSH Client only If public key authentication is activated then this is the password for a password protected private key file PportNumber Specifies the port number to use for telnet or SSH This port must also be set on the Server in the services file Notice this is an uppercase P r1 printername r2 printername r 9 printername This specifies Printer1 Printer 2 and Printer 3 Printer 9 for Enhanced Mode client side printing No spaces are allowed in the printer name Please see page 213 for more information Continued on Next Page 6 Note Dash and Slash character are interchangeable when specifying command line parameters 73 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY
227. e You may choose to only encrypt the logon sequence when using the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client This entails the same steps as described with Complete Data Stream encryption except there are no environment vatiables to set in the logon scripts 90 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Encryption Based on IP Address In certain situations it may be desirable to have encryption enabled or disabled based on the IP Address of the connecting telnet session Complete Encryption both Logon and Data Stream can be enabled disabled based on the IP address using the configuration text file gs ipenc txt The Data Stream Encryption Client side parameter must also be used when configuring encryption based on IP addresses as described on page 88 When configured the settings in the gs_ipenc txt file overrides the normal encryption registry and environment settings The order of the fields in the gs_ipenc txt file is as follows IP Address The IP address IP Address Range of the client Enable or Disable Encryption Value 0 Disable 1 Enable Table 16 Encryption based on IP Address gs ipenc txt when using GSW Clients For example the following entry in the file 168 92 55 4 0 disables logon and session encryption for GSW Telnet Clients connecting from 168 92 55 4 Another Example 205 20 03 1 enables logon and session encryption for GSW Telnet Clients connecting from 205 20 63 NOTE The IP address must start in the firs
228. e You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks UTS for Windows is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location The key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters ESCDelay 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet services GS_Tnet Parameters ESCDelay 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value for the ESCDelay and click OK 167 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enable NAWS Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Emulations Character Emulation Negotiate Windows Size see page 372 Or use leoacy stule helow Enable Negotiate About Window Size NAWS telnet option for 3rd party clients This registry parameter Enab1eNAWS allows the NAWS option to be enabled Default Value is 0 which disables the NAWS option NOTE This is a change from previous behavior when NAWS was always on since Version 6 50 0035 of February 10 2005 The change is because some of the 3 party telnet clients handle NAWS incorrectly and cause endless looping The registry value is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters EnableNAWS Set this value to 1 to enable NAWS option The change of this value takes effect for the next session connected NOTE The GSW SSH
229. e while preserving their session GSW Team Services Transfer Swap and Share operations addresses this need e Transfer Transfer move your session to another team member s device Terminates the existing session on the second device when the transfer is complete e Swap Swap devices but keep your session Transfer your session to another team membet s device and at the same time Transfer their session to your device e Share Two devices share the same session Either device may be used within a single session This is similar to the GSW Session Administrator Shadowing feature except Share is initiated from the client The Share Team Service can be used when a forklift operator has a vehicle mount device and also needs a wireless mobile device both using the same session It can also be used for training and assistance The range of possibilities for Team Service Share is so powerful it is limited only by your imagination Recover dropped sessions It doesn t matter if the session is dropped due to battery failure device destruction network problems or simply because the user went out of range With GSW she session is maintained on the server and with Teams Services the session can be recovered from the same or another team member s device Of course you will resume work at the exact point where you were when the session dropped 112 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Team Services increases productivity by allowing
230. e GSW UTS software for Windows Logon Scripting provides system administrators with unmatched control over user connections One function of Logon Scripting allows the user to automatically enter specific applications upon connection Logon Scripting can also restrict the user to only execute a specific application Logon Scripting can do much mote see page 205 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Server Software The GSW UTS Server is the software installed on your Windows computer This software is responsible for establishing connections and spawning agent processes that manage each SSH2 Telnet session The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server software enforces the number of allowed simultaneous sessions Agent Process A SSH2 Telnet session is created each time a connection is established A connection is established when a uset logs on to the Windows system using a SSH2 Telnet Client For each session that is created the GSW UTS software spawns an agent process The agent process is responsible for managing and communicating with the user session Screen optimizations ate performed by the agent process to facilitate faster data transfers The capability of a configurable server side heartbeat timer exists for use by the agent process to help identify link or remote PC failures In addition the configurable server side inactivity timer exists to help identify abandoned sessions so that they can be properly terminated and made available
231. e Pass through Print method to operate correctly This means that each workstation RF device must use a different User Id when connecting to the server Interested in printing to portable printers when in SAPConsole See page 310 The required Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server setup for Pass through printing is exactly the same as the Enhanced Print Method page 213 with the following differences e There is no client parameter setup e set GWTN LOCAL PRINT ME THOD PASSTHROUGH e Optionally set GWTIN FF IN PASSTHROUGH e Optionally set GWTIN PP PRINT BUFFER SIZE Other than that the setup for Pass through printing is identical Passthrough Printing FormFeed Control NOTE Some third party SSH2 Telnet clients exhibit printing problems when a form feed is sent at the end of the print job The problems may manifest by simply not printing and or the form feed being converted to NULLs If you are experiencing this problem you can use the following environment variable for controlling the trailing form feeds at the end of a print job when using Pass through printing The environment variable for the enabling or disabling the trailing form feed in Pass through printing is gwtn_ff in passthrough For example to disable the trailing form feed you would enter set gwtn_ff in passthrough n in the Logon Script for a particular user To enable trailing form feeds in Pass through printing you would set the environment variable to y or simply not include
232. e Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks UTS for Windows is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 19 Please see the discussion on NIVDM s on page 229 148 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 6 Te Click RUN Type REGEDIT Click OK Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet setvices GS_Tnet Parameters InactivityTimeout Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify Enter the new value for the InactivityTimeout and click OK The new InactivityTimeout will take effect for all new connections that do not have a client heartbeat configured 149 2015 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Server Side Heartbeat Timer Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Failure Detection Recovery see page 363 Or use legacy style below The Sener Side Heartbeat Timer is used for setting the frequency in seconds which to poll the 3 party client for presence If the client is not present then Graceful Termination is initiated This timer is a registry key value and is in seconds The key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters ClntChkTimeout The default value is 30 That is 30 seconds You may disable this timer by setting it to Oxf fffffff Note For RF Users with devices that have Poner Save or Sleep Mode enabled please see page 232 for suggested se
233. e client window prompt followed by the ENTER key and the session will terminate and the window will clear and then close Connecting using a 3 Party Client Please see the section on Emulations for descriptions in connecting to the Georgia SoftWorks UTS for Windows using 3 party clients page 159 85 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Feature Packs Overview The Georgia SoftWorks Windows Universal Terminal Server is packed with features The aggregation of the features is geared toward industrial and commercial application The features logically group into units called packs All feature packs are included with the Georgia SoftWorks UTS at no extra cost Security Pack see page 87 The Security Pack provides the system administrator with confidence that the Windows System and the data transferred remains secure Encryption access and usage restrictions ate among security features implemented Performance Pack see page 104 Advanced proprietary algorithms optimizations and compressions provide for the fastest SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows on the market GSW Team Services see page 112 Allow mobile users to quickly share resources to improve productivity while keeping cost down without requiring system administrator IT intervention Failure Detection Recovery Pack see page Error Bookmark not defined Industrial and commercial applications demand sophisticated failure detection and recovery methods G
234. e compromised if this parameter is used Optional Parameter domain Description NT 2000 XP Domain for the user see page 73 Default No Default user will be prompted Syntax lt PARAM NAME domain value mydomain gt uses the default domain Optional Parameter address Description Indicates the address of the host computer to connect Default No default User will be prompted see page 69 Syntax lt PARAM NAME address value Host IP Address gt Optional Parameter useTopLeftLocation Description Places the work area in the top left corner of the rectangle specified for the applet Default The default value is FALSE indicating that the work area is centered inside the applet s rectangle Syntax lt PARAM NAME useTopLeftLocation value True False gt Optional Parameter useMSDOSFrame Description Specifies if the classic MSDOS frame will be drawn around the work area of the applet Default The default value is TRUE Syntax lt PARAM NAME useMSDOSFrame value True False gt 276 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Optional Parameter useBorders Description Specifies if borders will be drawn around the applet FALSE specifies that no boarders shall be drawn and all non work areas of the applet will be eliminated Default The default value is TRUE Syntax lt PARAM NAME useBorders value True False gt Optional Parameter useBoldFont Description Tells the applet to use the bold font Default True Syntax
235. e is 1 required argument 34 Or any file accessible from the server 248 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 a lt client side command line gt The command to execute on the client computer This command is any valid command on the client computer It can contain command arguments just as if entered on the client NOTE Path information as argument data must be from the Clients perspective If the program selected to run is a GUI program then a new Window is opened If the program selected is not a GUI program and has character output then the output data it is displayed in the SSH2 Telnet Window for 2000 ms two Seconds or the time specified by the scmddelay gs _dutexe command line option Page 74 Typically a script or batch file is created that will transfer the server file to the client run the client side command using the gs_exec command and then transfer the file back to the server when completed EXAMPLE UTILITIES EXECUTE PROGRAM ON CLIENT LOCAL EDIT USING GUI EDITOR A company brochure that resides in a file that contains graphic images and rich test exists on Server that the user would like to edit using the client copy of Microsoft Word The file can be transferred using the gs_ put utility then MS Word is invoked using the gs_exec utility and when the editing is complete the file is transferred back to the server using the gs_get utility The following commands reflect the sequence of commands that detail
236. e lower end Windows 3 1 95 98 ME platforms Follow the two steps below to enable Unicode Character Support for the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client 1 You must use the U command line option to enable Unicode character processing for input and output for the GSW Telnet SSH Client See page 76 for information on GSW SSH2 Telnet Client command line options 2 Modify the properties of the Command Prompt window to select a font which supports Unicode characters for example Lucida Console Left Click and Select Properties EN GS SSH Client 8 7 GS_SSH exe for Georgia SoftWorks SSH Server for Windows A Ver 8 61 6612 Copyright lt C gt 1997 2669 Georgia SoftWorks All rights reserved FIPS option disabled host Figure 124 Unicode GSW Client Command Prompt Window Properties 239 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Upon selecting properties you will get a window similar to the below on the left Select the appropriate font for your application for example Lucida Console and click OK Now you can display Unicode characters ci GS Telnet Client Properties ci GS Telnet Client Properties Options Font Layout Colors Options Font Layout Colors Window Preview Window Preview Bold fonts Raster Fonts Lucida Console Raster Fonts Selected Font Everson Mono Terminal Each character is C WINDOWS gt dir Each character is Y 7 screen pixels wide 10 screen pixels wide mm 12 screen pixels high SYSTEM A
237. e message acknowledged and the last broadcast message sent will be displayed to that particular SSH2 Telnet client The intermediate messages will not be displayed to that session Broadcast a message to A SINGLE Telnet Session There will be times that you will want to send a message to a specific SSH2 Telnet session rather than to all the active SSH2 Telnet sessions To send a message to a single SSH2 Telnet session you must first select the user to send the message london 69 716 11 18 14764 10 06 0 23 Conn london 69 1 352 18 6 8 2 Conn london 3 16 1 13488 16 6 Conn gt p 14 924 Conn 1 10 0 0 253 Conn 10 0 0 Conn 127 0 0 1 Conn 109 0 0 3 Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Figure 113 Select a specific user to send a message In the case above we are selecting the user name doug to send the broadcast message Once we have selected the user then we select the Session menu either by entering lt ALT S gt or clicking the menu item Session This will display the drop down which contains the item Send Message See Figure 114 189 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 pan ties ile iew i roadcast onitor Enter User Name ACTI hadow S IP Address erminate Del london 69 716 11 1 ch 10 0 0 238 london 69 716 1i ij end Message M 10 0 8 238 PJCC ABE etails D 16 6 ship 69 16 14 4 0 china 69 716 11 03 29612 16 4 ship 69 716 16 57 16296 rec 69 716 12 39 2912 Yy chicago 69 16 10 53 7828 Y chicag
238. e page 159 e Refresh the screen by entering lt ctrl gt R Many times RF systems may drop a packet of data and the screen will need to be refreshed e Settable screen size to accommodate screens smaller than 25 x 80 See section on Modes on page 286 e Extremely flexible Color to Monochrome mappings See page 163 e Extremely flexible Color to Grayscale mapping See page 164 e Multiple Levels of failure detection Including configurable timers See Page 144 e Pass through Printing See page 228 The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows is industrial quality and is suitable for demanding RF Hand held Terminal applications such as in warehousing manufacturing grocery stores and mote RF Devices using Power Save or Sleep Mode Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Failure Detection Recovery page 363 Or use legacy style below If the RF devices are using a power save or sleep mode then the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server should be configured such that the sessions associated with the sleeping device are not disconnected Below are the registry changes you need to make if you have the Power Save mode enabled on your RF devices 1 Inactivity Timeout HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters InactivityTimeout Please set to decimal 3600 2 Server Side Heartbeat HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters ClntChkTimeout
239. e remapped are Function Keys F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Configuration The keyboard macros are defined in the session configuration files The session configuration file for the desktop client is GSWClnt ini For mobile clients the file name is up to the administrator as long as the extension is gswtc The configuration files have the Windows ini format 8 Keyboard Macto s are different than Keyboard Accelerators Accelerators are available on the device when there is no session outside the session 84 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 A new section Macros needs to be manually added to the configuration file For example to remap all Functions Keys to send capital F followed by function key index and the enter key you would add the following section to the configuration file GSWClnt ini Macros Fl shift f 1 ENTER F2 shift 2 ENTER F3 shift f 3 ENTER F4 shift f 41 ENTER F5 shift f 5 ENTER Fo shift f 6 ENTER F7 shift f 7 ENTER F8 shift f 8 ENTER F9 shift f 9 ENTER F10 shift f 1 0 ENTER Fl1 shift f 1 1 ENTER F12 shift f 1 2 ENTER Fl1 1 0 0 SHIFT S SHIFT F 1 F2 shift f 2 ENTER F3 shift f 3 ENTER F4 shift 4 ENTER F5 shift f 5 ENTE F shift f 6 ENTER F7 shift f 7 ENTER F8 shift f 8 ENTER F9 shift f 9 ENTER F10 shift f 1 0 ENTER Fll shift f 1 1 ENTER F12 shift f 1 2 ENTER Terminating a session Type exit at th
240. e states of sessions as Team Service operations are occurring 16 You can view the partner session in the Session Administrator by sorting on the Monitor ID 140 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 System Administrator support for Team Services Share When sessions are shared by Team Services the TeamS column and the Mon column are of interest The partnered or shared sessions will have the same Monitor ID The TeamS state of one session will be blank and the other will show Shr The session showing Shr is the originating Team Service session the one that performed the F6 and the blank state is the session that performed the Accept Share F5 F EN Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe SEX ession roadcast User Name Logon Time Process ID Mont IP Address 16 6 6 3 10 0 0 253 180 0 8 3 10 0 0 38 10 0 0 140 10 0 0 254 16 6 6 5 46 newyork 68 27 22 57 4626 ship 68 27 22 58 336 mexico 68 27 22 49 3372 london 648 27 22 46 3464 chicago 68 27 22 41 31 48 087 27 22 42 2396 8 27 22 46 3244 087 27 O e A ON ON Figure 94 Team Services Session Administrator SHARE The Session Administrator may not have both partners of the share next to each other like in the figure above However you can sort by Monitor ID as show below which will group partners Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin ex ession roadcast SSS Sort by ser ID Mont IP Address State TeamS Sort by S P User Sort by ogon Time
241. eaeenaeenaeens 102 EXPERED PASSWORD HAN DIENG is tele eve A RA A Bea ce A ene te 103 NTEGRATED WIDE WINDOWS SECURITY wicca cccec eee ie eee ia ete aretes 103 Performance Pack ico ose ore weal OS Oke Slee ale bet ace Po kes ee dos TO R 104 EAST PAST a PASE iia titel ea ada ia a dio 104 COMPRESSION EOR SLOW LINK SPEEDS hai A a 104 SLOW LINK AND INTERNET OPTIMIZATIONS oooooooooooooomomonoonooon 104 PROPRIETARY PERFORMANCE ALGORITHMS AND CODE OPTIMIZATIONS 104 DOSBOSS MSDOS APPLICATION PERFORMANCE BOOSTER ooooooooooooooooo 104 AUTOMATTIC LOGON AUTOLOGON Sd a BOR Oe ee Slee Sie Boe A Bee Seal eae 106 Autologon with ESMAS isa 106 Automatic Logon a Party A A RU NN 108 Automatic Logon SUMMALY oc deseccenceoceeioen iiir e iR Ei EEEE EEEE EAER E E iia 109 GSW UTS X604 NATIVE 64s BT Tyra te pa Spe wtih a e ia oe a a a a Sete eG Be eee See gs 110 REM SDT Oe ANTEREACESS rta ea lie de Sat Sak E a a Say toh Bs en ah tay aps E a oaa da as 114 Team Services iriri unae den ahpa ae Maes E 64 E A a a a EEE E 112 TEAM SERVICES GENERAL OPERATION cie a e a a 114 COVE Wii ds E A A A oth A T E ia E 114 Dynamic non cryptic text abbreviations for small screens ooionnnnnnninininnnnnnnnccnncanncinncnnccrn narran 117 TEAM SERVICES TASK Seo a de A ad gh hee da Seal GB ee Eee ee 120 LLANTA A A A A A A AD E E A A eee 120 MIDA A A A A a sia 122 SAFE A A E E E Gon Rea 124 ARANA RN 126 SESSION Information ici ias de dado ido Raagdota
242. eates a folder with the name specified for the User Create Default Configuration A default Local User per session configuration is created that will apply to any session if that session does not have a specific Local User configuration 341 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 LOCAL USER SPECIFIC amp A specific Local User Local User This is the User Name for a specific Local User Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts LocalUsers User Name Click to expand to see the property pages for the specific user Click to collapse Right Click Operation Paste Rename Delete Add User and Create Default Configuration Add Add Create Default Contain Domain User Configuration Property Pages YI e Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Local User Copy Copy the User configuration to an UTS copy buffer This configuration can then be pasted either creating a new User Configuration object or overwriting and existing object Paste Paste a copied User User name or Template to this specific Name This creates a folder with the name specified for the User Rename Rename a User Delete Delete a Local User see footnote 43 Export Export the Local User configuration to a XML formatted file Import Import the Local User configuration from a XML formatted file 43 Make sure that the Local User is logged off or can safely be disconne
243. ecially useful for ASP environments where an entire company department or group is assigned a single User Id that everyone shares The system administrator may want to limit the number of simultaneous connections for that company for a variety of reasons that range from server resource allocation to purchased access Restrictions based on the number of User Id sessions are enforced when the file gs_1 usr txt exists The User Id s with connection restrictions counts are listed in the gs 1 usr txt file For each entry in the gs 1 usr txt file two fields are specified The User ID and the Count How to set up User ID Count Restriction Notice the file in the GSW UTS installation directory gs Lust txt The file must reside in the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server installation directory NOTE The System account must have permission to read the gs 1 usr txt file This file is used for configuration of the User ID Count Restrictions The rules are simple for setting up the gs_1 usr txt file Itisa text file The character is the comment character Each entry must start in the first column Each entry consists of the User ID and the Count The User ID and the Count are separated by a single space Following is an example for using the gs_1_usr txt file 97 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE USER ID COUNT RESTRICTION ACME ASP is an Application Service Provider ASP where they have a Specialized Datab
244. eee eee 175 SESS FON ADMINTES TRATOR estao e e Sb Fie a ae ene Se ta Re pester 175 Session Monitoring Privileges ccccccccccscesessssesssesscesesseesecsessecseeecceeseesecseesecaeeecaseseaecseeseceseeeaeeeseeaeeseeaeseeesenaeets 175 Starting the Session Administrator 177 Observing SSH2 Telnet Sessions ccccccsccsssescesesseesetseeseceeecseescesecseesecseesecasseecnseeseeseeseeseseseeceeseseeseeseeaeeneeeeeneeerens 178 MonttoniRS Ci ss Sc daa de ao de tdi o Mee e A a 180 Shadowing SSH Telnet SessiOWS ccsscesesssesecnseescuseeseuseeseesecaeesccuseescsecsessecsessecsceeseeaesseesecseseceneeeeeaeesessecaeeeeneeats 182 DSELFTES 14022 SESSIONS gt init ita tE Sn EEEE AEE AAA A Ad An dr E bi 183 Terminating SSH2 Telnet Sessions ccccccecssscesesseeteeseeeecnseescsecscesecseesecseeeecceeseseeseeaecseeecaeeeeeaeeseeaeeseeaeeneseeenaeets 184 Attach to a Suspended Saved Session cccccccceccesesseeseesseeeenseescesesseeseceseecseeecnseeseeseceeseseeeeceseeseeseeseesesneeeeeneeerens 185 Send a Broadcast Message to SSH2 Telnet Sessions ccccccccssescevesceseeseeeecuseeecuseeseuseeseeseceseeeaceesenseeseeaesneeeeenseets 186 Broadcast a message to ALL SSH2 Telnet SCSSIONS 0 c ccccccsccecesseeteeseesecsseeecseuscesecseuseceeecsseseseeseeseeeeaesnteeteaeets 186 Broadcast a message to A SINGLE Telnet Session cccccccscssesseesceseesceesseeecuseeecnseesceseeseeaesueeeecnseesenseeeeeneeneeatens 189 Schedule a Broadcast Message cceccccssce
245. eeecneeeseeaeesesaeseeeeeaeets 257 GS PUT ETOP LO ISA AN A A NN 258 GSE GEE ETrORMAlMES io A NOR tons acliete bondi case cobs st doe tags AA a Sci 260 LAUNCH GUI APPLTCAT LION ON SERVERS 00 Se ene a ea die we oleae Oe ee Oe 263 REBOOT WINDOWS SERVER COMPUTER COMMAND LINE UTILITY 264 SHUTDOWN COMMAND LINE UTILITY FOR WINDOWS ooooooooooooooooo o 265 REMOTE REGES TRATION UTILITY seee ale a ees 266 SPECTALS BEI PROCESS ENG ais ote ci Sie seks ie ents Bia A Sal Seale eS GR 267 GSWBELL SPECIAL BELL PROCESSING FOR SAPCONSOLE oooooooooooooo 268 TTY NAME o at stan en tes oie od AA Seba Mete seh tesa cate Zeige e E ELA enh LO one Ne gees 269 CETENE SS EROLT BAR Saa decode ce Wises a ii A E te e 4876 269 Setting a Default Domain mini e 270 SU PARTY CLIENT DEFAULT DOMAIN OVERRIDE Latas alte dies 271 Setting the Telnet Port or Multiple Ports oooocccccooooooooo o 272 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015
246. eeeeeeeaeens 232 TCP Receive Windows VITEL A A vb et hea bed A A beg es Fentee 233 TCP Maximum Retransmission Count ccccccccccceccceccessecseesseesesesesesceseceecesecesecssecssecseecneeeseseresereeeseseeseeneenaeenaeees 233 Create User Profileko ts Zips tis he RENEE whan Cabs ic lic hse bn End lp inn esti 234 CustomShell Rath di da in Ein des til 236 Refresh Character y aid Ati iio iria ib sti 237 Unicode UTF 8 Encoding ccccscsssssssssessesecsseescuceescseesssecasesscucscessecsesecacesscsesecesaeeesssecaeesecueenesaeneaesesaeeeseneeees 238 Unicode Character Support with the GSW SSH2 Telnet ClieMt ooonnninninninnninnnconconncnncnnncnnrrncrnrnrrrnr nr 239 UTF 8 Encoding with 3 party telnet SSH clients conocieran 242 TelnetIP Protocol e la da Ei dd vba ba ess latin diiniita asii 243 SSATP ANA A dook eraa oait 244 UIS REOLOCO LN OD east MERTON e a e ca e La o tes re ao a e te cts tae nl MCA 245 Utility Pack muss a a A a AA A 246 CHANGE PASSWORD COMMAND LINE UTILITY oo oooooooooooonooooooooo o 246 CONNECTION BANNER E E E A ON 247 EXECUTE APPLICATION ON CLIENT FROM WITHIN A SSH2 TELNET SESSION 248 FILE TRANSFER COMMAND LINE UTILITY ooooooooooononononononon o 252 GS_PUT Transfer from Server to Client cccccccccccscssssecesseescesesseesesseeseceeecnceeseesesseeseseeseceseeeaeeseeaeceeesneseeeneeets 252 GS_GET Transfer from Client to SCrver cccccccccccsscssssccssessceseeseeseeseeseceeeecseeseesesseeseseeaecae
247. efault m Open Printing Print Command awnPinter A r Failure Detection and Recovery r Session Saver r Process Control Enable Session Saver No Teminate Child Processes when User Exits Yes Reconnect Based on Graceful Termination Script Reconnect Wait Timer minutes SSS SSS nnn crea i me A Figure 204 Domain Name User The configuration summary description for a Domain Name User Local User Grandfathered User and User Template are the same Differences are noted in the overview section of each object Please see the Local User Configuration for details on the property pages for Users on page 388 386 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Local Users 4 3 UTS Configuration 1e Global per system 5 45 User per session H Q default config fd Domains 2 3 amp Local Users 3 Figure 205 GUI Tool Local Users JANUARY 27 2015 6 Local Users 3 Local Users Summary View O How many GSW UTS Local User configurations are defined Local Users 3 There are configurations defined for 3 local users FS Note The black circle with a white check indicates that a default configuration exists for local users O Determine exactly which configuration is used Once the UTS determines that the connection being initiated is not associated with an IP address or a domain then the Local Users are checked for a configuration If a configuration i
248. electing the option Automatic logon Session Settings Session Automatic logon Check the Automatic logon box to enable the client for Automatic Logon as shown below Connection Session Security Prir_ lt gt Encryption Public key Cert logon El Automatic logon GSSAPI NTLM logon 7 20 0d 70F 22 a Figure 30 Mobile Client Automatic Logon Option 45 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Keyboard Macros Keyboard macros are a powerful and time saving feature that lets the administrator define custom keys on the device when the session is active Macros are used for remapping Function keys F1 F12 to keystroke sequences Macros definitions have the form Function Key Keystroke Sequence Where Function Key is F1 through F12 and Keystroke Sequence follows the same format as the GSW Termination strings page 152 The keys that can be remapped are Function Keys F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Configuration The keyboard macros are defined in the session configuration files These have gswtc extensions The configuration files have the Windows ini format A new section Macros needs to be manually added to the configuration file For example to remap all Functions Keys to send capital F followed by function key index and the enter key you would add the following section to the configuration file on the device usually default gswtc Macros Fl sh
249. ence over a Cold Reset By default the GSW Telnet Client is installed to a persistent directory The directory is System Georgia SoftWorks C753X e User Fonts Your fonts need to reside in two locations Windows Fonts And ALSO System Georgia SoftWorks C753X 2 Uses Standard Accelerators and Shortcuts for all CE NET 4 2 devices page 42 3 Startup Default Connection Settings e The file System Georgia SoftWorks C753xX default gswtc is loaded on startup if found e If the security level is user then the GSW SSH Telnet Client will attempt to connect 4 Additional Files The setup program will install the file ASystemlautoexec bat Please do not delete or modify this file as it is required for persistence and automatic startup of the client 5 Application Protection The LXE MX3X provides Applock application security software The GSW SSH Telnet Mobile clients are compatible with Applock and may be launched from Applock In the Applock configuration you must specify which application is to be launched and you must specify a full path to the application Please specify the following path in the dialog Windows GSW_lnch exe 59 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Before configuring the system for Applock pre configure all the settings in particular the default gswtc file and then go to File Security and configure the security to the user level and press OK 60 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27
250. eneeneeeeenaes 82 ANSWER e ee A 83 DESKTOP KEYBOARD MACRO Siete ad id da A a awh aaa ias 84 TERMINATING A SE SS LON cosida sto Sates ee whan i SS a ee eee Ree ee eae bo eats 85 CONNECTING USING A37 PARTY CLIENT at o Oh Se alee maids 85 Feature Packs Overview 0 p EERE AT ee eee eee eee eee 86 Security Pack tio ss eno 2 Wiel se BS Oe eta Ro Ga Wis BS ol Slade aa 87 ENCRYPTED DATA STREAM TELNET SERVER sess ee aie SW pete e ee BAe we Ee eee Ge 88 Data Stream Encryption Client Parameters ccccccccccccecesscesesssseeesseescuseescesecseesecuseesceseeseesecesseceeesceaeeseeseeseeeenseerenees 88 Data Stream Encryption Server Environment variable cccccsccscsescesesseesesseeeecnseescnsesseeseseeecuseesceseeseeaeeeeesnseeeenees 88 Enable Encryption Server Registry variable cccccccccccsssseseesceseeseesetseeeeseeecnceeseesesseeseceseecceeseescaeeseeseeseeeenseeeenees 89 Proper Operating System DEL S 2 ia ia stas 89 Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server SE 128 bit Strong Complete Data Stream Encryption oseese 89 ENCRYPTED LOGON SEQUENCE see cote dr tape ew ele a a a AA 6 clea es Oe 90 ENCRYPTION BASED ON TP ADDRES Se pista e ripper 91 ENCRYPTION SSH SERVER wots cd as elie ee ee A e 92 ENCRYBTTON FLES LADA ois ele oe EE SE AA RE es FSG E Se SES 92 CONNECTT N RES TREC TLONS oi it Sons sla wise Satie Ge Sell a abe Se a ales eS 93 R estrictdccess based On Us TTD ide Boas 93 Restrict access based on IP AAAreSS
251. ent and server systems Data Stream Encryption Client Parameters The parameter c should be passed when invoking the Georgia SoftWorks Windows Telnet Client This can be passed from the command line via the following command gs Clint Exe c The shortcut may be modified to pass Data Stream Encryption parameter Data Stream Encryption Server Environment variable An environment variable must be set on either a Global or Per User basis to activate Data Stream Encryption Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global 357 or Per User 391 Or use legacy style below The environment variable for the complete data stream encryption is gwtn_encrypt_session in the Logon Script for a particular user or the Global Logon Script for all usets NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example To Activate Data Stream Encryption the following line should be present in the logon script set gwtn_encrypt session 1 is correct set gwtn_encrypt session 1 isnot correct For example To De activate Data Stream Encryption the following line should be present in the logon script set gwtn_encrypt_session 0 is correct GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enable Encryption Server Registry variable The variable EnableEncryption is a registry key value This Registry key enables or disables the ability to activate Encryption If it is disabled then all encryption environment variables are ignored Also the client command line
252. eorgia SoftWorks recognized the requirement and has unequaled capabilities in this area Legacy Pack see page 157 Proper operation with Legacy applications is the foundation of a quality SSH2 Telnet server The Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Universal Terminal Server for Windows will meet or exceed all expectations with respect to running character oriented and legacy applications Emulation Pack see page 159 The Emulation Pack provides all the popular emulations required by most 3 party clients Not only are the emulations provided but they are implemented correctly Power Features Pack see page 175 The Georgia SoftWorks UTS provides the most powerful needed and useful features on the market Compatibility Pack see page 231 RFC 854 compliance provides access from other platforms allowing the Telnet Server to be utilized by a variety of users RF Terminal Features See page 231 Utility Pack see page 246 Several utilities are provided for the telnet user to simplify and ease the use of SSH2 Telnet 86 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Security Pack Georgia SoftWorks provides unmatched security when using our Telnet Server for Windows It is the only Telnet Server that offers complete Data Stream Encryption The Georgia SoftWorks Telnet server has been submitted to the United States Department of Commerce and has obtained the proper license exceptions so it can be legally exported around the world
253. er NOTE On some systems you may have to reboot the server after installation If the Floating License is not recognized by the UTS server after installing the driver please reboot the server 22 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Uninstall Floating License Hardware Key In the event that you need to uninstall the Floating License SafeNet HaspHL please use the Windows Control Panel Add Remove Programs administrative utilities NOTE Removing or uninstalling the Floating License will disable the GSW UTS Server 23 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Software Registration To run the Georgia SoftWorks UTS Server for Windows you must first register the software This registration is NOT required if you purchased the Floating License Page 16 This entails just a few steps that involve obtaining the Product ID and providing this Identification to Georgia SoftWorks so a Serial Number can be generated NOTE Read System Signature chapter at the end of User s Guide How to Register the Software To run the registration software either 1 Click on the Registration Shortcut in the GSW UTS program group OR 2 Select the Szart button on the task bar select Programs then Georgia SoftWorks UTS and then Registration The registration screen is displayed The Registration software automatically fills in the Product Information fields as show in Figure 22 i GSW Registration Tool Ver 1 27 00 0007 Logistics ES Custo
254. ername Password and Domain can be used to eliminate prompting by the client or server when connecting to the UTS Server The following optional command line parameters may be used Parameter Description 4 or 6 Restricts protocol to IPv4 addresses or IPv6 addresses Otherwise both are supported a This specifies that this Georgia SoftWorks Client can AutoLogon page 105 b Answerback Text passed to the Server and stored in the Environment variable gwtn_answerback See page 78 for more details and PPC configuration Q TELNET client only Specifies that the client uses Encryption This option works only in conjunction with corresponding settings on the server See page 88 on setting up encryption cCertificateName SSH client only Specifies the Certificate name for certificate based authentication This feature is integrated with Microsoft Certificate Stores dDomain Specifies the domain of the user Use if you want to use default domain or no domain f index or This allows additional form feed control capabilities With some applications unexpected F index form feeds will be generated at the end of the document causing misalign output and paper waste If this behavior is noticed then the f option may help in suppressing the extra form feeds Optional index is the virtual printer index This option uses the copy command to print hHostname This specifies host name to connect to Hheartbeat Tim
255. ers and commands as expected The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server for Windows is flexible in providing options for handling graphic characters with 3 party clients If you are unsure of which graphics mode to select then feel free to experiment to determine the best mode for your 3 party client Note that the typical progression is the order that the selections are presented The first works for all the next is more specialized and so on Note The graphics mode prompts vary depending on the terminal emulation chosen Graphics Option Text Description Replace PC graphics characters with star characters Translate PC Graphics characters This simply replaces PC graphics characters with the asterisk character For VT emulation s the system converts the PC Graphic Characters to ACS and will temporally invoke Special Graphics character sets PC Graphics without ACS equivalents will be converted to the asterisk character SCO Console special handling For SCO Console the system will inject appropriate escape Pass PC Graphics characters without changes This will pass any characters gt 0x80 without any changes Pass all characters from PC Screen without changes This will pass ALL characters from the screen Your client software may have trouble handing ASCII values for some of the control characters like 0x08 backspace Georgia SoftWorks MSDOS Telnet Client User Defined Character Trans
256. ervice tasks When Accept Mode for a Team Service is performed the client device display is similar to Figure 58 Session Selection Display On the left we see the display after PUESTO a Yy 4 bk a uset has entered Accept Mode Team Services for Team Service Share Note that the Session Id is s5 Accept Mode Display Page 1 of 1 On the right we see the display after the Team Service operation Swap is entered A list of all sessions available for a Swap is displayed F10 Cancel Note Only sessions in Accept Swap mode are displayed So there will be no confusion swapping with i 3 2 E mn Y Qosw ciem 16 AA someone that did not consent to a New Yiew Tools Session ES swap Figure 58 Accept Mode Display Figure 59 Session Selection Display pi play play 115 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The associated Team Service operation displays a list of sessions available for that operation similar to Figure 59 The session is selected for the operation by entering the displayed line number for that session For example to swap with session s5 the user would enter a 2 since that is the line number for session s5 The Transfer operation uses the F1 key for Transfer Accept Mode and the F2 key to perform the Transfer operation The Swap operation uses the F3 key for the Swap Accept Mode and the F4 key for the Swap operation The Share operation uses the F5 key for Accept Share Mode and the F6 ke
257. es between 164 10 15 210 and 164 10 15 230 Note 2 An Address Wilde Chard is specified in line 4 200 206 20 100 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 This translates to include all IP Addresses no matter what the values for the last field The list below helps visualize the IP addresses included 164 10 63 0 164 10 63 1 164 10 63 2 164 10 63 253 164 10 63 254 164 10 63 255 A sample gs 1 ip txt file with examples is installed with the software It can be easily modified and used for yout purposes 101 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Restrict connection to only encrypted sessions Telnet Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Telnet Encryption see page 357 Or use legacy style below This feature allows connections only from the encrypted Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client This is another level of security that the system administrator can configure Many times the system administrator wants to ensure that ALL connections to the GSW UTS are encrypted Note This feature is only relevant for Telnet By the nature of SSH all connections are encrypted The variable RequireEncryptedSession is a registry key value This Registry key enables or disables the ability to restrict encrypted only sessions If it is disabled then only users using the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet client are allowed to connect The key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters RequireEnctyptedSession The defaul
258. es that need SSH2 Telnet access to the server This is how to set up the thosts file to exclude those particular machines Information needed IP address of Bill s machine 198 68 20 21 IP address of Tom s machines 198 68 22 25 Edit the file thosts and add the following lines EXCLUDE Here is the list of hosts that are not allowed to log in via SSH2 Telnet 198 68 20 21 Bob s machine 198 68 22 25 Tom s machine Now let s look at the contents of the file The EXCLUDE directive specifies that all IP addresses listed in the thosts file are not allowed to connect via telnet The next line is a comment reminding the System Administrator that the following Host IP addresses will not be allowed to connect via SSH2 Telnet Next is the list of Host IP addresses to exclude The list can be as long as you desire EXAMPLE RESTRICTION ALLOW ONLY SPECIFIC HOSTS TO CONNECT ACME Accounting has 3 remote locations For the machines at each location there may be dozens of different users that may be connecting at different times of the day The system administrator only wants to allow SSH2 Telnet connections from the 3 remote locations However the ACME remote Location 3 office is temporally closed and is under remodeling Therefore the system administrator wants to easily comment remove them from the allowed list and quickly add them back as soon as the office reopens Information needed 94 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 201
259. eseeseceeecnseeecceesensesseeseceeeecnseesenseeseeesneeeeeaeets 147 COMPLETE SESSTON CLEANUP ie soe Sus eee A A A A N a 148 COMPLETE NTIVDM CEPANUP Jete A aa ara Vets 2 a lo 148 SERVER SLDE TNACLIVILY PTMER ani telat el einer n Gace eine e e a ies 148 SERVER oT DE HEARTBEAT TIMER p la teve te seca ad SS cay te ea A atten E a leet ase 150 CLIENT SIDE HEARTBEAT TIMER ir ge a RS E eee eel a eam ee a 151 GRACEFUL TERMINATION OF DOS APPLICATIONS 0 cc cc ce E ered 152 vii GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 TE RMENAT ION SCRUB TS is ite doo SS A AS A Sy E MONS SUAS Hae ee 153 TERMINATION OF CHELD PROCESSES asada wee ay web fol e a e BR elija ase 156 Legacy Pack ui oe ce casey ar a ad ea hw eH a a Be anand ees 157 MOUSE dae Se o a A is Lov DOS CHARACTER MODE COLOR GRAPHICS o ie acer ls e IS BS weal de wie te 157 BUNG ELIONA RK EEO a a a E e is a E gl dad aos Lod SPECTAT CHARACTERS Hr OS o a A LA E 157 SCREEN SIZES OTHER THAN 29 X Bs 3 dese dd aoe hd ele ae A Aa 157 ALT KEY SUPPORT FOR ALT EMULATIONS aee e688 Sele rs Bee SS ware ore oe 8 158 CONTROL C CONFIGURATION S
260. esent otherwise default gswtc is loaded 43 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 No Scrollbars Option Set this option to eliminate the use of scroll bars to save screen space The application should display itself in the top left corner of the screen For example this is the position that SAPConsole assumes Of course this assumes that the application does not require scroll bars Normally Scrollbars are enabled The No Scrollbars option is enabled by selecting the option No scrollbars Session Settings Session No scrollbars Check the No scrollbars box to eliminate scrollbars as shown below File View Session Help Settings OK Connection Session Pri Answerback Heartbeat interval 30 xX Allow suspend Stay connected No scrollbars SEF a o Bam RGF 1 04 pa sy A Figure 29 Mobile Client No Scrollbars Option 44 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Automatic Logon for Mobile Clients Set this option to enable the GSW Mobile client for Automatic Logon The GSW Server Side Automatic Logon configuration must also be completed See page 106 Critical Note 1 Make sure that Automatic Logon entries for GSW Mobile clients are made in the gs_auto txt configuration file Critical Note 2 IP addresses configured for Automatic Logon for GSW Clients must NOT overlap with IP Addresses configured for Automatic Logon for 3rd party clients The Automatic Logon option is enabled by s
261. ess to the SSH2 Telnet Server based on a variety of criteria advancing the level of security Restrict access based on User ID The system administrator may optionally restrict connections via SSH2 Telnet based upon the wser id This is useful when you have a defined set of users that you would allow access to the Windows Server via SSH2 Telnet If the system administrator decides to limit the users allowed to logon via SSH2 Telnet then the local group Gwin Users must be created If this group exists then only members of this group will be allowed to logon via SSH2 Telnet If this group does not exist then all users that can logon locally can log on via SSH2 Telnet Once the group Gun Users is created each user allowed to logon via SSH2 Telnet must be added to this group Windows does not instantaneously update the group membership after the user manager is closed You will have to restart the Windows server after creating the group and adding users Restrict access based on IP Address The system administrator may optionally restrict connections via telnet based upon the Host IP address Remote access may be limited only to specific IP addresses The system administrator may also restrict specific IP addresses from connecting via SSH2 Telnet Restrictions based on IP address are enforced when the file thosts exists The IP addresses of interest are listed in the thosts file In short only IP addresses listed in the thosts file are allowed to connect
262. esseeeceseeseesecseeeceeeecuseesensesseeaeceseecnsseseeteesesaeseeneeneeeren 23 SOFTWARE REGIS TRATION 200 ia e Sey G a al wi gy ergs Whe Wiaee ence eee a 24 How t Register the Software is 24 GSW UDS CLE NDS at e A A A Shera eee week a deta a 28 GSW Clients and Operating Systems Diagram coooonnnnnninnnnninnncnncnccnnccnacn inn 29 GSW Client Support for Voice Enabled Control c ccccceccsccesessseseesseeecnseeseusesseeseceeecuseeecnsesseesenseeseesessesaeeeeeeeneetens 30 GSW DESKTOP Cla BN TS 4 a era ees a a a A a a e s 31 INSTALAN PS ii a tii nies 31 UNAS Matar ete dati han Meth 31 GSW MOB WEE CLIENTS suda pect e a a e e a ii 32 GSW Universal Mobile Clients Overview ccccccccccscssesssesssesstesecesseesecaeceaecsaecaeeeseecaeeeseseseeeessseesecaecaeeaeeneeeneeeeensees 32 Universal Mobile Clients for Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 ccccscesssssscesecseessceseceaecsecaeeescnseceaecaeeneeesecaecaeensenaees 32 GSW Universal Mobile Clients for Windows Pocket PC Windows Mobile 2003 WM5 WM6 ccccces 32 GSW Enhanced Mobile Clients for Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 OVerview cccccccccseccseesseeseeesceseceeenseeaeenseesseeseensees 32 Select the correct GSW Mobile Client ccccccccccccecsseeseessceesesetsecececacecacesseeeseecseeeseeecesecesseeseceaecaecaeeaeeneeenseeeensees 33 Installation steps A E e creme ey cence e da eae A O A 35 Enhanced GSW Mobile Clients List ccccccccccccssceeseessceseeceescesscecseeeseeeseeeeeseenseseseceaecaecsae
263. f creating a logon script for each and every user a single logon script can be created that will be executed by all users upon connection The Global Logon script operates in the same manner as a normal logon script except for the location of the script files The system administrator may put thek start batorc_start bat file in the subdirectory SCRIPTS under the install directory The server looks first fork start bat orc start bat in user s subdirectory and will not use the global script if it can find user s script EXAMPLE GLOBAL LOGON SCRIPTING AUTOMATIC EXECUTION OF A PROGRAM UPON CONNECTION BY ALL USERS Here is an example script to allow automatic execution of a Physician s Office Application medical exe upon connection for ALL users that do not haveac_start batork start bat in their logon script directory The Physician s office application is in the directory c medical Step 1 Create batch file k_ start bat in the SCRIPTS directory under the install directory Step 2 Add line tok start bat c medical medical exe Step 3 Save file and exit Now when any user unless they have their own login script in their logon script directory connects to the Windows system via SSH2 Telnet the application medical exe will automatically be started When the user exits the medical package the Windows command line prompt is displayed allowing other activity to occur IP Address Based Logon Scripts The capability to define diffe
264. f scheduling utilities or programs that can be used to launch the GSW Broadcast utility Most any scheduling program can be used to schedule the execution of the GSW Broadcast utility Graphic AT command Native on Windows The AT scheduling utility is available on Windows NT 2000 XP from the command shell The syntax of the AT command as described in the Help AT on Windows XP The AT command schedules commands and programs to run on a computer at a specified time and date The Schedule service must be running to use the AT command AT computername id DELETE DELETE YES AT computername time INTERACTIVE EVERY date NEXT date command computername Specifies a remote computer Commands are scheduled on the local computer if this parameter is omitted id Is an identification number assigned to a scheduled command delete Cancels a scheduled command If id is omitted all the scheduled commands on the computer are canceled yes Used with cancel all jobs command when no further confirmation is desired time Specifies the time when command is to run interactive Allows the job to interact with the desktop of the user who is logged on at the time the job runs every date Runs the command on each specified day s of the week or month If date is omitted the current day of the month is assumed next date Runs the specified command on the next occurrence of the
265. fic User Templates configuration provides e User Configuration for the User Templates e Note User Templates contain the same property pages as all session users Each page is described in the Local Users section For details on each property page please see page 388 401 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 System Signature IMPORTANT PLEASE READ The registration software obtains a system signature that is unique to your system This signature is an added security measure to inhibit unauthorized personal to obtain working copies of the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows The signature is comprised of hardware and software identifiers that exist on your system that make the target system unique These identifies are hashed into a Product ID and a Serial Number can be generated from this Product id If major hardware components of your system are removed replaced or modified your Serial Number may discontinue to work and you may need a new Serial Number to obtain access to the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows Please contact Georgia SoftWorks Technical Support if needed 402 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Specifications GSW SSH2 Telnet Server Operating System Platforms The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server operates on Windows Versions Windows 7 8 VISTA Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 R2 NT XP 2000 Sertver 2003 The Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server operates with 3 Party RFC 854 Tel
266. figuration The advantage to using the legacy configuration is that you do not have to change your methods or procedures for configuring the UTS Additionally most items the UTS can be configured via SSH and Telnet There are new features that include Domain Names Grandfathered Users etc that can still be fully utilized with the legacy configuration techniques Migrate to the GUI The advantage to migrating to the GUI is that you gain all the benefits of the Graphical User Interface including minimal training of new administrators on editing the registry adding environment variables to scripts etc Common Questions about Migrating to the UTS GUI Configuration 1 How much effort is it going to require migrating to the GUI Not much at all The GUI will come up and run out of the box with no changes All your existing users will show up as Grandfathered Users It is recommended that you move the users to either the Local Users or Domain Name Users categories Can I still configure items the old way after I convert Yes You can switch back and forth as you desire Do I have to restart the services after making a change Yes If it is a Global per system configuration item No If it is a User per session configuration item 349 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Logon Script Migration Logon scripts user configurations created in pre GUI versions of the UTS will appear under Grandfathered Users in the GUI versio
267. fix Configure a different Alt Prefix page 165 BellX column of the bell character initialized to Oxffffffff which makes it inactive page 267 BellY row of the bell character initialized to Oxff ff ff ff which makes it inactive BellChar value of the bell character initialized to 0x87 page 267 BellCnt number of times the bell will sound initialized to 0x01 page 267 ClntChkTimeout Server Side Heartbeat Set the frequency in seconds which to poll the 3 party client for presence page 150 Domain Set the default Domain for 3 Party Clients This is used to eliminate the prompting for the domain page 270 EnableEncryption Enables the ability to activate Data Stream Encryption page 89 EnableRFC854Clients Allows Disallows connection from 3 Party Clients page 95 EnableNAWS Enables Negotiate about Windows Size telnet option page 168 ESCDelay Determine how long to wait for the next character after an escape is received to consider is part of the escape sequence page 167 InactivityTimout Server Side Inactivity Timer Set the time in seconds that defines the maximum allowed inactivity period page 148 LsnOnLoopbackOnly UTS Protocol selection page 245 MaxSessions Limit the total number of sessions for the SSH2 Telnet server page 96 Protocol Defines the Telnet IP protocol page 243 321 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 RefreshChar Defines a character that refres
268. g Yes Yes Yes Logon Scripting Yes Yes Yes Programmatic Access to server Yes Yes Yes True Client Side Printing Yes Yes Yes Enhanced Method Yes Yes No Open Method Yes Yes Yes Default Method Yes Yes Yes Client Identity Uniqueness Yes Yes Yes Table 41 Power Features Pack Session Administrator Included with the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server for Windows is a powerful administrative development and training tool the Session Administrator The session administrator is a standalone utility that allows users within a certain group to perform many useful tasks associated with the active SSH2 Telnet sessions on their system You may Observe Monitor Shadow Attach and Terminate other SSH2 Telnet sessions Observe the connection state the Team Services State logon time Ete Monitoring and Shadowing are features pioneered by Georgia SoftWorks for SSH and Telnet Servers With Monitoring you can connect to existing SSH2 Telnet sessions and observe the screen exactly as the client sees the screen You may Shadow as session in the event you need interactive input capabilities with that session You may use this utility as a local Windows user or as a uset connected via SSH2 Telnet Session Monitoring Privileges To use the GS Administrator a user must belong to the local group Gun Monitors The system administrator must first create the group Gwin Monitors Next all users allowed to use the Session Administrator must be added to
269. g shipping Guns 164 14 102 211 165 14 19 1 164 14 245 212 165 14 150 222 164 14 246 213 165 14 151 223 164 14 247 214 165 14 178 224 ACME Mexico Seaside 242 10 150 5 242 10 191 5 c mexpl bat Plant shipping Guns 242 10 160 5 242 10 192 5 242 10 170 5 242 10 192 5 242 10 180 5 242 10 194 5 242 10 190 5 Table 45 IP Based Logon Scripting Information Table This is how to set up the gs_ip rt txt file to associate IP Addresses and Logon Scripts Edit the file gs_ ip rt txt and add the following lines ACME North Building Receiving Dock 164 10 15 1 c_nynrcv bat 164 10 15 211 164 10 15 255 c nynrcv bat ACMI North Building Manufacturing Floor 164 aL 1 0 16 64 10 16 25 c _nynman bat Re El ACMI 164 North Building Manufacturing Floor Quality Assurance 0 16 50 164 10 16 100 c_nynqua bat H p ACME North Building Manufacturing Floor Shipping 164 14 c_nynshi bat ACME Seaside Plant Shipping Guns 242 10 5 c mexpl bat Each time a User Logs on the GSW Universal Terminal Server identifies the IP address of the User and executes the associated logon script 210 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 A sample gs ip rt txt file with examples is installed with the software It can be easily modified and used for your purposes This is a copy of the file Georgia SoftWorks UTS IP based selection of logon scripts Copyright C 2004 Georgia SoftWo
270. gh the GUI One or more registry settings can be accomplished through a single GUI setting Environment Variables Environment variable settings apply to the User per session configuration The GSW Configuration Tool eliminates the manual configuration of environment variables through the GUI One or more environment variables can be accomplished through a single GUI setting Text Files Text files associated with the Global or User configurations can be accessed through the GUI The GUI will launch notepad exe as the editor that allows you to edit and save the text file configurations 48 A Property page is a screen that allows the administrator to view edit the configuration properties of an item 4 IP Address Ranges are specified by the text file gs_ip_rt txt that references an existing Logon Script 50 Grandfathered Users cannot be created with the GUI They are automatically created when migrating from an pre GUI version of the UTS 352 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Global Active Configuration JANUARY 27 2015 The Global per system Active Configuration Summaty provides the administrator with a quick view of most of the Global per system configuration settings on the right side of the display Some configuration values are stored in text files and they can be viewed by clicking on a button to open the text file On the left side of the display are categories that organize the Active configuration settings into similar gro
271. gwtn_term Sets terminal emulation for 3 party clients page 159 gwtn_tcpwindowsize Sets the TCP Receive Window Size page 233 318 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 gwtn_ts_enable_recovery Sets Team Service Recovery override page 133 gwtn_ts_enable_share Sets the Team Service Share override page 136 gwtn_ts_enable_swap Sets the Team Service Swap override page 135 gwtn_ts_enable_transfer Sets the Team Service Transfer override page 134 gwtn_ts_hotkey Sets the HotKey to enter Team Services page 138 gwtn_two_cells_per_uc Specifies if characters that occupy two character cells in MS Windows command prompt will occupy two character cells in 3 party clients page 174 lra_termination Define the termination string that is sent to an application upon detected failures page 152 319 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Environment Variables Set by the Telnet SSH Server Many environment variables ate set by the SSH2 Telnet server and are available to the User or Programmer gwtn_agntpid Process id of the Agent Process handling the user session gwtn_answerback Answerback text passed from the GSW Client page 83 gwtn_client_ip IP address of the client computer device gwtncl_clnt_side_ip Client s IP address as seen by the clients device gwtncl_hal_uuid Hardware Abstraction Layer Universally Unique identifier No two devices will have the same gwtn_hal_uuid gwtn_client_mac
272. hat claim to handle this serious problem the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server actually detects and eliminates these process consuming tasks in a remarkably quick time minimizing the impact on other users and tasks on the system The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client accomplishes detection via the configurable heartbeat timer and third party SSH2 Telnet clients utilize the configurable Server Side Heartbeat Timer Upon detection sophisticated algorithms are used to identify orphaned NTVDM and eliminate them 291 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Discussion PIFs and your MS DOS application s Performance Information derived and extracted from the Microsoft Knowledge base Windows provides a fully integrated command prompt that enables you to launch both Windows based and MS DOS based applications Although the concept of running an MS DOS based application in a Windows based environment may be familiar to you Windows handles this somewhat differently than Windows 16 bit does The essential difference lies in the command prompt itself under Windows the command prompt is a 32 bit Windows based application not the virtual MS DOS machine you would expect from Windows Under Windows until you start an MS DOS based application no virtual MS DOS machine is created Furthermore once you start an MS DOS based application its virtual MS DOS machine is used for all subsequent MS DOS based applications started from the same command prompt
273. hat the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet for Windows client is being used Of course the Virtual printer must be defined as described in the Virtual Printer section The logon script for user SuperSalesMan needs to have the commands described below Edit the users logon script k_start bat and add the following commands net use 1pt3 soloman GwtnPrinterSharel set GWIN LOCAL PRINT METHOD Enhanced NOTE The above commands must appear in the logon script It is not sufficient to set these neither at the command prompt nor in another batch file 222 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 On the SuperSalesMan laptop open a command shell and enter the command net use COM1 SSMLaptop ColorPrinter persistent no Remember we are not using the default printer but a customer printer The persistent no removes the COM port mapping at the next reboot Initiate the client session as gs_clnt exe rl COM1 H300 When the salesman prints to Ipt3 for user SuperSalesMan the output will appear on the color printer Open Print Method The Open Print Method is extremely powerful allowing the user to configure any valid printing command to be used when printing via SSH2 Telnet NOTE It is required that each user be logged in only once for Open Print method to operate correctly This means that each workstation RF device must use a different User Id when connecting to the server The printing command and other parameters are configured by setting the print comm
274. hat the custom application wants to r ease control of the input from the client e GWTN_GET_O This environment variable holds the name of the WIN32 event that when signaled notifies the SSH2 Telnet server that the custom application wants to ke control of the output to the client e GWTN_RLS_O This environment variable holds the name of the WIN32 event that when signaled notifies the SSH2 Telnet server that the custom application wants to release control of the output to the client e GWTN_ACK This environment variable holds the name of the WIN32 event that when signaled notifies the custom application that the request is granted Notel All of the above mentioned events are autoreset events Note2 The above environment variables are automatically injected into the session s environment and will vary from session to session Please do not attempt to modify those variables or set them in the autoexec files or Control Panel System Environment Please see the file interface c included on the installation disks for a code sample interface c contains a short program that takes control of the input and output and echoes characters to the client until a lowercase q is encountered 212 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 True Client Side Printing Printing the way you want it The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows True Client Side Printing allows documents to be printed at locations that ate easily accessible by each u
275. he Active Configuration for details NOTE Text files used for configuration are not available in Templates If you want to ensure configuration text files are associated with a specific template then you should manually backup the text file s with a corresponding name 379 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Overview Each session has an associated configuration This is true of sessions initiated by Domain Users Local Users Grandfathered Users and IP Address Range connections Each of the session configurations is termed User per session or User configuration The GSW Configuration GUI Tool allows the administrator to organize the configurations based on Domains Domain Names Domain Name Users Local Users IP Address Ranges Grandfathered Users and User Templates Additionally a default configuration may be specified for different objects This provides a powerful user configuration hierarchy that can be traversed and the UTS will apply the appropriate configuration It is important to understand the configuration hierarchy L TIP Understand the Cascading Configuration Selection Flow e ip Specific IP Address or Specific IP Address Range When a connection is initiated the GSW UTS determines if there is a configuration associated with the IP Address Range If so then that configuration is used Otherwise the GSW UTS determines if this is a Domain User Logon or a Local User Logon Domain User f Local Users Specif
276. he Host is found you will see the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server connection banner gt The connection banner contains the version of the telnet server as well as the number of sessions available and connected You are then presented with the Windows logon prompt Login ID At this prompt you should enter a valid Windows login id Example Login JohnSmith 5 The SSH Server has a different connection banner than the Telnet Server See the User Manual for the SSH Connection Banner 70 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Copyright lt C 1997 2008 Georgia SoftWorks All rights reserved host gswx64 Connected to server gswx64 Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server for Windows XP 2 83 Vista x64 Ver Registered copy 3606 users enabled Jser 1 of 3068 login Figure 43 Logon Prompt Below is a screen shot of the GSW SSH Connection Banner host woody name gt pos _east Welcome to Georgia SoftWorks Secure Shell 2 Rel 7 50 0003 JANUARY 27 2015 Al Es 7 50 B0903SE eorgia SoftWorks SSH Server for Windows XP 2883 Vista x64 Ver 7 58 B0B3SE Registered copy 3888 users enabled ET E ee login Figure 44 SSH Connection Banner 71 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 This is the password associated with the Login ID It will not be displayed when typed cy GS _Cint exe for Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server for Windows NI 2000 XP 2603 Vista Ver 7 50 0003 Copyright lt C gt 1997 2008 Georgia SoftWorks All r
277. he template name is displayed 5 to the right of the icon and the template configuration items property pages are available by expanding the object 6 Configuration Page property pages A configuration object may have several property pages Property pages may have property pages too 7 e as User per session configuration 8 A a Represents ALL users in all domains 9 Represents ALL users in the specific domain name Domain name is displayed to right A a of the icon 10 amp A specific User within a specific domain Expand to see property pages j This icon represents ALL Local Users Expand to see configurations for each specific 11 local user M This icon represents a specific local user The user name is displayed to the right of the icon and the specific user configuration is available by expanding the object 13 D This icon represents the default configuration associated with the parent object ia This icon represents ALL IP Address Range based User Configurations Expand to see IP configurations for each specific IP Address Range The dark IP icon represents a specific IP address Range based User Configuration The i name of the IP Address Range configuration is displayed to the right of the icon and the 5 4 y i IP specific IP Address user configuration property pages are available by expanding the object This icon represents ALL Grandfathered Users Expand to see configurations for each 19 a specific local user m a This icon
278. hecks to see if there is a configuration match with Grandfathered User If there is no match then the 51 A matching IP configuration means that the IP address has a matching entry in GS_IP_Rt txt file 52 A configuration match means that there is a folder in the scripts folder named with the same name as the user name 380 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 UTS checks if there is a Default configuration for All Users and if there is still no match then the UTS system defaults are used Continuing from above if the connection being initiated is not a domain user then the UTS but a local user then the UTS determines if there is a matching Local User configuration If no match exists then the UTS determines if a Default configuration exists for all Local Users If not then the UTS checks for a configuration match with Grandfathered User If there is no match then the UTS checks if there is a Default configuration for All Users and if there is still no match then the UTS system defaults are used 53 A configuration match means that there is a folder in the scripts folder named with the same name as the user name 381 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Default Configurations Scouse veins O e 5 UTS Configuration Q default config a Global per system 2 45 User per session amp User Configuration All Users default configuration SMN default config User Per Session Configuration Summary View Logon Script
279. hes the screen The default is 0x12 page 237 RequireEncryptedSession Restricts connection to only encrypted sessions page 102 szProtocol Defines the SSH IP protocol page 244 TSEnableRecovery Enables disables Team Services Recovery page 133 TSEnableShare Enables disables Team Services Share page 136 TSEnableSwap Enables disables Team Services Swap page 135 TSEnableTransfer Enables disables Team Services Transfer page 134 TSLeftJustify Enables disables Left Justification for Team Services dialogs text page 137 TSHotKeyCtrl Enables disables requirement for CTRL KEY Team Services Menu page 138 TSHotKeyVK Defines the virtual key code for the Team Services Menu page 138 UseGSW_SSHD UTS Protocol selection page 245 322 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Configuration Text Files used by the SSH2 Telnet Server The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet server utilizes several ASCII text files for configuration banner txt Contains text to display to client before the logon prompt page 247 colormap txt Defines color to monochrome mappings page 164 gs_auto txt Automatic logon Pre configuration file for GSW Client page 106 gs_ip_rt txt IP Based Login Scripting file page 207 gs_ipenc txt Encryption based of IP address scripting file page 91 GS_SCint bat Batch file that launches the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client page 76 gs_sssh bat Batch file that launches the GSW SSH Client
280. his configuration can then be pasted either creating a new User Configuration object or overwriting and existing object Paste a copied User User name or Template to this specific Domain Name This creates a folder with the name specified for the User Rename a Domain User Delete a Domain User see footnote 42 Export the Domain User configuration to a XML formatted file Import the Domain User configuration from a XML formatted file 2 Make sure that the Domain User is logged off or can safely be disconnected when Deleting or Renaming the User configuration 340 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Local Users JANUARY 27 2015 e This icon represents ALL Local Users Expand to see configurations for each specific All Local local user Users This is the root of all Local Users Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts LocalUsers Click to expand to see the list of Local User Names Click to collapse Right Click Operation Paste Add User and Create Default Configuration Add Add Create Default Contain Property Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Domain User Configuration Pages rl All Local X Y Y Users Paste Paste a copied User User name or Template configuration to the Local Users object This creates a folder with the name specified for the User Add User Add a User to the UTS Local User per session configuration This cr
281. hone 706 265 1018 Fax 706 265 1020 D25EEAFSAF1692EB019A5CE3486B20CCF293632CADC7 Purchased From Georgia SoftWorks Expiration date Notset Application software SAP Free updates until Wednesday September 17 2014 Parameter 3000 SSH Shield Save to file Print Hw Key Close Register Figure 26 Registration Complete Now the software is registered You may now run the Georgia SoftWorks Windows Telnet Server Note that you will be able to obtain Free Updates until the date specified IMPORTANT READ SYSTEM SIGNATURE CHAPTER AT END OF USER S GUIDE PAGE 402 27 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS GSW UTS CLIENTS In addition to the GSW UTS clients the Georgia SoftWorks UTS Server is compatible with all Telnet or SSH compliant third party clients JANUARY 27 2015 All the powerful and popular GSW Client options and features described in the GSW UTS ate available both for the GSW Telnet Server and GSW SSH Server except where specifically noted Georgia SoftWorks offers Telnet SSH Clients for the following platforms Table 2 GSW SSH Client Platforms Window 98 ME Yes Yes Windows NT 4 0 Yes Yes Windows 2000 Yes Yes GSW DESK TOP CLIENT Windows XP Yes Yes Windows 2003 Yes Yes Windows Vista Yes Yes Windows 2008 R2 2012 R2 Yes Yes Windows 7 8 Yes Yes GSW Mobile Pocket PC Device Cl
282. ia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server for Windows allows the Alt key sequence to be transmitted to an application by providing a substitute key sequence the Alt Prefix for the Alt key The default Alt Prefix is Ctrl b For example in order to transmit A1t you will type Ctrl1 b and then f Depress C r then b release the keys and then depress j In order to really type in the AltPrefix character from the keyboard you will have to type it twice like Ctrl b Ctrl b to get the Ctrl b A different Alt Prefix can be configured using AltPrefix parameter in the registry editor The default value is set to two 0x02 which is the ASCII value of Ctrl b other values are as follows Key Sequence entered by User Table 38 Alt Prefix values aa l Q FO O OG Oaja o Me Md ee ee RA fa fa fal tad fan faa 5 1815 5 ele le Lal al rd le lal K Q O ct ct ct ctf ct Q Q Q 2y This is how to change the registry key for the AltPrefix Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks UTS for Windows is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location The key is HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CutrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters AltPrefix 165 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 6 Te Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen Click RUN Type REGEDIT Click OK Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL
283. ial Graphics character set be Oe 6a Of 171 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Terminal Initialization 3 Party Clients Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Emulations see page 375 Or use legacy style below You may have a special situation or advanced application where you need to send a specific terminal initialization sequence to a 3 party client Normally you do not need to get familiar with this section however the capability is present for advanced requirements This feature allows you to send an additional sequence of characters to the 3 party client at the start of each session You may send one or more up to 10 per row initialization characters to the 3 party client A text file is used for specifying the initialization characters to send The name of the global file is gs tinit txt and is installed in the GSW UTS root directory Each row in the file specifies up to ten characters to send to the 3 party client The specifications of the characters are byte values in hexadecimal each separated by a single space The FP character in the first column designates a comment line Each row must start in the first column For example lb 2e 25 will load the Portuguese character set into G2 for vt 220 terminal 172 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Backspace on Delete For Third Party Clients Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Emulations see page 392 Or use legacy style below Configu
284. ic Domain User 19 Specific Local User L J If a configuration exists for a specific domain user then its if a configuration exists for a specific local user then its configuration is used configuration is used All Users in a Specific Domain Otherwise if a configuration exists for the Specific Domain then its configuration is used A All nA Users n All Local Users Otherwise if a configuration exists for All Domain Users then Otherwise if a configuration exists for All Local Users then that configuration is used that configuration is used Grandfathered User Otherwise the GSW UTS determines if this is a Grandfathered User If so then that configuration is used E All Users Otherwise ifa Global User Default Configuration exists them that configuration is used Otherwise use the GSW UTS System defaults Figure 200 Cascading Configuration Selection As pointed out above when a connection is initiated the UTS checks for an existing configuration is in the IP Address Range objects If a matching configuration is not found then the UTS determines if the connection is either a Domain User or Local User If it is a domain user then the UTS determines if there is a matching Domain User within the matching Domain Name If not then the UTS determines if a Default configuration exists for the specific Domain Name If not then the UTS determines if there is a Default configuration for All Domain Users If not then the UTS c
285. ices Following are a few Tips when installing the GSW SSH Telnet Client for the above devices running Windows CE NET Version 4 2 1 Persistence over a Cold Reset By default the GSW Telnet Client is installed to a persistent directory The directory is Application Georgia SoftWorks C753X e User Fonts Your fonts need to reside in two locations Windows Fonts And ALSO Application Georgia SoftWorks C753X 2 Uses Standard Accelerators and Shortcuts for all CE NET 4 2 devices page 42 3 Startup Default Connection Settings e The file Application Georgia SoftWorks C753X default gswtc is loaded on startup if found e If the security level is user then the GSW SSH Telnet Client will attempt to connect 4 Additional Files The setup program will install the file Application StartUp reinst bat Please do not delete or modify this file as it is required for persistence and automatic startup of the client 5 Application Protection Use the File Security dialog as described in the Application Protection page 61 section 58 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Tips for LXE MX3X Devices Following ate a few Tips when installing the GSW SSH Telnet Client for the LXE MX3X running Windows CE NET Version 4 2 Note Please verify that you are running version MX3XGC4201C or later of the LXE firmware You can view the version on your device by Start Settings Control Panel About Versions 1 Persist
286. ide A command line parameter when initiating the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet client allows printers other than the default printer to be used The Parameter is On Windows 95 98 rx printername ot cx computername printersharename or cx lpty rx comy On Windows rx computername printersharename or rx lpty rx comy Where x is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 the Printer Index number and Where y is 1 2 3 4 the com port or lpt port number Diagram continued on next page 221 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Laptop Name SSMLaptop LAN WAN os INTERNET o COM1 ColorPrinter DIALUP Telnet Client Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client for Windows Client Operating System Windows 95 99 The attached printer is not the default printer for the laptop GwtnPrintecSharel top printer Share Name is ColorPrinter ver is sel to Generic Text o invoke the Georgia SoftWorks e wo Toe Le x y Telnet client rectory C GS 3 Seripts SuperSalesMar gs_clnt exe ri CustomerColorPrinter HI00 oman GwtnPrinterSharcel Note The name of the GSW SSK Figure 121 True Client Side Printing Enhanced Printing Override Important Information User Name SuperSalesMan Server Computer Name soloman Telnet Client GSW SSH2 Telnet Client for Windows Client Operating System Windows 95 98 Color Printer Name CustomerColorPrinter Color Printer Share ColorPrinter Virtual Printer to Use 1 The only requirement is t
287. ient machine For example ATX UNIX will use the lpr command and Windows 98 will use the copy command and Windows will use the print command If the print commands parameter is not specified the behavior is as follows Windows will print on the default printer using the print command Other operating systems will attempt to print using the Java graphics engine which does not always produce expected results The full capabilities that exist with the standard Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client are available 37 The spool file is the data to print received from the server 275 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSJC Applet parameters Applet parameters ate provided to supply configuration information to the telnet server just as with the standard Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client The parameters include NOTE The syntax provided is an example and is different based on the type of browser interpreting the commands Optional Parameter port Description host s port to connect to see page 284 Default Port 23 Syntax lt PARAM NAME port VALUE 23 gt Optional Parameter user Description NT 2000 XP User ID Default No default The user will be prompted see page 74 Syntax lt PARAM NAME user value Smith gt Optional Parameter password Description Password for NT 2000 XP User ID Default No default User will be prompted see page 73 Syntax lt PARAM NAME password value mypassword gt Note Security may b
288. ient server applications universe from isolated and fragile sessions to the world of persistence and creative collaboration of empowered users Team Services furnishes your mobile device users with innovative session management tools that are initiated from the client Team Services is fast and easy to use GSW Team Services empowers the mobile device users to share resoutces transfer swap share and recover mobile device sessions from the mobile device This provides your mobile device users the capability to quickly solve common mobile device session and device problems without having to perform administrative operations on the server or needing to involve Information Technology IT personnel e Empowers Mobile Device User session management operations initiated from the mobile device This is a breakthrough feature e No system administrator intervention required e Works with GSW and 3 party clients e Incredible Features Sharing Swapping Transfer and Recovery of sessions e Fast and Easy No technical degree required and the fastest way to resume work Team members helping team members Instead of purchasing multiple types of devices per user or all high end devices for the occasional need for high end features team members can maximize device utilization by quickly sharing or swapping devices without even having to log off or involving the system administrator Often user s needs to use a different or an additional devic
289. ients Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 Yes Yes GSW Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 Client Pocket PC 2002 Yes No GSW PPC2002 Client Pocket PC 2003 Yes Yes GSW PPC2003 Client Windows Mobile Yes Yes GSW PPC2003 Client 2003 WM5 WM6 XE MX3X Yes Yes GSW Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 WM6 Teklogix 7535 devices Clients Teklogix 8525 Symbol MC9060G Intermec CK30 CV60 All of these devices when Running Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 GSW Java Clients Java Client Yes No Java Applet Yes No Both the SSH and the Telnet Clients are included with the Georgia SoftWorks UTS Please note that only the clients appropriate for the server purchased will be able to connect In other words if you have a Telnet Server only GSW Telnet and compliant third party clients will connect If you have the GSW SSH Server only GSW SSH and compliant third party clients will be able to connect NOTE SSH Clients can NOT connect to the Telnet Server and Telnet Clients cannot connect to the SSH Servet 28 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Clients and Operating Systems Diagram The following diagram may be helpful in visualizing the GSW Client to use with various Windows Operating Systems GSW CLIENTS GSW DESKTOP CLIENTS Installed with Setup exe GSW MOBILE CLIENTS Windows Operating Systems 98 through Server 2012 GS_SClint bat GS_SSSH bat Se GSW UNIVERSAL MOBILE CLIENTS GSW ENHANCED MOBILE CLIENTS CE
290. ients only Use the command line parameters to set the default domain for the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client See page 72 This is accomplished as follows The key is HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINEASYSTEMICurrentControlSetl Services GS_Tnetl Parameters Domain 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEASYSTEM CurrentControlSetl services GS_T netl Parametersl Domain 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value for the Domain and click OK The new Domain will take effect for all new sessions This registry value is initialized to UNKNOWN which disables a default domain The empty string means the default domain This is equivalent to pressing enter when prompted This will eliminate prompting for users of all clients 270 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 3 Party Client Default Domain Override The user may override the default domain when using a 3 party client when connecting via Telnet or SSH When a default domain is set the GSW UTS does not prompt for the domain and automatically applies the domain set in the registry If the user needs to override the default domain then the optional syntax described below can be used when logging on to the UTS to select a different domain The domain can be specified along with the username when the user is prompted for the Windows User Name The domai
291. ifferent 107 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Automatic Logon 3 Party Clients Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Automatic Logon see page 355 Or use legacy style below This feature allows you to pre configure a list of IP addresses that will be able to connect and log on without any User ID Password or Domain prompting when using 3 Party Clients Autologon is useful in many situations however the real power of this feature is realized when coupled with the Session Saver page 144 and or used with RF Data collection devices for fast and easy connection establishment For example when a connection is broken due to a link failure you can reconnect without the time consuming UserID Password and Domain prompts and resume work exactly where you left off before the link failure A server side text file is used for specifying the IP addresses that will AutoLogon The name of the file is gs logon txt and is installed in the UTS Root Directory No client configuration is required for 3 party clients The order of the fields in the gs_logon txt file is as follows IP Address The IP address of the client Domain Specify the dot character if no domain is used User Name The User ID for the connection Password The Password Table 19 Automatic Logon Specifications gs_ logon txt when using 3 Party Clients An IP address can be associated to 4ntoLagon with a Georgia SoftWorks OR a 3 Party Client but NOT b
292. ift f 1 ENTER F2 shift 2 ENTER F3 shift f 3 ENTER F4 shift f 4 ENTER F5 shift f 5 ENTER F shift f 6 ENTER F7 shift 7 ENTER F8 shift f 8 ENTER F9 shift f 9 ENTER F10 shift f 1 0 ENTER Fll shift f 1 1 ENTER F12 shift f 1 2 ENTER 4 Keyboard Macto s are different than Keyboard Accelerators Accelerators are available on the device when there is no session outside the session 46 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Break Out Sequence Disconnects the session There may be times when you want to disconnect the session To disconnect the client from the server enter the Break Out sequence After the session is disconnected further behavior on the session observes the rules configured on the server such as Graceful Termination Session Saver etc The Break Out is accomplished by entering the sequence ctrl shift d Note Do not confuse this sequence which disconnects the session with the Ctr1 Shift b sequence see page 41 Extended Features for Pocket PC 2003 and Windows Mobile 2003 WM5 WM6 Devices Mobile Feature Name Brief Description 1 Keyboard Macros Remap Function and Special Keys to send a sequence of characters 2 Free Function Keys Function Key s F1 F12 are freed released from Operating System control and are available for the application 3 Application Launch Bypass Interoperation with application launch utilities such as Intermec s iLaunch 4 Simplified Ch
293. ights reserved host 3swx64 Connected to server gswx64 Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server for Windows XP 2083 VUista x64 Ver 7 58 BBB3SE Registered copy 30900 users enabled User 2 of 3008 login Administrator password i Figure 45 Password Prompt Domain Name This is an optional field If you do not wish to connect to a specific domain then you may simply press lt enter gt Otherwise type in the domain you want to connect You may eliminate the domain prompt either by using command line options or by setting a default domain on the Windows Server To set the default domain for all users follow the instructions on page 270 The Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client Command line options are described next Cint exe for Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server for Windows NI 2006 KP 2003 Vista 7 50 0003 Copyright lt C gt 1997 2008 Georgia SoftWorks All rights reserved host gswx64 Connected to server gswx64 Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server for Windows XP 20803 Uista x64 Ver 7 580 BBB3SE Registered copy 3008 users enabled login Administrator password domain Figure 46 Domain Prompt 72 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Georgia SoftWorks Desktop Client Command line options Description In addition to superior Perfect PC terminal emulation the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet and SSH Clients have powerful command line options facilitating faster easier and more flexible connections Many of these options such as the Host Us
294. imeouts the termination string a t js sleeps altf x will cause the following sequence of events to occur First Alf to be sent to the application This opens the file menu Second sis send to the application for saving the file Third the Sleep5 causes 5 second pause to allow the application time to save the files Fourth a tfto open the file menu list again Fifth an x is sent to the application to exit Finally e x i t ENTER is send to the shell which terminates the session Pe se Other examples of termination string definitions are SET LRA _TERMINATION alt f x e x i t ENTER SET LRA _TERMINATION F2 alf f x e x i t ENTER SET LRA _TERMINATION ESC ENTER e x i t ENTER wow 2 There are no spaces in the string following the sign Some printers and displays make it difficult to observe 154 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Termination Scripts Termination scripting is analogous to the Logon Scripting except it is executed when the SSH2 Telnet session is terminated The commands within the file cleanup bat are invoked upon termination of a SSH2 Telnet session This is invoked with both normal and abnormal terminations Cleanup scripting is available on both a global and per user basis as with Logon Scripting NOTE No applications that require user input are allowed in the cleanup scripts It is especially useful for properly un mapping network connections such as drives If you do not un ma
295. ine 0 corresponds to session id s 5 Accept Transfer Mode Display Abbreviated Select Session Display f GSW Client E Y d bk New View Tools Session S Figure 60 Unabbreviated Select Session E GOW Client E Yo 4 bk Figure 61 Abbreviated Select Session Page 1 of 2 f of GOW Client New View Tools Session E Figure 62 Abbreviated Select Session Page 2 of 2 Table 25 Team Services Select Session Display 119 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Team Services Tasks Transfer The Team Services Transfer operation takes a session on one device and moves it to a 2nd device It terminates the existing session on the 2nd device The session will resume exactly where it was when the transfer occurred In the diagram below we have two people Barry and Sam Each has a session and a device Sam is going to lunch and Barry wants to use Sam s wireless mobile device to scan some items his truck mount device cannot reach With TS Transfer Barry can transfer his session to Sam s device without even logging off SESSIONS CONNECTIONS DEVICES PERSON Team Services TRANSFER b EN CONNECTION petri Figure 63 Before Team Service TRANSFER The TS Transfer example is described below E As bk Transfer Acc swap Swap Acc share Share Acc xfer Transfer ACC swap Swap Acc share Share Recover nO F2 Next Cancel F10 Cancel
296. inese font GSW Mobile Clients support Simplified Chinese Font GB True Type Table 11 GSW Mobile PPC 2003 and Windows Mobile 2003 WM5 Client Extended Features Keyboard Macros GSW has provided Keyboard Macros for the GSW Mobile Clients for Windows Pocket PC 2003 and WM5 WM6 They operate the same as described for the Windows CE NET 4 2 5 0 mobile clients Free Function Keys Allows Function keys F1 F12 to be used by the application Windows Pocket PC Mobile and CE NET operating systems may take control of one or more of the function keys making them unavailable to the application software All GSW Mobile Clients with the exception of PPC 2002 free the function keys from the operating system so they can be used by the application To restore operating system control of the function keys reboot the device Application Launch Bypass GSW Telnet SSH client for PPC2003 and Windows Mobile 5 6 may be configured so it will easily interoperate with application launch utilities like Intermec s iLaunch such that the client will terminate immediately when the session ends Additionally if the feature is enabled the client will turn off all menu options except Disconnect The configuration is performed by setting the value of a new parameter Bypass that resides in the cppc2003 ini file in the section called Settings 47 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Possible Values ate 0 disa
297. ing System Windows The First virtual printer has been set with Station Insurance Printer Share Name is InsruancePrinter Printer Name GwtnPrinterl MedStation Formal Printer Share Name is FormalPrinter PrinterShare GwtnPrinterSharel The Printer drivers for each printer are set to Generic Text The Second virtual printer has been set up Command Line used to invoke the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet with Client Printer Name GwtnPrinter2 gs_clnt exe rl LPT1 r2 LPT2 H300 sd PrinterShare GwtnPrinterShare2 Note The name of the SSH2 client Logon Script Directory C GS_UTS Scripts Filename k_start bat net use lptl Medical GwtnPrinterSharel net use lpt2 Medical GwtnPrinterShare2 set GNIN LOCAL PRINT METHOD Enhanced Figure 120 True Client Side Printing Using Multiple Client Side Printers per User Note the correlation between client side command line parameters 1x and the Printer Share and Printer names on the server Important Information Server Computer Name Medical Telnet Client Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client 219 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Client Operating System Windows 98 2008R2 and Windows 7 Dot Matrix Printer Name InsurancePrinter Laser Printer Name FormalPrinter Virtual Printer to Use l and 2 On the server in the users logon script add the following commands net nel se use 1ptl use lpt2 MedServer GwtnPrinterSharel MedServer GwtnP
298. ins red FOREGROUND_INTENSITY 0x0008 Text Color is intensified BACKGROUND_BLUE 0x0010 Background color contains blue BACKGROUND_GREE 0x0020 Background color contains green BACKGROUND_RED 0x0040 Background color contains red BACKGROUND _INTENSITY 0x0080 Background color is intensified Table 39 Color Re Mapping Using the Attribute Bit Values from Table 39 we can create all possible color codes Foreground Color Value Description Background Color Value Description 00 Black foreground 00 Black background 01 Blue foreground 10 Blue background 02 Green foreground 20 Green background 03 Cyan foreground 30 Cyan background 04 Red foreground 40 Red background 05 Magenta foreground 50 Magenta background 06 Brown foreground 60 Brown background 07 White foreground 70 White background 08 Gray foreground 80 Gray background 09 Bright blue foreground 90 Bright blue background OA Bright green foreground AO Bright green background 0B Bright cyan foreground BO Bright cyan background OC Bright red foreground CO Bright red background 0D Bright magenta foreground DO Bright magenta background 0E Yellow foreground EO Yellow background OF Bright white foreground FO Bright white background Table 40 All Possible Color Codes Attribute values are created by adding the foreground value to the background value For example 93 means
299. ion 251 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 File Transfer command line Utility SSH2 Telnet file transfer capabilities are available with Windows when using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server and GSW Clients File transfer via SSH2 Telnet is convenient as there is no need for an FTP server to be installed and you are not limited by file sizes as with many email attachments Secure file transfer with Telnet is possible with the GSW Telnet Server and GSW clients When encryption is enabled file transfers are encrypted see page 89 Secure file transfer with SSH using very strong encryption is always enabled when using GSW SSH clients GS_PUT Transfer from Server to Client Efficient file transfers from the server to the client computer are easily accomplished when using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client A utility called GS_PUT is included in the SSH2 Telnet server installation directory Command gs put Description Command line utility that copies a file from the Server to the Client device computet Syntax gs_put s e lt log_file_path lt source_file path gt lt destination_file_path gt Arguments There are 2 required arguments and 2 optional arguments Required Arguments a lt source file path gt The file path to the file on the server Uses Server computer drive letters and directories b lt destination file path gt The file path for the destination on the client Uses Client computer drive letters and
300. ion Tool User Configuration Right Click Operations Table 54 Objects that may have a Default Configuration gs ipenc txt when using GSW Clients GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Table of Examples Example Georgia SoftWorks Client Caption String cececssecsssssesecesesessesecaeeecsevsccsessecaesaeeecnasseeneeecsaeats Example Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client Command Line Options Example IP Restriction restrict certain Hosts from connecting 0 0 0 cceteeceeeeecseeseteceseeecsesecsaeeecseesecneeseeneees Example Restriction allow only specific Hosts to CONNCCt te eseeseseceseeecneeseeseesetecsseecsecacsaeeecsaeseeneeaeeateas Example USER ID Count Restriction Example IP ADDRESS Count Restriction ceescceseseceseseceesecseecsevsccseaececsaeecsevsecnesesaesaesesaeeeesaeeeesaeaes Example Strict Teams Multiple companies in an ASP environment cccesceseseceteeecneeeeeeeeecneeeeneeseeees Example Set the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet client side heartbeat Example Graceful termination Amortization program link failure Example the GSW GS_ADMIN Command Line Utility Syntax 1 SHADOW Je Example the GSW GS_ADMIN Command Line Utility Syntax 1 Terminate 196 Example the GSW GS_ADMIN Command Line Utility Syntax 2 Terminate All Sessions Example the GSW GS_ADMIN Command Line Utility
301. ip rt txt is used for configuration of the association of IP Addresses and Logon Scripts The rules are simple for setting up the gs_ip rt txt file e Itis a text file e The character is the comment character e Each entry must start in the first column e Each entry consists of the IP Address or IP Address Range and the associated logon script filename page 209 The logon script file must be located in the GSW UTS scripts folder e The IP Address and the Logon Script are separated by a single space IP Address Syntax Use the industry standard 4 part syntax format nnn nnn nnn nnn when specifying the IP Address Example 10 1 1 1 An example entry in the gs_ip rt txt file would look like 10 1 1 1 k_logon70 bat The above entry would instruct the system that when a user connects from the IP address 10 1 1 1 the logon script k_logon70 bat should be used IP Address Range Syntax An IP address range is specified as two IP addresses separated by the dash character No spaces are allowed Below ate two examples Example A 10 1 1 1 10 1 10 210 Example B 192 68 22 10 192 68 22 99 An example IP Address range entry in the gs_ ip rt txt file would look like 192 68 22 10 192 68 22 99 k butldingN bat The above entry would instruct the GSW UTS that when user connects from any IP address that falls in the range from 192 68 22 10 to 192 68 22 99 the logon script k buildingN bat should be used IP Address Wil
302. is disconnecting NoRsp The Application has not responded to the data in its input queue Susp A SSH2 Telnet Session is Suspended That means the Session Reconnect page 144 feature is enabled and the client or link has failed leaving the session Suspended A Suspended session can be reconnected to via the Auto Reconnect feature or via the Attach feature of the Session Administrator A Suspended session can be terminated via the Terminate feature of the Session Administrator or when the gwtn_reconnect_timeout timer expires TeamS The GSW Team Setvices state 26 Note When used with the GSW Rocket Terminal Engine the SAP User Name is also displayed 177 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Observing SSH2 Telnet Sessions Using the Session Administrator allows observation of all telnet sessions on the SSH2 Telnet Server Relevant information is displayed in an easy to read format Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe ile iew ession roadcast User Name Logon Timet Process ID Mon IP Address State TeamS london 09 16 16 46 28626 Y 10 0 8 238 Conn A amp fer i 6 45 newyork china chicago china mexico london chicago rec newyork chicago newyork ship london rec china 69 16 69 16 69 16 69 16 69 16 69 16 69 16 69 16 69 716 69716 69 16 69 16 69 16 69 16 69 16 16 46 53 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 357 359 00 M3 23044 4440 7828 24268 5816 24856 176
303. is the Active live configuration being used for the UTS Click to expand to see the configuration property pages for the Active Configuration as shown in Figure 165 aR UTS Configuration Y Global per system 4 8 Active Configuration if Automatic Logon Security Failure Detection Recovery Power Features E Y Emulations Bell Control Protocols UTS System Templates 1 s User per session E Figure 165 Active Configuration Expanded Click to collapse Right Click Operation Add Add Create Default Contain Property Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Domain User Configuration Pages Active Y ABS y Global Configuration Copy The Active configuration can be copied and pasted to a UTS System Template Paste A copied UTS System Template can be pasted over the Active Configuration All contents of the Active Configuration are replaced Export The Active configuration can be exported to XML format file This is useful for backing up the Active configuration or deployment to additional servers Import The Active configuration can be imported from a saved XML file This is useful for restoring the Active configuration or for deploying additional servers 332 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 UTS System Templates Configuration Root This icon represents all the UTS Sy
304. ish amp pu E X1 HU I 0 7 I W 1 Vietnamese T i c th Sn th y tinh ma kh ng hai gi Farsi Persian po ps gt 3lop 2307 lcgmle 232 gro CE gop D ssw_server Products Telnet Test_Dev Images gt Figure 126 Unicode GSW Client with Unicode Screen Shot 241 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 UTF 8 Encoding with 3 party telnet SSH clients UTF 8 Encoding is easy to configure for 3rd party clients Perform the following steps to enable Unicode UTF 8 encoding for 3 party clients 1 Be sure that your 3 Party client supports and is configured for UTF 8 Encoding Some examples of SSH2 Telnet clients that support UTF 8 encoding are Kermit 95 version 2 0 and above Anzio or Pul TY 2 When connected to the SSH2 Telnet Server select One of the following emulation modes DEC VT 220 320 420 ot DEC VT 100 and graphic option Use UTF 8 encoded characters Now you ate set up for UTF 8 Encoding with 3 Party Clients 2 LukeXP K 95 el File Edit Actions Help Ole zz x codezn00 fio y fuera x C PROGRA 1 SAPpe sap ASAPCON i gt type tenp plass txt English I ean eat gl and it doesn t hurt re Anglo 5 v Te meg g eotan ond hit ne hearmad me Quebecois J peux bouffer d la vitre ea m fa pas mol Spanish Puedo comer vidrio no me hace da o Teelandie Ep ge bordad gler bad mei ir mp ekki Polish Mog jei i m nie szkodzi Czech Mohu jist sklo neublizi mi Turkish Cam yiyebilirim ba
305. it is critical that they do not accidentally Share Transfer Swap or Recover sessions from the other companies You can organize each company as its own Strict Team and they will only be able to participate in Team Services with members in their company You can even organize multiple Strict Teams within each company to further segregate team members Su za p 93 _jassenss ACME Sprockets Military Automotive Factory Train station Warehouse Complex jee J Agpicaticn Service Provider Server Server Team Name User Domain Name User Logon Name acme sprockets acme server 1 acme user a acme sprockets acme server 1 acme user z army complexl army intelligence army user 1 army complexl army intelligence army user 1000 auto factory sports cars 7 emerson auto factory sports cars 7 elliot train station public trans rr train point 1 train station public trans rr train point 400 130 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 You would modify the tsgroups txt file by adding the lines as follows acme sprockets acme server l acme user a Add a line for each Team Members at Acme Sprockets acme sprockets acme server 1 acme user z army complex1 army intelligence army user 1 Add a line for each Team Members at Army Complex army complex1 army intelligence army user 1000 auto factory sports cars _7 emerson Add a line for each Team Members at the Automotive Factory auto factory sports cars 7 elliot train station public trans rr train poin
306. it platform you will be alerted and setup will exit Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server UTS Setup Please obtain a 32 bit version of our software and run the setup again Setup will now terminate f Your computer currently does not run a 64 bit version of Windows Figure 4 32 bit platform alert The GSW Desktop client provided with all editions is a 32 bit client and will install on both 32 bit and 64 bit platforms 3 The GSW UTS 32 bit edition maintains the original name GSW UTS 10 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Server Installation From Windows perform the following Run the setup exe program The procedure is the same for both the GSW UTS and UTS x64 but be sure to use the setup exe corresponding to the platform The UTS x64 is identified on the setup screen as pictured below 1 The Welcome screen of the setup program is displayed and you are reminded and urged to exit all windows programs before continuing You are also reminded that you must have administrative privileges to install this program Click Continue Welcome to the setup program Georgia Softworks Universal Terminal Server UTS It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this program You must have administrative privileges to complete this setup WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized distribution or reproduction of this progra
307. ither by moving the up down atrow keys or clicking on the particular session Once selected either depress lt ENTER gt or click the menu item Session see Figure 101 to display the drop down item Monitor You may now select Monitor You are now connected to the other telnet session observing the screen activity exactly is appears to the other user You may monitor only No input is allowed to the other session To end monitoring the other telnet SSH session depress lt ESC gt You are returned to the Session Administrator Screen Notice that the graphics the colors the lines checks and box s are all displayed correctly Session Administrator CAGS UTSIGS Admin exe 20 MIO CSS ion Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn Conn ASwap Conn Swap Conn Akfer Conn Conn a Conn mexico 9 16 11 i 10 0 Conn london 16 1 64 16 6 6 23 Conn i 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 J O Ha OG Georgia SoftWorks Adm trator Ver 8 Figure 101 Session Monitor Select Session to Monitor 27 Hint The fastest method is to simply double click on the session to immediately start monitoring 180 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 If User John was using Norton Command and his screen was displaying the following 3 anne dli ras Repl Export L Scripts Import L Scripts Setup She LLIExt spool PRINTERS rt procs 13286 iewers wins Jeb C WINNT gt yl 2 Figure 102 Session Monitor Client Sessio
308. ity Apply the serial number from a remote location via SSH2 Telnet In some instances you may need to apply the serial number from a remote location The Georgia SoftWorks Remote Registration Utility provides the capability This can be done when upgrading to a new version or permanently activating a trial version of the software Syntax is GS RR serial number Where serial number is the serial number is obtained from Georgia SoftWorks NOTE You must have SSH2 Telnet connectivity to the server either during the trial period or an already registered installed copy To run the Remote Registration utility 1 Send the Product ID to Georgia SoftWorks as defined on page 24 2 Georgia SoftWorks will email or fax the serial number back to you The serial number will look something like D2 SEEAF8AF1 6 92EBOF9A5DE28520FD8407F8632CC5D8 3 Connect to the Server via SSH2 Telnet that you want to register 4 Change to the SSH2 Telnet installation root folder This is the folder where the SSH2 Telnet server was installed 5 Run the Remote Registration Utility EXAMPLE REMOTE REGISTRATION VIA SSH2 TELNET At the command prompt enter gs_ rr D25EEAF8AF1692EBOF9ASDE28520FD8407F8632CC5D8 and press lt ENTER gt You will receive a Banner String followed by three dots The text wait is displayed while the serial number is being validated Upon completion the message Registration Successful will be displayed 266 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS J
309. ive Configuration Expanded UTS System Templates Expanded Specific System Template Expanded User per session object expanded Domains Expanded Grandfathered User Copy Grandfathered User Paste Grandfathered User after copy Local User Rename Local User After Rename Grandfathered User Delete Active Configuration Summaty View Property Page and Frame Relationship GSW UTS GUI Automatic Logon GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security Summary GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security Telnet Encryption GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security Connection Restriction GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security Connection Limits GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security FIPS Restrictions GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Failure Detection and Recovery GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Power Features Summary GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Power Features Printing GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Power Features Team Services GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Power Features Event Logging GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Summary GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Character Emulation GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Default Domain GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations NAWS Negotiate About Windows Size GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Color Remapping GSW UTS
310. ktop shortcut 7 How to disable the automatic launch of the TE2000 client a Either delete or rename the file Windows StartUp TE2000 1nk 8 BEEP Sound Complete beep operation 56 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Tips for PSION TEKLOGIX WORKABOUT Pro 7535 and 8525 devices Following ate a few Tips when installing the GSW SSH Telnet Client for the above devices running Windows CE NET Version 4 2 1 Persistence over a Cold Reset By default the GSW Telnet Client is installed to a persistent directory The directory is Flash Disk Georgia SoftWorks C753X e User Fonts Your fonts need to reside in two locations Windows Fonts And ALSO Flash Disk Georgia SoftWorks C753X 2 Use Standard Accelerators and Shortcuts for all CE NET 4 2 devices page 42 3 Startup Default Connection Settings e The file Flash Disk Georgia SoftWorks C753X default gswtc is loaded on startup if found e If the security level is user then the GSW SSH Telnet Client will attempt to connect 4 Additional Files The setup program will install the file Flash Disk StartUp reinst bat Please do not delete or modify this file as it is required for persistence and automatic startup of the client 5 Application Protection GSW Telnet supports the security settings available on the Psion Teklogix devices The settings are available via Start Security 57 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Tips for SYMBOL MC 9060G MC9090 dev
311. l Ver 1 27 00 0007 Logistics es m Product information Name csw_uTs Sessions Requested Version 8 05 Zone 8aYWx28p Product ID 3CF4AF6F7310DCA04777002FD223AE0057D4C2171346 Registration information Please enter your serial number in the window below and click on the Register button Expiration date Not set Free updates until Not set Parameter Register The registration information must be provided to Georgia SoftWorks to obtain the Serial Number Several methods ate available for your convenience a Go to http www georgiasoftworks com support ost open php to submit a ticket for Registration Complete necessary fields and attach the file you saved in the previous step Preferred method OR b Email the file to registration georgiasoftworks com c Print the information and Fax it to Georgia SoftWorks 706 265 1020 Once Georgia SoftWorks receives the information we can generate a Serial Number on demand and will send it to you You may close the registration program at this time 25 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 3 When the Serial Number is provided Run the Registration Program again by right clicking and Run as Administrator and enter the Serial Number The easiest method to get the serial number is to highlight the returned Serial Number and copy ctrl c Then position the mouse in the Serial Number field in the Registration Information box and paste ct r1
312. l operate Please use the steps in section above page 33 to determine the correct mobile client 40 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 Extended Features for Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 Devices In order to facilitate the varied commercial requirements GSW has provided extended features for the GSW Mobile Clients for Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 These additional features offer useful flexibility and efficiency for both the device user and the System Administrator The table below provides a brief description of the features The details on configuration and enabling the options follow _ Mobile Feature Name Brief Description 1 Stay Connected Automatically attempts to reconnect when a session becomes disconnected 2 Allow Suspend Power Saving Feature 3 Beep Sound Correct Operation of Beep Sound 4 Menu Accelerators Shortcuts Function keys provide quick access to common menu commands 5 Free Function Keys Function Keys F1 F12 are freed released from operating system control and are available for the application 6 Raster Font Selection Additional Raster fonts available 9x16 10x12 10x13 12x16 7 Simplified Chinese font GSW Mobile Clients support Simplified Chinese Font GB True Type 8 Select Configuration Several configurations are allowed This provides a quick way to select the desired configuration 9 Portable Session Configuration File format for Session Configu
313. lation This is used when using the unsupported Georgia SoftWorks modified CUTCU CUTE NCSA utilities for MSDOS For more details visit this web page GSW Other Utilities Used in conjunction with the file GS_Xchar txt for character translation See page 171 Use UTF 8 encoded characters All characters above and including 0x80 hex are encoded using the UTF 8 standard See page 238 Simplified Chinese GB2312 EUC Used when connecting using emulator configured to receive and send Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese BIGS Used when connecting using emulator configured to receive and send Traditional Chinese Table 37 Graphics option choices If you do not want to be prompted for the graphics mode each time you log on using a 3 patty client then you may set an environment variable on a per user basis using Logon Scripting The environment variable for the graphics mode is gwtn_graphics 23 Note Double line box characters will be converted to single line box characters GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The value for the environment variable will be the enumerated number associated with the graphics option when prompted For example in the screen shot below the graphic options are listed with enumerated values ranging from 0 to 8 10 0 05 PuTTY In UN wb lo Emulation DEC VI 22 WN re JI an Mw Figure 97 Select graphics option for 3rd party c
314. le Client Configuration Persistence The GSW Mobile Client configuration is saved as a cab file which is a compressed archive package definition format For each created Session Configuration there will be a corresponding CAB file For example if a session was saved with the name lukexp gswtc then a corresponding cab file with the name lukexp cab is automatically created Non session specific configuration data is stored in the CAB file c735x cab When these files are placed in the persistent CAB folder on your device the GSW mobile client configuration is restored upon reboot The persistent CAB folder location is device manufacturer and model specific Mobile Client Application Persistence The GSW Mobile Client application is available as a cab file which is a compressed archive package definition format The cab file location and name of the application is Location on your PC CAB File Name C Program Files Georgia SoftWorks Universal Telnet and SSH Client for Windows CE ARM4 WCEG 4 ARMV4_G CAB C Program Files Georgia SoftWorks Universal Telnet and SSH Client for Windows CE ARM4NWCEG 4LARMV4I G CAB C Program Files Georgia SoftWorks Universal Telnet and SSH Client for Windows CE X86 WCEG_X86 INTEL X86 _G CAB Table 12 GSW Mobile Client Application CAB File Location 49 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 When this file is placed in the persistent CAB folder on your device the GSW mobile client applica
315. lient For example to select star graphics character substitution you would enter set gwtn_graphics 0 in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example when setting the environment variable to select Pass PC Graphics characters without changes you would use the following syntax set gwtn_graphics 2 is correct set gwtn_graphics 2 is not correct 162 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Color or Monochrome Presentations Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Emulations Terminal Emulations see page 392 Or use legacy style below Many times programs are developed to work with monochrome monitors or terminals In this situation you can choose between a color and monochrome presentation After the graphics mode options are presented the color ot monochrome options are presented The prompt Do you want ANSI Colors Y N If you want a Color presentation choose Y If you want a Monochrome presentation choose N If you do not want to be prompted for the Color or Monochrome presentation each time you log on using a 3 party client then you may set an environment variable on a per user basis using Logon Scripting Page 205 The environment variable for the Color or Monochrome presentation is gwtn_color For example to select a color presentation you would enter set gwtn_color 1 in the Logon Script for a particular user And to select a monochrome p
316. lient Any No Restriction Operating System Any No Restriction The only requirement is that the printer be visible to the server In other words the printer at the client computer must be shared Of course the Virtual printer must be defined as described in the Virtual Printer section The logon script for user Smarts should have the following commands Edit the users logon script k_start bat and add the following commands net use lptl soloman GwtnPrinterSharel set GWTN LOCAL PRINT METHOD Open set GWITN LOCAL PRINT CMD1i print d SmartsComputer SmartsPrinter s NOTE The above commands must appear in the logon script It is not sufficient to set these at the command prompt or in another batch file When the accounting application prints to Iptl the output will appear on the printer in Ms Smart s office This same methodology can be used for as many users as you wish 225 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE OPEN PRINTING PRINT TO A NETWORK PRINTER In our building we have a two workgroups Each workgroup has their network printer in a common area Both workeroups have 25 users that SSH2 Telnet to the main server from UNIX workstations and run a database application We print reports on lpt2 How can we get the reports to be printed on the correct network printer for each workgroup This is an excellent case for the Open True Client Side Printing method using the r command REMOTE WORK GROUPS COMPANY S
317. ll users The key is TSHotKeyVK DWORD HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters TSHotKeyVK Default Value 0x58 e e Virtual Key Code Virtual Key Code Virtual Key Code Virtual Key Code VK_SPACE 0x20 VK_0 0x30 VK_A 0x41 VK_N 0x4E VK_PRIOR 0x21 VK_1 0x31 VK B 0x42 VK_O Ox4F VK_NEXT 0x22 VK_2 0x32 VK C 0x43 VK_P 0x50 VK_END 0x23 VK_3 0x33 VK_D 0x44 VK_Q Ox51 VK_HOME 0x24 VK 4 0x34 VK_E 0x45 VK_ R 0x52 VK_LEFT 0x25 VK_5 0x35 VK_F 0x46 VK_S 0x53 VK_UP 0x26 VK_6 0x36 VK_G 0x47 VK T 0x54 VK RIGHT 0x27 VK 7 0x37 VK_H 0x48 VK U 0x55 VK_DOWN 0x28 VK 8 0x38 VK_I 0x49 VK V 0x56 VK_ 0x39 VK_J Ox4A VK_W 0x57 VK_K 0x4B VK X 0x58 VK_L 0x4C VK Y 0x59 VK_M Ox4D VK_Z Ox5SA Table 31 Virtual Key Codes 138 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS VK_NUMPADO 0x60 VK_F1 0x70 VK_NUMPAD1 0x61 VK_F2 0x71 VK_NUMPAD2 0x62 VK F3 0x72 VK_NUMPAD3 0x63 VK F4 0x73 VK_NUMPAD4 0x64 VK_F5 0x74 VK_NUMPAD5 0x65 VK_F6 0x75 VK_NUMPAD6 0x66 VK_F7 0x76 VK_NUMPAD7 0x67 VK_F8 0x77 VK_NUMPAD8 0x68 VK_F9 0x78 VK_NUMPAD9 0x69 VK_F1O 0x79 VK_ MULTIPLY Ox6A VK F11 0x7A VK_ADD 0x6B VK_F12 0x7B 0x6C VK_F13 0x7C VK_SUBTRACT 0x6D VK_F14 0x7D VK_DECIMAL 0x6E VK_F15 Ox7E VK_DIVIDE Ox6F VK_F16 0x7F VK_F17 0x80 VK_F18 0x81 VK_F19 0x82
318. logon via SSH2 Telnet If you continue to have trouble please see the technical support page 406 section of this User s Guide to expedite resolution of the issue 284 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 I am the Administrator but gs_admin exe says I do not have permission to run Session Administrator To use the GSW Session Administrator a user must belong to the local group Gwin Monitors The system administrator must first create the group Gwin Monitors Next all users allowed to use the Session Administrator must be added to the group Windows does not instantaneously update the group membership after the user manager is closed Windows will update the group memberships if you logoff logon the desktop In the event that this does not work you may have to restart the Windows server after creating the group and adding users I want to set the background color on the client Window and make it distinct from the standard MSDOS Windows You need to use the COLOR Command in a logon script Here is the syntax COLOR attr Sets the default console foreground and background colors attr Specifies color attribute of console output Color attributes are specified by TWO hex digits the first corresponds to the background the second the foreground Each digit can be any of the following values 0 Black 8 Gray 1 Blue 9 Light Blue 2 Green A Light Green 3 Aqua B Light Aqua 4 Red C Light Red 5 Purple D Light Purple
319. ls UTS System Templates 2 s User per session C Restrict Access to SSH clients both FIPS 140 2 Compliant clients and non FIPS 140 2 compliant Allow all clients to connect Telnet SSH FIPS 140 2 Compliant clients and non FIPS 140 2 compliant Figure 183 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security FIPS Restrictions The FIPS 140 2 Restrictions screen provides configuration for access control of FIPS clients RESTRICT ACCESS TO GSW FIPS 140 2 CLIENTS This feature allows connections only from the Georgia SoftWorks FIPS 140 2 SSH Clients This is a high level of security that the system administrator can configure Many times the system administrator will insist that END to END FIPS 140 2 compliance is the only allowable option The variables GSW_FIPSOnly EnableRFC854Clients AllowTelnetWithSSH and LenOnLoopbackOnly are registry key values Used in conjunction with specific values these Registry keys enable or disable the ability to restrict connection only by GSW FIPS 140 2 compliant clients The keys are HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters AllowTelnetWithSSH HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters EnableRFC854Clients HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters GSW_FIPSOnly HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_
320. m or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent posiible under law Figure 5 GSW UTS x64 Initial Setup Dialog If you are installing the GSW UTS 32 bit edition then the text x64 will be omitted in the dialog above 11 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 2 The Installation options screen is displayed The choices are Full Install or Install Chent Only software For Windows systems that you want to install clients to connect select Full Install using the Radio Buttons The Full Install installs the Server Software and the Client software Click Continue gusesenscoccsonenccnacesa C Install client software only Continue Exit Help Figure 6 GSW UTS Setup Installation Options Dialog 3 A screen is displayed indicating the directory that the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server will be installed The default is C gs_uts You may change the installation directory at this time Note If you install on a drive other than the system drive and have NTES on the installation drive then you must make sure that the system has full permissions to get to the installation directory and subdirectories Click Continue The setup program will copy Georgia Softworks Universal Terminal Server UTS files into the following directory No files will be installed in the system directories Path IMEI ibe 4 new program group will also be added to the P
321. mer information Product information Name Name GSw_UTS Sessions Requested Company Version 8 05 Zone 8aYWx28p StreetAddress1 Product ID SA 3CF4AF6F7310DCA04777002FD223AE0057D4C217 1346 City State ip Registration information Country Please enter your serial number in the window below and click on the Register button Phone Fax Purchased From Expiration date Not set Application software Free updates until Not set Parameter Savetofile Print HwKey Close Register Figure 22 Registration Initial Screen 24 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Please complete the Customer Information the Purchased From and the Sessions Requested fields in the Registration Screen Enter the name of the software that will be your primary application to use with Telnet SSH in the Application software field Examples could be HighJump SAP QAD Catalyst System Administration etc Customer information Name John Doe Company ACME Computer Warehouse StreetAddress1 123 Main st StreetAddress2 City Atlanta State GA Zip 30534 Country USA Phone 706 265 1018 Fax 706 2651020 SS Purchased From GeorgiaSoftWorks Application software SAP Savetofile Print HwKey Close Figure 23 Registration Customer Information Entry Save the file using the Save to file button r GSW Registration Too
322. n Y Security Failure Detection Recovery Power Features E Emulations Bell Control Protocols london_master as User per session Figure 167 Specific System Template Expanded Click to collapse Right Click Operation Add Add Create Default Contain Property Domain User Configuration Pages Y Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New cua II IIS LS Template Copy The UTS System Template can be copied and pasted to a UTS System Template or Active Configuration Paste A copied UTS System Template or Active Configuration can be pasted over the UTS System Template All contents of the System Template are replaced Rename Change the name of a UTS System Template Delete Remove the UTS System Template 334 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Export The UTS System Template can be exported to XML format file This is useful for backing up the UTS System Template configuration or deployment to additional servers Import The UTS System Template can be imported from a saved XML file This is useful for restoring the UTS System Template configuration or for deploying additional servers 335 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 User per session User Per Session configurations are configurations that can apply to a session The logon script is the fundamental requirement for a User per session configura
323. n Options Configuration Editor Auto menus Path prompt Key bar Full screen Mini status cLock Save setup HPUNI NST Then the monitor screen would look as follows PRINTERS rtprocs 3286 iewers Figure 103 Session Monitor Monitor Session Options Configuration Editor Auto menus Path prompt Key bar Full screen Mini status cLock Save setup HPUNINST Shift F9 In Shift F TM In Ox Ox Yes the screen displays look exactly the same and that is the way it is supposed to work The Monitor s screen displays the screen activity exactly as it appears on the session being monitored 181 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Shadowing SSH Telnet Sessions Shadowing is similar to Monitoring except interactive input is allowed This means that you can provide input to another SSH2 Telnet session This is a powerful training and Quality Assurance tool A user may need assistance in using their application and you can shadow their SSH2 Telnet session providing input where they have difficulty To select a SSH2 Telnet session to Shadow first highlight the desired session This is accomplished either by moving the up down arrow keys or clicking on the particular session Once selected click the menu item Session see Figure 101 to display the menu drop down items You may now select Shadow As a shortcut you may simply press S london 9 16 16 A Conn 69 16 18 LG 6 Conn
324. n It is recommended to move Grandfathered User configurations to either a Domain User or Local User configuration location Example Move the Grandfathered configuration to a Local User Right click Grandfathered User Right Click on Local Users and select paste After pasting the result will show Copy 1 configuration tom and select copy of tom 34 Grandfathered Users 1 ER gt aa oa oer de Local Users 2 User Copy 3d en ee Del 42 default config TA Ae pra H Bil s an g Copy 1 of tom Copy 0 of Ba O Icon JP IP Address Range 1 a7 gt di Grandfathered Users 1 E y Fg tom C2 e Figure 170 Grandfathered User Copy User Templates 1 Figure 171 Grandfathered User Paste H A Copy 1 of Bill Figure 172 Grandfathered User after copy Right click on Copy 1 of tom and Type in the new name tom Don t forget to delete the Grandfathered select Rename User Tom 2 de Local Users 2 amp Local Users 2 de Local Users 2 g default config 2 dl default contig AN i 42 default config 2d Bii 1 i a 2d Copy 1 of tom SIP IP Address Range Copy a Bill DIP IP Address Range 1 a Grandfathered User Paste G a tom 3 Grandfathered Users 1 User Templates Dto TI r Copy 0 of 6a m h los r r op Export Figure 174 Local User After Rename Delete import h Rename _ I
325. n therefore saving important data that may otherwise be lost A A A A A A A A A A A A Bon te Cancel Apply Help J a Figure 184 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Failure Detection and Recovery The Failure Detection Recovery screen provides configuration of the e Server Side Inactivity Timeout See page 148 e Server Side Heartbeat Timer See page 150 363 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Power Features Summary JANUARY 27 2015 E UTS Configuration 8 Power Features E Global per system 42 Active Configuration Security Y Failure Detection Recovery Team Services Power Features Summary View Automatic Logon t Power Features Transfer Printing Team Services Swap Event Logging Emulations Bell Control Protocols H UTS System Templates 2 Share Recover Log Files Max Session Activity Log Size Max Event Log Size s User per session Figure 185 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Power Features Summary The Power Features Summaty View provides a quick view of the e Team Services configuration See page 112 e Log Files configuration e Max Session Activity Log File Size See page 202 e Event Log File Size 201 and allows viewing of the relevant system printer configuration e Virtual Printers See page 214 and allows viewing of the relevant text files e Event Log File See
326. n about the client e Client MAC Address e Client IP Address e Client Answerback Text e Client IP Logon Scripting e User Logon Scripting Using one or more of the mechanisms listed above usually provides the capability to refine the client identity to the granularity needed Client Media Access Control MAC Address This is a hardware address that uniquely identifies each client device in a network The only way to change the MAC address is to swap out or replace client hardware The client MAC Address of the client is available on the server within the session through the environment variable gwtn_client_mac page 320 Client IP Address A unique IP Address is defined for each device on a network In many cases the System Administrator can change the IP Address with Network Management Software Regardless the IP address of the client is available on the server within the session through the environment variable gwtn_client_ ip page 320 Client Answerback Text The GSW Desktop and Mobile Clients Pocket PC 2002 3 Windows CE NET V4 2 provide the capability to pass a text string to the server The Desktop clients use a command line parameter and the GSW mobile clients provide a configuration field on the client for defining the Answerback text page 83 The Answerback text is available on the server within the session through the environment variable gwtn_answerback page 320 Client IP Logon Scripting This is a powerful feature
327. n on the server via SSH2 Telnet prefix the applications command line with gs gui exe EXAMPLE LAUNCH NOTEPAD ON THE SERVER VIA SSH2 TELNET At the command prompt enter gs gui notepad exe Notepad will display on the server desktop 263 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Reboot Windows Server computer command line utility The System Administrator may need to reboot a Windows system remotely The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server provides a command line utility that reboots a Windows computer Command GS_Rbt Description Reboot a Windows computer The computer will reboot about 40 seconds after the command is executed GUI users will receive a notification Syntax Gs_Rbt Computer Arguments There is 1 optional argument computer name the name of the computer to reboot If the computer name is omitted then the Windows computer that the command is executed will reboot Notes Administrative privileges are required to run this command Warnings The system administrator must be sure that they want to reboot as all user sessions will be disconnected EXAMPLE UTILITIES REBOOT WINDOWS Reboot the computer soloman Gs_Rbt soloman You will then be prompted with You have requested to shutdown soloman If you continue all applications with unsaved data will be forcibly closed in 40 seconds Do you really want to continue Yes No You must type either Yes or No and press lt enter gt Y or N is not v
328. n override syntax is different depending if you are connecting via Telnet or SSH TELNET When connecting via Telnet the syntax is the domain name followed by the backslash followed by the username domainname username SSH When connecting via SSH the syntax is the username followed by the AT sign followed by the domain name username domainname 271 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Setting the Telnet Port or Multiple Ports The default port for telnet is port 23 and NO configuration is required unless you want to change or add telnet ports Note These features ate available for the Telnet Server only Use an Altemative Telnet Port To use a different telnet port other than the default for the GSW Telnet Server you need to create an entry like gstnet 5oDDo7 ECD in the Services file on the server and restart the GSW Telnet Server Replace the 55555 with another port number if necessary You will have to explicitly specify the alternate port number when starting the connection from 3rd party clients and the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client page 73 On Windows the services file is located in the directory lt Windows Root gt system32 drivers etc The file is named Services Configure Multiple Telnet Ports The capability exists to configure up to 100 ports for the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server to listen on Use the etc services file to configure port names gstnet1 through gstnet100 The following example will
329. na zarar dokunroz Greek Mropm va pao oracuevoa yuad o ywpig va mabe tinmota Russian A wory eTh ecrekso OTO Nie te Dpenrar Armenian YpGul unpih newb Lb h h ufhufighuiun spiky dobah g Mu ys Hindi A d Arabie zl zli p 47 3 Jl 3 M Hebrew NJ 317 7N TT ZR T y sh NT pat Sov o ey NTT Oe PED NS Vietnamese T i ed th an thay tinh mb kh ng hai J Farsi Z Persian es meee xe VS le A sien he gt Thais a ul unszan ls aaa mila ud vu Chinese f amp gt Japanese Korean LK C APROGRA 1 SAPpe sappui SAPCONM i gt E Terminal Screen Locus Local TELNET 35 25 80x25 Figure 127 3rd Party Client UTF 8 Encoding Display 242 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Telnet IP Protocol Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Protocols see page 377 Or use legacy style below The Telnet IP protocol version can be selected to either use Pv4 IPv6 or both This Telnet IP Protocol is defined using a registry key value The key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters Protocol gt Possible values are ipv4 ipv6 or both ipv4 Use IP version 4 ipv6 Use IP version 6 both Use both IP version 4 and IP version 6 default The default value is both This is how to change the registry key for the Telnet Protocol Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks Windows SSH2 Telnet Server is installed However
330. ndon 69 716 11 16 6 6 238 rec 69 716 12 127 6 6 1 london 69 16 12 10 0 0 238 ship 69716 12 10 0 0 238 rec 69 716 13 16 6 0 6 doug 69 716 14 47 16 6 6 5 ship 69716 14 48 16 6 6 238 Conn Georgia SoftWorks Session Administrator Ver 8 i 45 Userts gt Figure 107 Session Monitor Terminate another session verification prompt 184 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Attach to a Suspended Saved Session As a member of the group GWIN MONITORS you may need to know if there are any Suspended sessions Suspended Sessions are created when the Session Saver see page 144 feature is enabled and a client or link has failed and the user has not yet reconnected to their Saved session Using the Aach feature of the Session Administrator tool you can Afach or connect to a Suspended session and complete their work in progress The Attach actually terminates your current session and transfers control to you You are now operating within the Suspended Session The Suspended session state changes back to Conn and will no longer be suspended NOTE For the Attach to work you must be invoking the Session Administrator from a SSH2 Telnet session To select a SSH2 Telnet session to Attach first highlight the desired Suspended session This is accomplished either by moving the up down arrow keys or clicking on the particular session Once selected open the Session drop down and select the menu item At ach Note Attach will not be avail
331. net clients and GSW Telnet Clients The Georgia SoftWorks SSH Server operates with 3 Party SSH compliant clients and GSW SSH Clients GSW Telnet Client Operating System Platforms Desktop Clients The Georgia SoftWorks Desktop SSH2 Telnet Client operates on Windows 95 98 ME Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 8 2008 2008 R2 2012 R2 and Windows operating System Versions 3 Desktop Client Device Including but not limited to e MobileDemand xTablet T7000 Windows 7 Oo Mobile Clients Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Clients for Windows CE are available for e Pocket PC 2002 class devices e Pocket PC 2003 class devices e Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 e Windows Mobile 5 Georgia SoftWorks SSH Clients for Windows CE are available for e Many Windows CE Version 4 2 5 6 class devices Including but not limited to e Datalogic Elf Falcon X3 e Honeywell LXE MX3X LXE Thor Dolphin 6500 e Intermec CK30 Janam XG100 Psion Teklogix 7535 Psion Teklogix 8525 Omni XT10 Motorola MC9190 Symbol MC 9060G PSC Falcon 4410 e Many Windows Mobile versions class devices 54 Unicode is not supported 403 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 Including but not limited to e Bluebird Pideon BIP 6000 e Intermec CK71 e Honeywell Dolphin 9950 e Pocket PC 2003 class devices Please see the GSW SSH User s Guide for FIPS 140 2 client requirements Java Clients Applets Georgia SoftWorks Java Client and the Georgia SoftWorks Java apple
332. nfo Version 1 1 GSWTelnetServerVersion 6 31 0010 CreationTime 09 26 03 16 18 42 Counters UserCount 2 Users User0 test1 09 26 03 16 18 22 3800 0 192 168 0 6 Conn Userl luke 09 26 03 16 18 31 2312 0 192 168 0 6 Conn 197 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Session Monitoring Uses There are many uses for session monitoring A few are listed e Quality Assurance A supervisor can monitor data entry of employees e Training A senior application user can remotely help a trainee understand and use an application e Debugging A developer can remotely observe an application phenomenon that a user is describing e Administrative A system administrator can ensure that users ate using setting up resources properly e Security Administrator monitor users that are using SSH2 Telnet e Terminating Sessions that have been abandoned e Terminating Sessions that are connected to applications which are behaving abnormally etc e Attaching to Suspended Sessions e Shadowing another Session 198 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Event Logging The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows provides the System Administrator with useful SSH2 Telnet Server Activity information that can be used for generating reports The System Administrator can enable or disable various events that are logged The logged information is in an easy to import ASCII comma delimited format Two files are of interest 1 The log definiti
333. ng Global or Per User page 203 gwtn_encrypt_session Activates Data Stream Encryption for the session Global or Per User page 88 gwtn_ff_in_passthrough Enables Disables the trailing form feed in pass through printing page 228 gwtn_graphics Sets the graphics mode for 3 party clients page 161 gwtn_home_ dir Selects the home directory that the User will be deposited into upon connection page 286 gwtn_job_control Specifies to automatically terminate all child processes when a session ends page 156 gwtn_log_char_xlat Log International character translation of UTS 8 GB2312 and Big5 page 204 gwtn_local_print_poll_interval Specifies the poll interval with which the gs_agent polls the GwtnPrinterx print queues Values range from 1 to 10 seconds where the default is 5 seconds page 288 gwtn_local_print_cmdx Indicates the printing command index used by the Open Print Method page 223 gwtn_local_print_method Indicated the True Client Side Printing method chosen page 213 gwtn_pp_print_buffer_size Specifies the print data buffer size for passthrough printing page 229 gwtn_reconnect Enable Session Saver page 144 gwtn_reconnect_timeout Specifies how long a session will exist in minutes before Graceful Termination will initiate when it is enabled page 145 gwtn_show_console_title Displays application title on the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client Window page 81
334. ng environment variables For example set gwtn_tcpwindowsize 5000 is correct set gwtn_tcpwindowsize 5000 is not correct To use the default value dependent on the network type remove the environment variable from you logon script TCP Maximum Retransmission Count Command gs_tcp Description Command line Utility that sets the TCP Retransmission Count This utility provisions the maximum retransmission count for TCP session data This specifies the number of times TCP will retransmit an individual data segment not connection request segments before aborting the 233 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 connection The default value is 5 We suggest that the value be increased to 8 when sessions are frequently disconnected because of timeouts Syntax gs tcp new count 0 Arguments The number of retransmissions TCP will retransmit an individual data segment not connection request segments before aborting the connection If no argument is provided then the current value is displayed Note Administrative privileges are required to run this command Warnings The system must be rebooted for the change to take effect Note To restore the system default usually set to 5 invoke the utility with the TCP Retransmission Count value equal to 0 EXAMPLE PROVISION TCP MAXIMUM RETRANSMISSION COUNT Provision the TCP Retransmission Count to 8 At the command line enter Gs tep 8 Create User Profile Use the GSW GUI Configura
335. nnected to the laptop and be the default printer for that system It is recommended that the printer driver for the default printer be set to Generic Text When the salesman prints to lpt3 the output will appear on the default printer connected to the salesman s client computer This same methodology is used for either a single or multiple sales people If the client needs to support more than one printer at a time please read the section on Multiple Client Side Printers Carefully 218 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE ENHANCED PRINTING MULTIPLE CLIENT SIDE PRINTERS Setting remote Physician s office They have a dot matrix printer that is used for insurance forms and a laser printer for formal letters The medical software application exists at the main office on a Windows server and they are using SSH2 Telnet to access the application Here an office manager in a physician s office needs to be able to access two different printers from his client machine The Medical application is using LPT 1 to print the forms and LPT2 for the formal letters The main office configured the server machine to have two virtual printers One is named GwtnPrinterl and the other is named GwtnPrinter2 As required by the virtual printer specifications See page 214 Remote Clinic Locations Physicians Main Office Workstation Name MedStation LAN WAN or INTERNET FormalPrinter or DIALUP Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client rat
336. not have a specific Domain User configuration or specific Domain Name default configuration 338 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 DOMAIN NAME Specific Domain Represents ALL users in the specific domains de Represents ALL users in the specific domain with a default configuration defined This is the root of the User per session All Domains configuration object Foldet UTS Installation Folder scripts DomainUsers Domain Name Click to expand to see the specific Domain Name Users and the specific Domain Name default configuration if it exists Click to collapse Right Click Operation Paste Rename Delete Add User and Create Default Configuration Add Add Create Default Contain Property Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Doma User Configuration Pages al SI E Y Vi Y Specific Domain Add User Add a User to the UTS Domain Name Per session configuration This creates a folder with the name specified for the User Paste Paste a copied User User name or Template to this specific Domain Name This creates a folder Rename Delete with the name specified for the User Rename a Domain Name Note If you rename a Domain Name then all associated Domain Users that are connected will get an error This is because the path to the folder is changed and the running logon script will try to path to the original
337. nsfer Transfer files between the Server and Client via telnet e Session Saver Reconnect to session after Link Failure and automatically resume work in progress e Auto Logon RF Terminals and Telnet SSH clients can quickly connect with minimal prompting e Session Shadowing Interactive Input to other Telnet SSH sessions e Execute Commands on the Client from within the Telnet SSH Session e DOSBoss MS DOS Application Performance Booster e 128 BIT Strong Complete Data Stream Encryption Telnet e AES256 Super Strong Encryption SSH e Complete Data Stream Encryption e Session Monitor Observe screen activity of other Telnet SSH sessions e True Client Side Printing Multiple Printers per session Open Print Method No client or OS restrictions e Working JAVA Client Applet e MOUSE Support e Incredible performance algorithms never thought to be possible with Windows Telnet SSH e Failure Detection and Recovery Methods Graceful Termination of DOS Applications and Win32 Console Applications Complete Session Cleanup Complete NTVDM Cleanup Server Side Inactivity Timer Server Side Heartbeat Client Side Heartbeat e Special Bell Processing e Expired Password Handling e Perfect PC emulation where all keys and key combinations are handled e Color to Monochrome mapping provided Very useful for RF Terminals GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Georgia SoftWorks takes Telnet SSH for Windows NT XP VISTA 2000 2003 7 8
338. nt E GSW Client ACC xfer Transfer ACC swap Swap Acc share ACE xfer Transfer ACC swap Swap Acc share Share Recover Info Cancel Share Recover Info Cancel F10 Cancel Ey osw cient e EK A E 7 osw Client EX LA a New View Tools Session amp Aces Vie lada Sesion a Figure 77 Enters Team Services Figure 78 Accept Share Mode F5 Figure 79 Enters Team Services aaa NET GEERT a AERA aaa ae Ctrl x Note session id is s5 Ctrl x amp presses F6 Fe ant Share session id S5 Tom takes the wireless mobile device and connects creating a temporary session Tom enters Team Services on his wireless mobile device and presses F6 to initiate the Share task Figure 79 The list of sessions in 124 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Accept Share mode is shown Figure 80 Tom sees s5 is listed by the number 2 He presses 2 to join session s5 Tom s mobile device is now connected to the same session as the truck mount device The result is shown in Figure 81 SESSIONS CONNECTIONS DEVICES PERSON Team Services SHARE Figure 81 After Team Service SHARE Undo Share Tom s original temporary session is maintained and he can return to it by undoing the share by pressing control x from the wireless mobile device s The truck mount device continues in its session This is shown in Figure 82 SESSIONS CONNECTIONS DEVICES PERSON Team Services SHARE
339. nt for Windows SSH2 Telnet Servers NTVDM s are Windows Virtual DOS Machines For Windows to run DOS programs Windows creates a Windows VDM that provides a DOS environment for the DOS program to reside When are NTVDM s created When DOS applications are executed a NTVDM is created A normal SSH2 Telnet scenario is to connect to a Windows system and run a DOS application Windows will create a NTVDM This is all fine and normal What are Orphaned NTVDM s Normally during a SSH2 Telnet session running a DOS application upon completion of the application the user will exit the application properly In this situation the NTVDM is properly terminated However problems occur when a SSH2 Telnet session running a DOS application abnormally terminates The SSH2 Telnet session will normally terminate however the NTVDM will not terminate This leaves what is called an orphaned NTVDM Some term this rouge or phantom NTVDMs or processes Why is this a concern These orphaned NTVDM s ate a serious problem to the Windows System They will start consuming all the processing resources of the Windows system that results in the severe degradation of all other processes on the system This is not just a slight slowing down of the system but a slowing down to the point of the system being useless by most users standards The most common way to clear the NIVDM is to reboot the Windows system However if you are skilled you can kill the orphaned processes
340. nting Enhanced Printing Enhanced printing is an advanced feature of the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet desktop clients that allows printers accessible to the user s client computer to be used when printing with SSH2 Telnet The Client computers default printer is used if no SSH2 Telnet client command line parameters ate specified The SSH2 Telnet user can override the default printer using command line arguments when initiating the client Also multiple printers can be utilized by configuring additional client side printers as described below Open Printing The Open printing method allows the SSH2 Telnet user to specify the printing command that SSH2 Telnet will use when processing print jobs For example if the user wants to send output to a shared printer then the print d command can be configured Another example is sending output to a printer with an IP address that is on the network but is not shared or visible to the server In this case the SSH2 Telnet user would specify the lpr printing command Other valid print commands can be configured as the user s requirements dictate Please be knowledgeable with the printing commands you select Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool True Client Side Printing Global see page 365 User see page 395 Or use legacy style below 29 A shared printer is one that is visible by the server P y 213 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Setting up True Client Side Printing There are up to three steps
341. nts support Vangard Voice Systems Inc AccuSpeech Mobile on Windows and are enabled by GSW Client configuration UTS and GSW clients version 8 04 or higher is required for Vangard Voice AccuSpeech support Configuration of the GSW UTS clients to enable operation with Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile is described on page 294 30 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Desktop Clients Installation Steps This is how you install the client software Installation of the Client software is simple Run the setup exe program From Windows 7 8 VISTA 2008 R2 2012 R2 or Windows NT XP VISTA 2000 2003 or Windows 95 98 perform the following Run the setup exe program 1 The Welcome screen of the setup program is displayed and you are reminded and urged to exit all Windows programs before continuing The setup program recognizes if it is a Windows system and prompts you for either a Full Install or a Client only install If this is a Windows system then select Client Only using the Radio Buttons If this is a Windows 95 98 system then you ate prompted for installation of the Georgia SoftWorks Windows Client Click Continue 2 A screen is displayed indicating the directory that the Georgia SoftWorks Windows UTS Client will be installed The default is C gs_uts You may change the installation directory at this time Click Continue 4 The Setup Succeeded is displayed 5 A Program Group is created It contains two shortcuts the Georgia Soft
342. o 69 716 10 54 17688 chicago 69 716 10 54 29784 mexico 69 16 16 54 5816 mexico 69 716 11 44 9246 17 5 a Conn rec B9 16 13 18 5932 Conn china 09 16 16 46 4446 B Conn pec 69 716 11 66 16168 16 B Conn pec 69 716 16 54 16664 0 Conn china 69 716 10 54 24268 B B Conn Georgia SoftWorks Session Administrator Ver 8 61 45 User lt s Figure 114 Send a message to a specific user Send Message dropdown Upon selecting Send Message you will see a screen similar to the figure below allowing entry of the message text Note that the User Name doug of the user that will receive the broadcast message is identified in the prompt GS SSH Client 10 0 0 5 Please type your message for lt doug gt below then press ENTER Figure 115 Enter broadcast message prompt destined to a specific user Enter the text that you would like to send to user doug and press enter when the message is complete 190 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 tm GS SSH Client 10 0 0 5 Please type your message for lt doug gt below then press ENTER Doug can you help the new hire Steve He is at the loading dock and is havin g some problems scanning incoming parts Thanks Larry Figure 116 Entering the broadcast message text to a single user At this point you have an opportunity to abort or confirm the sending of the broadcast message GS SSH Client 10 0 0 5 Please type your message for lt doug gt below then press ENTE
343. o If your device type is ARMv4 then use gsce_4g exe o If your device type is X86 then use gscex8 6g exe o Ifyou do not know the device type then First Trythegsce 4ig exe client if that does not work then Next Use the gsce_ 4g exe client if that does not work then Last Use the gscex8 6g exe client GSW Mobile Client Installation Programs GSW mobile clients are located in a subfolder on the CD or where the download was unzipped with one of the following names GSW Universal Mobile Clients Operating System Device GSW Client Setup Program location name Type Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 ARMv4 clients gsce_4g exe ARMv4i clients gsce 4ig exe X86 clients gscex86g exe PPC 2002 ARMv4 clients ppc2002c exe PPC 2003 and ARMv4 clients ppc2003c exe TT Windows Mobile 2003 WM5 WM6 clients ppc2003c exe Note ARMv4 includes clients ppc2003c exe ARMv4 ARMv5 ARMv 7 etc clients ppc2003c exe Table 3 GSW Mobile Client Setup Program Locations 33 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Enhanced Mobile Clients for Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 Devices Operating System Device GSW Client Setup Program location name Type Windows CE NET 4 2 5 6 ARMv4 clients gsce 4 exe ARMv4i clients gsce 4i exe ARMv4i clients gsceck30 exe X86 clients gsce_x86 exe NOTE See the table page 36 for Enhanced Mobile Clients to determine if your device
344. obal per system 5 User per session EE Figure 162 UTS Configuration Tool Root Figure 163 Root Expanded When expanded the configuration objects for Global and User per session are displayed as show in Figure 163 UTS Configuration Tool Root ie GSW GUI Root Georgia SoftWorks UTS Configuration Tool root This is the GSW UTS Configuration Tool root Click to expand to see the Global per system and User per session objects Click to collapse Right Click Operation None Property Pages None 330 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Global per system Global Global per system UTS Configuration Settings Configuration Root This is the root of the Global per system UTS configuration object Click to expand to see the Active Configuration and the UTS System Templates objects as shown in Figure 164 S amp UTS Configuration 5 0 Global per system His Active Configuration UTS System Templates 1 E as User per session Figure 164 Global per system expanded Click to collapse Right Click Operation None Property Pages None 331 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 ACTIVE CONFIGURATION E i This icon represents the Active System Configuration for the UTS Expand to see ER configurations property pages for the Active Configuration oba Configuration This
345. oding with 3rd party telnet SSH client Figure 124 Unicode GSW Client Command Prompt Window Properties Figure 125 Unicode GSW Client Select Font Figure 126 Unicode GSW Client with Unicode Screen Shot Figure 127 3rd Party Client UTF 8 Encoding Display Figure 128 File Transfer GS_Put Progress Status Figure 129 File Transfer GS_Put Transfer Complete Figure 130 File Transfer GS_Put Silent Mode xv GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure St 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 KR RR RRR RA AS EO 4 50 DJz 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 6 me 6 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 TD Global per system Active Configuration Summary View 77 78 19 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 76 SO Initial Configuration Screen 62 63 File Transfer GS_Put
346. ole PPC 2002 3 Configuration Save Changes Continued on next page 305 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 7 Use SAP Below is an example of the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client for Pocket PC 2003 Windows Mobile class devices Notice that the function keys are available as well as proper placement of the text and fields fg csw_tc A Whse Pint SLoc Inventor Document Recount Yersion CF3 Bck ri ra rs r4 Fs re F7 re raptor es 1 27314 Figure 155 SAP GSW SSH2 Telnet Client for PPC 2003 Function Keys 8 Quit SAP application 306 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 9 The GSW Pocket PC 2002 Windows Mobile SSH2 Telnet Client will prompt you to save your connection settings so you will not need to reenter them for the next connection See picture on the right above 10 Click the Yes button 11 You will be prompted to select the file name Connection info gswtc v tp Jtabalwje r t yfJufilo pjc 1 CaPla s a f ojh jlk 115 shift x c v bjn m 7 cef tl FV tee Figure 157 SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Select Configuration Prompt Figure 156 SAPConsole PPC 2002 3 Configuration File Name Prompt 12 Next time you use the GSW Pocket PC 2002 Windows Mobile SSH2 Telnet Client you will be presented with the screen like the figure on the right above 13 Simply click on the connection info file and you will get connected 307 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015
347. ole title Y in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example set gwtn_show_console title Y is correct set gwtn_show_console title Y isnot correct 81 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Desktop Client Display X in Top Right Corner Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool See Client Control page 391 Or use legacy style below You may not want the x close button to display in the top right title bar of the Georgia SoftWorks Desktop Client If the x is pressed in the top right corner then the connection between the client and server is abnormally closed The session may get suspended if the system is configured to do so The administrator may require a specific method for the user to exit the application and thus may want to eliminate the x close button as an option for the user The x is displayed enabled by default To disable you should set the gwtn_clnt_no_x environment variable in your logon script Learn more about logon scripts on page 205 The environment variable for disabling the display of the x in the Georgia SoftWorks Desktop Client window title bar is gwtn_clnt_no_x Possible values are Y or N ot y or n Y Disable the display of the x in the title bar in the Georgia SoftWorks Desktop Client window Title N Enable the display of the x in the title bar in the Georgia SoftWorks Desktop
348. omatically creates a new System Template configuration Fig 1 Paste on the UTS System Template amp UTS System Templates 1 Overwrite a System Template Configurationby ew or nta copying a configuration and then pasting on the dl User Copy ession Template Configuration Pasto Fig 3 Overwrite Template Configuration by pasting cua i __ Figure 198 Global System Templates UTS System allow you to create and store variations of your active configuration for fast and easy access NOTE Text files used for configuration are not available in Templates If you want to ensure configuration text files are associated with a specific template then you should manually backup the text file s with a corresponding name 378 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 UTS SS a cl Individual UTS Configuration atlanta_master Global per system 4 42 Active Configuration UTS System Template Summary View UTS System Templates 2 r Automatic Logon p Protocols gt a Logon Edit gs _autob Automatic Logon for GSW clients UTS Protocols Allowed Telnet x Ps Telnet IP Version Support IPv4 and IPv6 Open Edit gs_logon b Automatic Logon for 3rd Party clients AENA A SSH IP Version Support IPv4 and IPv6 ower Features l 4 4 Emulations a Y Bell Control poe Maximum Sessions Allowed to Connect limited istration info i icti All
349. on Administrator Shadow feature page 182 but developed for Team Members This feature has several applications One is to allow a single user to work with two devices in the same session Another application is when one team member needs to help another team member Share can also be used for quality control purposes You may have ideas for your own environment In the diagram below we have two devices and one person Tom Tom s device is a truck mount device He is the only one working in the warehouse today and a so wants to have a wireless mobile device to scan items his truck mount device cannot reach Tom needs all his work be in a single session and he does not want to log on and off each time he uses each device Tom can use the TS Share feature and have two devices connected to a single session With each scan he can use the most convenient device SESSIONS CONNECTIONS DEVICES PERSON Team Services SHARE an amr O B eeeaeeeee CONNECTION Figure 76 Before Team Service SHARE Tom obtains the wireless mobile device He is already connected with his truck mount device Tom wants to allow his truck mount device session to be shared From the truck mount device he enters Team Services Figure 77 and then initiates the task Accept Share by pressing F5 The truck mount device display shows his session id is s5 and waiting for a partner Figure 78 Tom s Truck Mount Device Wireless Mobile Device GSW Clie
350. on file gsw_ldef txt and 2 The actual log file gsw_elog txt Event Log Definition File The configuration file gsw_1ldef txt specifies the events that are maintained in the log file This file resides in the SSH2 Telnet server installation directory Usually this is c gs_uts Each event that can be logged is listed together with its description The format of this file is Event ID lt space gt Group ID lt space gt Description of the event The character is the comment symbol Insert a FF character in column 1 of a line to disable the logging of a specific event Enabling or Disabling the logging of specific events are the only allowed modifications to this file The Default configuration for gsw_ldef txt is 1 100 Session Created 2 100 Session Suspended 3 100 Session Reconnected 4 100 Session Exited Normally 5 100 Session Exited Abnormally 6 7 8 9 1 100 Logon Failed 200 Print Job Redirected 400 File transferred put 400 Print File transferred get 0 500 Command execution event sent to client If you do not want to log Print Jobs and Failed Logons you would insert the as the first character of those events 100 Session Created 100 Session Suspended 100 Session Reconnected 100 Session Exited Normally 100 Session Exited Abnormally 100 Logon Failed 200 Print Job Redirected 400 File transferred put 400 Print File transferred get 10 500 Command execution event sent to client NOTE The
351. on roadcast User Name Logon Time Process ID IP Address State TeamS4 chicago 69 711 41612 10 0 0 194 Conn mexico london chicago chicago chicago london chicago chicago london chicago chicago london rec rec rec rec mexico london mexico london mexico london chicago mexico london chicago mexico london chicago mexico london chicago mexico london chicago mexico london chicago mexico london 180 0 0 6 chicago 16 6 6 194 Georgia SoftWorks Session Administrator Ver 8 61 2481 Userts gt Figure 56 Extraordinary High Session Count Actual Screen Shot The above is a screen shot of gs_admin when GSW Engineering performed burst connection testing with the GSW UTS x64 This is where hundreds of connections ate initiated rapidly over and over taxing the system until several thousand connections ate maintained Even though this test goes beyond what is considered real wotld it provides information as to the benefits of a 64 bit system as well as the glimpse of the extensive testing 110 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 performed to ensure the GSW UTS meets and exceeds the demands of commercial environments At this point in testing GSW UTS x64 the screen shot was taken from GS_Admin with over 2400 connections This particular test was performed on a modest 2 GHz dual processor Xeon with 6 GB RAM running Windows 2008 Server We have observed over 2400 sessions on a modest 2 GHz dual processor Xeon with 2 GB R
352. on the device Mark itas Read Only Now you should be able to cold boot the device and the client should automatically launch with the correct configuration 53 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Tips for Intermec CK30 CK31 JANUARY 27 2015 Following ate a few Tips when installing the GSW SSH Telnet Client for the above device running Windows CE NET Version 4 2 1 Menu Accelerators Shortcuts As of this writing the Intermec CK30 CK31 does not provide mouse stylus capability via a touch screen In order to provide a more convenient method of configuration the following accelerator keys are available They are available for all Mobile Clients for Windows CE NET 4 2 but are especially useful for the Intermec CK30 CK31 F2 Save Session Settings F5 File Session Configurations F6 Session Connect F7 Session Settings F8 File Exit 2 Persistence over a Cold Reset After initial installation please complete these step configuration changes Once the connection settings are configured and tested s as well as anytime the you can ensure that these settings will still exist after a Cold Reset of the Intermec CK30 CK31 This is done by saving the file system and registry to flash memory This is accomplished by performing the following steps System Main Menu Configuration Util ity File Backup Backup the File System and System Main Menu Configuration Utility Save to Flash 3 Startup
353. onfiguration JP IP Address Range 2 for fast and easy access You may have different configurations based on shifts departments teams di Grandfathered Users 4 locations etc User Templates 5 User Templates allow you to copy paste delete rename import and export configurations so they E default_copy are available when needed amp forklifts User Templates can be used for all user configurations amp inventory a Domain User receiving 2 shipping a Local User Default User Note Users Domains Domain Names Local Users can all have Default User configurations IP IP Address based User E 2 5 E m Co Be You can edit configuration values in UTS User Templates exactly as you do with User Configurations Quickly create a UTS User Template by copying a User Configuration and paste it on the UTS User Templates Be sure to rename the template appropriately Overwrite a User Template configuration by pasting a user configuration on the specific user template configuration 7 Icon Meaning This icon represents User Templates Expand to see configurations for each specific user template la This icon represents a specific User Template The template name is displayed to the right of the icon and the template configuration is available by expanding the object Cancel Apply Help Figure 220 GUI Tool User Templates The User Templates View and Speci
354. onfiguration depto un Enable Telnet Encryption on the UTS Security Enable or Disable the ability to activate Telnet Encryption If it is disabled then all telnet session encryption settings are ignored pe ERES TACTO When enabled the GSW Clients must use the encryption parameter a to activate encryption from the client The default value is FIPS RR DISABLED allowing all GSW Telnet clients to connect Tale DeterinnRecawesy Note This setting does not control the 3 party client s ability to H Power Features connect Emulati oe Note This is relevant only for Telnet By the nature of SSH2 all i Bell Control 7 gt eo connections are encrypted UTS System Templates 2 s User per session Only Allow Connections from GSW Encrypted Clients This feature allows connections only from the encrypted Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client This is another level of security that the system administrator can configure Many times the system administrator wants to ensure that ALL connections to the GSW I Only GSW Encrypted Telnet Clients UTS are encrypted Note This feature is only relevant for Telnet By the nature of SSH2 all connections are encrypted Open Telnet Encryption for viewing editing In certain situations it may be desirable to have encryption enabled or disabled based on the IP Address of the connecting telnet Ea Open gs_ipenc td file session Complete Encryption both Logon and Data Stre
355. operation with the GSW UTS as well as specialized SAPConsole features that include mobile printing Session Monitoring and a streamlined interface with the GSW Rocket Terminal Engine Special Bell processing has been improved to provide to sound the bell even after Session Saver reconnects The GSW UTS is compatible with the GSW RF FormMaker RF FormMaker is an ActiveX object that provides Visual Basic programmers the ability to quickly develop forms for display on RF Devices used in Client Server 1 Visual Studio 2003 or Visual Studio 2005 is required for development 4 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 applications With RF FormMaker the programmer can create navigation structures labels input output fields and other useful controls necessary to provide an efficient high quality user interface The colors and attributes of Form and Controls are configurable allowing a quick way of producing themes GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Product Description The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server offers industrial quality Windows Telnet or SSH Services designed and built for the most demanding industrial and commercial applications The GSW Universal Terminal Server is the core software that provides the performance reliability consistency and powerful features required for demanding industrial and commercial applications The GSW UTS is highly optimized and modular in design to integrate with protocol interfaces allowing acces
356. or Windows works well with RF Wireless systems in particular hand held and vehicle mounted units By using SSH2 Telnet the RF Wireless Hand Held application developer is able to create more generalized applications that will easily work with a variety of manufactures hardware In addition to development and maintenance cost savings for application developers this added flexibility allows heterogeneous systems to exist allowing customers to utilize existing hardware Encryption is available with Telnet when using the GSW Telnet clients GSW provides clients for the PPC2002 2003 Windows Mobile and many CE 4 2 class devices see 32 Unmatched security with the strongest encryption is available when using the SSH server with ALL SSH clients Georgia SoftWorks is committed to providing the best SSH2 Telnet solution for the RF Wireless market Some tailored features include e Performance Fast Fast Fast e Logon Scripting to automatically launch your application upon connection See Page 205 e Session Saver After client or link failures reconnect to a Saved session and resume work in progress exactly where you left off See page 144 231 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 e Automatic Logon Quickly re establish the session by pre configuring the Host Domain User Id and Password When coupled with Session Saver you are back in operation with minimal time lost See page 171 e Environment variables to eliminate most prompting Se
357. orks SSH2 Telnet Client with the Georgia SoftWorks UTS Server When a Georgia SoftWorks Client connects to the GSW Universal Terminal Server the GSW UTS is able to determine the version of the GSW Client that is connecting If the version of the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client is different than the GSW UTS version the GSW UTS updates the remote client computer with the appropriate GSW Client for that version of the GSW UTS Server As new versions of the software are released occasionally matching versions of the GSW Client and UTS is required to take advantage of certain features Sometimes this required the System Administrator to either visit the remote site or via telephone walk remote users through instructions to install or update the GSW Client software Additionally System Administrators may be administering many GSW Universal Terminal Servers distributed throughout a large region Different versions of the GSW UTS may be installed at different sites Regardless of the version installed the Administrator will be able to automatically use the appropriate version of the GSW Client Note This feature requires the minimum GSW Telnet Server and Client version 6 26 Important Note to Customers of Versions Prior to 6 26 Previous versions of the GSW Telnet Client invoked the client executable directly from the shortcut Starting with Version 6 26 the short cut invokes the batch file GS_SClnt bat which launches the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client
358. orks Universal Terminal Server has pioneered and introduced another expected but missing feature in the Windows world Typically when a user password is expired connections are simply refused by Windows SSH2 Telnet servers This is not the case with the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server The user is prompted for the new password just as if they were logged on locally to the Windows Server Integrated with Windows Security The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server for Windows is integrated with Windows security adhering to the native security already existing on Windows 103 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Performance Pack The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server is the fastest SSH2 Telnet Server available for Windows The Georgia SoftWorks UTS is designed to work in the most demanding industrial and commercial applications This means that it must have reliable and consistent operation all of the time It does not matter if there is one connection or 100 connections It is dependable reliable consistent and robust Speed Pack Configurable Georgia SoftWorks 3 Party Client Client Fast Fast Fast Yes Yes Compression for slow speeds N A Yes No Slow Link Internet Support N A Yes Yes Proprietary performance algorithms N A Yes Yes Proprietary code optimizations N A Yes Yes DOSBOSS MS DOS application Yes Yes Yes performance booster Automatic Logon Yes Yes Yes page 171 GSW UTS x64 nati
359. ort and client side printing Additionally this is accomplished without any web server setup The client side parameters are passed from the command line or menu options at the client computer Required Java Support Java language 1 1 or higher Required Files for the GSJC The following files should be installed in a directory or folder Writer class Console class GetOpt class GS_Crypt class GS_NullCrypt class GS_CryptixCrypt class GS_Print class GSJC 1 class GSJC 2 class GSJC dlgConnectCancelHandler class GSJC dlgConnectOKHandletr class GSJC mniConnectHandler class GSJC mniDisconnectHandler class GSJC mniExitHandler class GSJC mniUseEncryptionHandler class GSJC class Reader class SpChars class Telnet class Console 1 class buttons gif msdos gif Additionally a path must be set to give access to the JavaSoft Jre 1 2 bin directory or folder Invoking the GSJC For Example java GSJC utestl ptestl d c h209 86 40 83 Command lines parameters ate the same as with the standard Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client See page 73 Encryption Encryption requires the use of JRE 1 2 Java 2 and Cryptix libraries These are available from Cryptix which is an international volunteer effort to produce robust open source cryptographic software libraries 282 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Cryptix products are free both for commercial and non commercial use and are being used by developers all over the world
360. ote You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location The key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters ActivityLogFileLength 1 2 6 ES Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen Click RUN Type REGEDIT Click OK Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CutrrentControlSet services GS_Tnet Parameters ActivityLogFileLength Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify Enter the new value for the ActivityLogFileLength and click OK If users are already connected the UTS service should be restarted for the new value to properly take effect 201 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Session Logging Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Power Features Event Logging see page 367 Or use legacy style below The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows provides a session log file that is used by GSW Technical Support when troubleshooting is required The file is not intended to be used by customers and is formatted and uses special terms for engineering There are times when the maximum file size may need to be adjusted due to resource or troubleshooting reasons Modify the Session Log File Size This is how to change the registry key for the size of the Session Log File The size is specified in bytes and the
361. oth No overlap between IP Address ranges defined in the gs_logon txt and gs_auto txt is allowed For example the following entry in the file 63 80 112 70 rayr sharpbook Instructs the system that when a user connects from the IP Address 63 80 112 70 that the connection should be authenticated as rayr with the password set to sharpbook The character in the first column designates a comment line NOTE 1 The IP address must start in the first column IP Address Ranges and Wildcards are allowed NOTE2 For security reasons it is prudent to set the file gs_logon txt to allow only SYSTEM Read Access NO other accounts should be allowed to access this file NOTES The format of this file is the same as gs_auto txt the automatic logon configuration file used with the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet SSH clients Only the name of the file is different 108 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Automatic Logon Summary JANUARY 27 2015 Automatic Logon requires Server Side Configuration and Client Side Configuration for GSW Clients Server Side Configuration Automatic Logon Configuration File on Server GSW Client Third Party Client Edit specific Server File that contains Automatic Logon Information gs_auto txt gs_logon txt Table 20 Automatic Logon Configuration Files Client Side Configuration for Automatic Logon Client Side Configuration if exist oncel bat do del oncel bat
362. ow 3rd Party clients to connect T london_master FIPS Restrictions Curent parameter combination is not ted with si FIPS access control Telnet Encryption by IP Restrictions By IP Address connections by User ID connections by IP Address my CFalure Detection Recovery Server Side Inactivity Timeout Disabled Server Side Heartbeat Timer Enabled Time seconds 1 Time seconds 30 s User per session r Power Feature Team Services Transfer Enabled Share Enabled Left Justify Disabled Hot Key Virtual Key 0x58 Swap Enabled Recover Enabled Host Key Control Enabled uz Teams Disabled men Event Ese Bell Control Max Session Activity Log Size 1Mb Open View Event Log File Bell Control Max Event Log Size 1Mb Open Edit Event Definitions Bell X Bell Y Bell Character Bell Count Emulations Refresh character ctrl Edit Colormap bd Color Mapping for Monochrome 3rd Party clients Escape Delay 500ms At R Edit gs_color bt Color Re Mapping ALL clients Domain Name UNKNOWN Editgs_xcharbt Character Display Translation 3rd Party clients Disabled in Terminal Initialization for 3rd Party clients OK Cancel Apply Help Figure 199 Global System Template Individual Each Template is of the same format as the Active Configuration Please see t
363. ower Features Team Services Configuration Options y Domains 2 3 dp Local Users 3 Toan Services You can override the System Team Services default settings here amp default config Enable amp bill Logon Script Use System Default Windows Use System Default GSW Client Control Emulations Use System Default Y Legacy Use System Default 3 1 Power Features Printing o Team Services Enable 4 Event Logging too i Failure Detection Recovery Use System Default B pat H Hg tom H JP IP Address Range 2 Grandfathered Users 4 amp User Templates 5 Figure 215 GUI Tool Local Users Power Features Team Services The Power Features Team Services provides configuration of e Team Services Override Overview See page 132 e Override Transfer See page 134 e Override Swap See page 135 e Override Share See page 136 e Override Recover See page 133 e Override Left Justify See page 137 396 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Local User Power Features Event Logging 23 UTS Configuration Event Logging a Global per system 5 45 User per session amp User Configuration Q default config Power Features Event i fll Domains 2 3 Er Local Users 3 62 default config If enabled only system startup and tear down are logged Some 8 Logon Script runtime events are logge
364. p drives when terminating the session you may be unable to connect to them the next time you logon The cleanup bat file allows automatic un mapping of drives upon termination of the telnet session EXAMPLE TERMINATION SCRIPT CLEANUP BAT FILE UNMAPPING THE F NETWORK DRIVE The system administrator has setup user Adams logon script to map drive f as a network drive In user Adam s cleanup bat script the system administrator will un map the drive when the session is terminated Step 1 Create directory c gs_uts scripts Adam Step 2 Create batch file cleanup bat Step 3 Add the following line net use f d Step 4 Save file and exit This will un map the f drive after the session is terminated NOTE Please see the section on logon scripting to determine the location for the cleanup script files Page 205 155 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Termination of Child Processes Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Failure Detection Recovery see page 398 Or use legacy style below You have the capability to specify that all child processes started in the session will be terminated when the session ends Terminating child processes upon a session ending is the desired behavior However scenarios do exist where you want the session to terminate but you would like spawned child processes to continue In either case Graceful Termination is attempted first This feature is not available in Windows NT becau
365. page 200 e Event Definitions File See page 199 364 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 Power Features Printing GSW UTS Configur E UTS Configuration B Global per systema i Active Configuration i Automatic Logon t Security b i Failure Detection Recovery 4 Printing True Client Side Printing Overview There are up to three steps in setting up True Client Side Printing Defining Virtual Printer s on the Server This is the same for all printing methods Important 2015 8 Power Features o Team Services Event Logging Emulations He Bell Control Protocols note This is the only Global UTS Configuration requirement for True Client Side Printing Adding the Georgia SoftWorks printer redirection commands to a logon script This is specific to the printing method chosen This is done in the User per session Logon Scripting configuration Providing command line parameters when invoking the Georgia Soft Works SSH2 Telnet Client when using the Enhanced Printing method optional A Virtual Printer s is defined that redirects the output from your application The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server queries the Virtual Printer queue for new print jobs When a print job enters the Virtual Printer queue the originating user of the job is identified Once the user is known the associated printer is referenced and the print job is redirected to the proper printer UTS System Templates
366. page for systems with other browsers The page below may be needed for browsers which do not support cab files and jar files lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt META NAME GENERATOR Content Microsoft Visual Studio 6 0 gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt Insert HTML here gt lt applet code GSJC class name GSJC width 640 height 520 gt lt param name port value 23 gt lt param name user value testl gt lt param name password value testl gt lt param name domain value gt lt param name bkgColor value 008080 gt lt param name HBTime value 20 gt lt param name useEncryption value false gt lt applet gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt Applet size Applet uses size specified through the width and height parameters The telnet window uses Java s courier font of size which gives best fit for the applet dimensions specified Some experimentation may be necessary to get desired appearance 281 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Georgia SoftWorks Java Telnet Client Note This feature applies to the Telnet Server only The Georgia SoftWorks Java Telnet Client GSJC is a standalone application that allows telnet connectivity to the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server without a browser Using the Georgia SoftWorks Java Client provides many of the powerful features such as Complete Data Stream Encryption Mouse support DOS Character Mode Color Graphics excellent keyboard supp
367. parameter must not be used when the registry value is disabled The key is HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters EnableEncryption The default value is O That is disabled The value 1 enables the ability to use Encryption The value 0 disables the ability to use encryption This is how to change the registry key for Encryption Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet services GS_Tnet Parameters EnableEncryption 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value for the EnableEncryption and click OK The new EnableEncryption value will take effect for all new connections Proper Operating System DLL s Encryption requires specific operating system DIl s that are present on most systems to exist to run the telnet client and server These files come with Windows NT 4 0 XP VISTA 2000 2003 2008 W7 and ate included in Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 3 0 and above If you do not have these system files encryption will not operate If you have Windows 95 then you must have Windows 95 OSR2 OEM Service Release 2 or later or Windows 95 with IE 3 02 or later Windows 98 and ne
368. participate in a Team Service operation 2 The 2 team member puts their session in Accept Mode for the Team Service operation 3 Team member originator starts Team Service operation 4 Team member originator identifies 2 team member s session selects and completes operation The Recover Team Service operation general procedural flow is 1 Team member initiates the Team Service Recover option 2 Team member identifies the suspended session selects and completes operation Team Services state and status information is displayed in the Session Administrator This allows the administrator to know which devices are sharing waiting for Team Service Transfers Swaps Shares and etc Please view page 140 for more information on the Session Administrator and Team Services 12 In some cases a single Team Member serves both roles as the originating team member and the 29d team member 114 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enter Team Services Tasks by typing C x see page 116 for more details or the configured hot key The Team Services Tasks menu is show below f f GSW Client en Yx d Bk swap mode n shari ng mode Fi F F F F F F F Fi New Yiew Tools Session E Figure 57 Team Services Tasks Menu Each of the Team Service tasks is initiated by using a function key on the device Team Service tasks that require an Accept mode use a pair of function keys one for the Accept and the other for the Team S
369. pecified as a command line options You can modify the command line options by editing the file GS_SClnt bat Please see page 72 for the section in the User s Guide on Georgia SoftWorks Desktop Client Command line options Can I eliminate prompting for the Domain Yes For all 3 party clients a registry variable can be set that will contain the default domain for all connections This is described on page 270 When using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet client you may use command line options to set the default domain to eliminate prompting This is described on page 73 Can I connect from older systems with DOS or Windows 3 1 Yes however you must have a 16 bit client The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client is 32 bit and requires Windows 95 98 or Windows Several 16 bit clients can be found on the Internet Can I have the user deposited into a specific directory upon connection Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Login Script see page 389 Or use legacy style below Yes You may set the environment variable gwtn_home_dir in the logon script on either a global or per user basis set gwtn home dir d users tom Can I restrict user access to specific directories In order to restrict user s access to specific directories you must first make sure that all of your drives use NTFS Next use Windows Explorer File Properties Security Permissions to grant or deny access to specific drives directories ot files 286 G
370. plete 253 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE UTILITIES FILE TRANSFER SERVER TO CLIENT SILENT MODE gs put s f corba hints dealers docx c books dealers docx When the silent mode option is used the user will not see the progress or completed informative messages Below is an example a GS SSH Client gt NGS_UTS gt gs_put 7s f corba hints dealers docx c books dealers docx 2 GS_UTS gt Figure 130 File Transfer GS_Put Silent Mode Even though s silent mode option is used error messages will still be displayed to the user For example the destination file path was misspelled below and the error message is displayed to the user gs put s f corba hints dealers docx c nooks dealers docx r Gi GS SSH Client 192 168 1161 O we Sa 2 NGS_UTS gt gs_put s fiicorbaxhintsydealers docx c nooks dealers docx otification from client received lt Error creating file on the client machine lt No such file or directory gt gt SINGS_UTS gt Figure 131 File Transfer GS_Put Error Message Displayed 254 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE UTILITIES FILE TRANSFER SERVER TO CLIENT SILENT MODE ERRORS In some cases the administrator may want to suppress displaying error messages to the user This can be accomplished using the silent mode for errors e argument gs put s e f corba hints dealers docx c nooks dealers docx Using the previous ex
371. print poll interval x Where x specifies the poll interval in seconds with which the gs_agent polls the GwtnPrinterx print queues Values range from 1 to 10 seconds where the default is 5 seconds I am using FoxPro and my system is running out of memory Upon inspection of the Task Manager I can see that my NTVDMsS are consuming all available memory What should I do The solution for many customers is to limit the memory which FoxPro can use per instance This can be done via the config fp or config fpw file The memory may be limited using the MEMLIMIT command More information can be found by view Microsoft Knowledge Base article 123281 There is abundant information on this topic on the internet using search engines 288 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 One or more keys are not working properly under VT 220 Emulation Please Advise VT220 Terminal Emulators from different vendors may not have standard key mappings For each key that does not work please verify that the escape sequence programmed in your terminal emulator matches the table below Most of the emulators the program running on your RF device client PC or terminal provide the capability to edit the escape sequence sent when a specific key is pressed The table below shows the escape sequences that the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server expects to receive from the terminal running the VT220 emulation
372. printers Using SAPConsole and the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server printing to tethered printers from R 3 becomes possible Some important aspects of this solution include e No special software is required on the RF device Most RF emulation clients already support pass though printing e No special software is added to SAPConsole or R 3 e This solution only works with the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server e To utilize mobile printing a user must have the same username for R 3 andSSH2 Telnet e The SSH2 Telnet Server can support each user type mobile printing and non printing clients A different server is not required for RF users that do not require mobile printing e Mobile printers are seen by R 3 but ate not controlled by R 3 e g offline paper out etc e The SAP printing application SAPLPD is required and should be configured to run as a service on the SAPConsole machine e The capability to design labels and the R 3 business logic to print the labels are not part of this particular solution e All labels are created using sapscript or 3rd party software that integrates with sapscript 310 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 SAPConsole Mobile Printing Components RF Device RS 232 Printer 802 11 Windows SAP R 3 NT XP 2000 3 e SAPScript e SAPConsole R 3 Printing e GSW SSH Telnet Server Access Ethernet p
373. r example set gwtn_reconnect auto_ by user is correct set gwtn_reconnect auto by user is not cortect Reconnection based on IP Address and User ID Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Failure Detection Recovery see page 398 Or use legacy style below There may be times when you have permanent IP addresses and you only want users from machines at those locations to be able to reconnect to Suspended sessions for security or other reasons In this situation you may consider reconnection based on IP address AND User Id Let s look at an example User Jane is using a Medical Application from a secure location The medical application can only be used at this specific location for security reasons She is almost complete entering a new patient when a circuit breaker trips It would be nice if when the circuit breaker was reset she could login and automatically continue her work in progress This is possible with Session Reconnection based on IP Address and User ID The SSH2 Telnet server will determine if there are any Suspended sessions for user Jane from the IP address from which she is connecting If there are Suspended sessions for that user AND that IP address then the SSH2 Telnet server will automatically connect Jane to the existing Saved session The screen will be exactly in the same condition as it was Jane was last connected and she can continue her work in progress For example to enable this type of Session reconnection you
374. ration Power Features Printing The True Client Side Printing Overview briefly describes the steps to set up client side printing For a full description please see page 213 365 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Power Features Team Services JANUARY 27 2015 Set Team Services default values for ALL users Configurations Note These default values can be overridden For example you may want to have Team Services disabled except for certain users This could be accomplished by setting the default to disabled but for those certain users in their User Default Hot Key is ox58 x 3 UTS Configuration 14 Team Services Global per system 7 4s gt Active Configuration Team Services Status Automatic Logon H Security aie A Failure Detection Recovery Power Features Swap lv ze Printing o EE nm K con Event Logging Recover Vv H Emulations Bell Control Protocols Status E UTS System Templates 2 s User per session Left Justify r Hot Key Control lv Hot Key Vitual Key SB Enable Strict Teams E Figure 187 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Power Features Team Services C cows o The Team Services configuration screen provides configuration for the Team Services default values Note that default values can be overridden on a per user basis Team Services General Operation See
375. ration allows easy cloning of sessions 10 Last Active Session Memory After a restart the client returns to the last active session 11 No Scrollbars option Save Space on Screen Especially useful on devices with small screens Also supported on Pocket PC 2003 devices 12 Automatic Logon Automatically logon without Host Domain Username Password prompting 13 Keyboard Marcos Remap Function and Special Keys to send a sequence of characters 14 Configuration and Application Save Mobile Client Configuration Across Reboots Persistence e Allows for ease of configuration deployment to multiple devices Table 10 GSW Mobile CE NET 4 2 5 0 Client Extended Features Stay Connected Automatically attempts to reconnect as soon as a session is disconnected Operates as if the connect button was pressed Stay Connected is enabled by selecting the option Stay Connected Session Settings Session Stay connected To break out of the automatic connection loop press ctrl shift b Allow Suspend Power Saving Feature To facilitate the fastest possible operation the default GSW Mobile Client operation disables mechanisms that allow the device to suspend There may be scenarios that require the device to Suspend You can configure the GSW Mobile Client Software to allow the device to Suspend by setting the option Allow Suspend Session Settings Session Allow suspend 41 2015 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015
376. ration of whether a backspace is performed when a delete key is used is done with the gwtn backspace on delete environment variable in your logon script page 205 The default setting is N which means that the delete key does not perform a backspace action which is the standard delete key in Windows The environment variable for specifying if a backspace is performed on delete is gwtn_backspace_on_delete Possible values are Y or N ot y or n Y Perform a backspace on delete N Do not perform a backspace on delete default For example to perform a backspace on delete set gwtn_backspace on delete Y in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example set gwtn_backspace on delete Y is correct set gwtn_backsoace on delete Y is not correct 173 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Two Cells per Unicode Character For Third Party Clients Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Emulations see page 392 Or use legacy style below Characters that occupy two character cells in Microsoft Windows command prompt will also occupy two character cells in third party clients is enabled by default This setting is important when working with Far East versions of Microsoft Windows To enable disable you set the gwtn_two cells per_uc environment variable in your logon script page 205 The environment variable for specifying enabling disabling that
377. rding Mode T lt gt Select the Voice Mode amp Register Yangard Voice Registered lt E ay Vangard Voic Bal E E Figure 138 VVTools Done Click Close 294 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Mobile Client configuration for Vangard Voice AccuSpeech GSW UTS Mobile clients support Vangard Voice Systems Inc AccuSpeech Mobile on Windows CE and Windows Mobile Operating Systems Support is enabled by simple GSW Client configuration steps described below UTS and GSW Mobile clients version 8 04 or higher is required for Vangard Voice AccuSpeech support WINDOWS CE CONFIGURATION When using Windows CE you will navigate to the correct configuration screen enable Vangard Voice support and provide the path to the Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile XML file Step 1 Enable Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile support in the GSW mobile client for Windows CE On the Windows CE device open the GSW Mobile Client and using the dropdown select Session gt Settings GSW Mobile Client For Windows CE File View Session Help File View Session Help Connect F6 Disconnect Settings F7 y csw Client dl E E dy csw Client PEN E E Figure 139 Open GSW Mobile Client for Win CE Figure 140 Select Settings to enable Vangard Voice support Scroll right with arrows and you will see the Vangard Voice Tab Check enable Vangard Voice 295 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Mo
378. re 201 GUI Tool User Default Co tion Default configurations may be created for the objects listed in Table 54 You can quickly determine if a default configuration exists for an object by viewing if it has the black circle with a white check in the bottom right of the icon as shown below Create Default ICON Configuration If a session for a user domain or local is initiated and there no specific z as Y configuration for that user and there is not a default configuration for in the User per Specific Domain or All Domains for domain user or All Local Users for a session local user then use the User per session default configuration If a session for a domain user is initiated and there is not a specific 8 D Y configuration for that domain user and there is not a default configuration for All Domains that domain name then use the ALL Domains Default configuration j If session for a specific domain name is initiated and there is not a specific S a Y configuration for that domain user then use the Specific Domain Name Specific Default Configuration Domain If a local user session is initiated and there is not a specific configuration for 11 Y the user then use the All Local Users Default Configuration All Local Users Table 54 Objects that may have a Default Configuration 382 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 A default configuration is a user configuration It is configured in the same way as a
379. rea that separates the toys from the tools Georgia SoffWorks pioneered every feature listed on this page Some have been copied but none have been equaled The ability to operate in industrial and commercial environments was a design goal from the beginning not an afterthought Commercial applications require that remote link PC and Client failures be detected and handled as to not impact the other users of the system Failure Recovery Pack Configurable Georgia SoftWorks 3 Party Client Client Session Saver Yes Yes Yes Complete Session Cleanup Yes Yes Yes Complete NTVDM Cleanup Yes Yes Yes Server Side Inactivity Timer Yes Yes Yes Servet Side Heartbeat Yes Yes Yes Client Side Heartbeat Yes Yes No Graceful Termination of DOS Yes Yes Yes Applications Termination Scripts Yes Yes Yes Termination of Child Processes Yes Yes Yes Table 34 Failure Recovery Pack Session Saver Georgia SoftWorks has again pioneered another outstanding feature for Windows 7 8 NT XP VISTA 2000 2003 2008 R2 2012 R2 Servers This feature Saves the Telnet SSH Session in the event of a link or client failure and allows users to reconnect to the same session the next time they log in and resume the work in progress exactly where they left off Extremely useful when connectivity is across the Internet or with Radio Frequency Barcode Scanner applications where it is important to continue work in progress even after a connectivit
380. rent logon scripts based on the IP Address of the client logging on is another advanced feature pioneered by GSW System Administrators may have specific mapping requirements or specific applications that must be launched depending on the location of the User that is logging on In many cases it is easier to identify the location by IP addresses rather than User IDs Another case may be where a User is routinely working in different locations with specific logon script requirements for each location Another could be where different devices access different applications regardless of the user connected There are many other cases where IP Address based logon scripting can be used Associating the Logon Script to use with the IP Address is configured using the gs_ip rt txt file IP Addresses can be specified as individual IP address or IP address ranges Additionally wildcards can be used For each entry in the gs_ip rt txt file two fields are specified The IP Address or range and the name of the login script to use A file gs_ip rt txt is installed when the GSW UTS is installed It contains examples that are commented out to help you get started Notice the file in the GSW UTS installation directory gs_ip PE EXE The file must reside in the Georgia SoftWorks Windows Universal Terminal Server installation directory NOTE The System account must have permission to read the gs ip rt txt file 207 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The file gs
381. resentation you would enter set gwtn_color 0 in the Logon Script for a particular user Color Mapping for Monochrome Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Emulations see page 373 Or use legacy style below If the monochrome mode is selected the color mapping is performed as described below For each character on the screen If background intensity is set then the blink attribute is set If foreground intensity is set then the bold attribute is set If the character is blue then the underscore attribute is set If background intensity is greater than foreground intensity then the inverse attribute is set as follows 1 3 R 6 G 1B The intensity bit is not used in the above calculation The attributes are additive 163 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Modification of Color Mapping for Monochrome Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Emulations see page 373 Or use legacy style below Certain color combinations displayed by the application do not display in a satisfactory way when converted to monochrome This may be especially true when using monochrome RF devices The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server provides a mechanism to allow custom color mapping to monochrome displays The SSH2 Telnet Server upon startup reads the file colormap txt This file defines the color to monochrome mappings The text file contains 256 rows that represent all foreground and background color combinations and associated
382. rict users to a specific application Y Run TSRs and Set Environment Variables upon connection Disconnect network drives etc upon termination GUI Configuration Tool Use convenient graphical user interface for configuration and configuration management True Client Side Printing Printing the way you want it Print to the most convenient printers at the server at the client across the Internet and more Up to 9 printers per user Event Logging Import useful User activity information for reporting into your application High Performance Client that can be installed at as many locations as you choose at no extra cost Automatic Version Update of the GSW Clients Broadcast Messages can be sent to one or ALL Sessions xxi GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The Real Pioneers Often copied but never equaled Georgia SoftWorks The True Innovators when it comes to SSH Telnet for Windows Great ideas that Georgia SoftWorks has pioneered for the GSW UTS for Windows e IPv6 Support e Certificate Based Logon for SSH with GUI Mapping tool Many to one and one to one e Public Key to User Account Mapping with the GSW Mapping Tool e GSW Team Services Breakthrough Collaboration Technology for Telnet SSH e GSW UTS Mobile Clients Support Simplified Chinese with font GB e GSW Mobile SSH2 Telnet Clients for Pocket PC 2002 3 amp CE NET 4 2 5 0 class of devices e Automatic upgrade of GSW Clients from GSW UTS Server e File Tra
383. rinterShare2 GWIN LOCAL PRINT METHOD Enhanced NOTE The above commands must appear in the logon script It is not sufficient to set these at the command prompt or in another batch file On the MedStation workstation open a command shell and enter the command net ne use LPT1 use LPT2 meds meds ta tion InsurancePrinter persistent yes ta tion FormalPrinter persistent yes The persistent yes retains the LPT port mapping across reboots Initiate the Client session as gs_clnt exe rl InsurancePrinter r2 FormalPrinter H300 Note The name of the SSH client is gs_ssh exe 220 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE ENHANCED PRINTING OVERRIDE This is a variation of the previous examples Here the salesman has access to a color printer Our salesmen carry laptops running Windows 95 98 with portable printers and they SSH2 Telnet to the server either through the Internet or via RAS They need to get customer and shipping information printed The sales program that they use prints to lpt3 A salesman is at the customer s office and wants to get a color printout of a sales report The customer has a color printer handy They connect the color printer and install the proper driver It is not the default printer How can the salesman print to the non default color printer This is an excellent opportunity for the Georgia SoftWorks Enhanced True Client Printing Method with client overr
384. rks All Rights Reserved This file allows you to map client IP addresses to logon scripts The order of fields is as follows IP address OR IP address range OR IP address with wildcards k_ logon script name OR c_logon_script_ name The k_ and c_ correspond to behavior analogous to k_start bat and c_ start bat respectively Each entry must start in the first column For example the following entry below the comment character must be removed to activate the entry 63 80 112 70 k logon70 bat instructs the system that when a user connects from the IP address 63 80 112 70 he should use the logon script k logon70 bat IP address ranges An IP address range is specified as two IP addresses separated by the dash character Examples of IP address ranges 10 1 1 1 10 1 10 210 192 68 22 10 192 68 22 99 IP address with wildcards An IP address with wildcards is specified by using the star character instead of a number as one of four segments of an IP address or all four segments Examples of IP addresses with wildcards VO RA 192 222 fe80 5efe 192 168 1 S 2 fe80 230 48fe S6 Note For security reasons this file s permissions should be set to allow only SYSTEM read access No other accounts should be allowed to access this file 211 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Programmatic Access to the SSH Telnet Server Note Programming skills may be required to unders
385. rks Universal SE ae ee Terminal Server You may translate a single character pa sie y to one or more up to 10 other characters rotocols E UTS System Templates 2 s User per session Figure 194 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Character Translation The Emulations Character Translation screen allows viewing editing of the relevant text files e Character Translation See page 171 374 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Emulations Terminal Initialization UTS Configuration i Terminal Initialization a Global per system 3 12 Active Configuration Terminal Initialization 3 Party Clients Automatic Logon Security Failure Detection Recovery Terminal Initialization 3rd Party Clients Power Features You may have a special situation or advanced application where you need to send a specific terminal initialization sequence to a 3 party client Normally Emulations 2 a gt Pi ee o Open Edit as _tinit bx file in Notepad you do not need to get familiar with this section ra pais however the capability is present for advanced Defaul lomain juirements Negotiate Window Size es se Color Mappings This feature allows you to send an additional sequence Chasis a of characters to the 3 party client at the start of each ek ma on session You may send one or more up to 10 per row a hs
386. rogram Manager Back Exit Help Figure 7 GSW UTS Installation Path 4 A progress meter window is displayed indicating the installation progress 12 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Source File C Downloads gsw128_8 03 0011 RC6 GS_Exec exe Destination File C GS_UTS GS_Exec exe Figure 8 GSW UTS Installation Progress Meter 5 The Setup Succeeded screen is displayed The service has been installed and is automatically started a Setup Succeeded Be sure to send in the registration information for pour new software The service has been started You may use the Services applet in the Control Panel to start and stop this service Figure 9 GSW UTS Installation Setup Succeeded Please view the readme txt file as it may contain late breaking information about the telnet server that has not yet made it into the user guide Release notes ate also contained in the ReadMe file NOTE TCP IP must be installed and operational TCP IP comes as part of Windows 6 A Georgia SoftWorks UTS Program Group is created 13 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 g a a ba amp on OW de a Start Menu Programs Georgia SoftWorks UTS ll cory fork P F A A A AAA 2 lt Organize Include in library Share with Burn New folder bg sa Ns FI Certificate Mapping Tool for GSW SSH Shield RB GS SSH Client BB GS Telnet Client Installation Status 4 142 M tcut y A
387. rpret any control characters Lastly the serial port parameters must be configured to match the printer s settings Create sapscript form containing barcode label for mobile printer Create SAPScript form for label s Either manually or with BAR ONE for R 3 create sapscript form s that represent labels to be printed on mobile printers 315 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Determine or create R 3 printing logic This section varies and is left up to each individual organization At a basic level a SAPConsole transaction outputs data to a mobile printer defined in R 3 This can be accomplished with or without sapscript 316 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 SAPConsole and the GSW Rocket Terminal Engine Maximize your SAPConsole and GSW SSH2 Telnet Server performance while adding important features by obtaining the Georgia SoftWorks Rocket Terminal Engine What is the GSW Rocket Terminal Engine Answer The Rocket Terminal Engine is a HIGH Performance replacement for the SAPConsole VTIO Terminal Engine Why do I need a replacement Answer Performance Savings and Features Sounds like Sales Talk Answer The benefits are truly outstanding Performance Very Large number of sessions with expected performance Reduce the number of systems required for your application Enable Application where not possible before Savings Save the price of extra computer s hardware Save the price of extra computer s software Save
388. rs EnableRFC854Clients The default value is 1 That is enabled The value 1 enables the ability for connection from all telnet SSH clients The value 0 restricts connection to the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet SSH client This is how to change the registry key for 3 Party Client Restriction Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks Windows UTS is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 95 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet services GS_Tnet Parameters EnableRFC854Clients 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value for the EnableRFC854Clients and click OK The new value will take effect for all new connections Restrict access based the number of connections Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Set Max Sessions 359 Or use legacy style below This feature specifies the total number of connections allowed This is another level of security that the system administrator can configure Many times the system administrator may want to limit the total number of connections to be a smaller value than the number of connections purchased The variable MaxSessions isa registry key value This Registry key enables or disables the ability to restrict connection to
389. rs such as some RF Terminals The refresh character may be modified to suit your application This is modified through a registry key value This refresh character is a registry key value The key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters RefreshChar The default value is 0x12 thatis lt ctrl r gt This is how to change the registry key for the Refresh Character Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks Windows SSH2 Telnet Server is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet setvices GS_Tnet Parameters RefreshChart 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value for the RefreshChar and click OK The new RefreshChar will take effect for all new connections 237 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Unicode UTF 8 Encoding The Unicode Standard is a character coding system designed to support the processing and display of the written texts of many international languages around the world GSW offers UTF 8 encoding UCS Transformation Format for improved international character set support when using the GSW SSH2 Telnet Client and 3 Party SSH2 Telnet Clients Of course the 3 party SSH2 Telnet client must also support UTF 8 Encoding
390. rty Automatic Logon configuration text file No overlap between IP Address ranges defined in the gs_logon txt and gs_auto txt is allowed 106 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The order of the fields in the gs_auto txt file is as follows IP Address The IP addtess of the client Domain Specify the dot character if no domain is used User Name The User ID for the connection Password The Password Table 18 Automatic Logon Specifications gs_auto txt when using GSW Clients An IP address can be associated to Autol ogon with a Georgia SoftWorks OR a 3 Party Client but NOT both No overlap between IP Address ranges defined in the gs_auto txt andgs_ logon txt is allowed For example the following entry in the file 63 80 112 70 rayr sharpbook Instructs the system that when a user connects from the IP Address 63 80 112 70 that the connection should be authenticated as rayr with the password set to sharpbook The FP character in the first column designates a comment line NOTE The IP address must start in the first column IP Address Ranges and wildcards are allowed NOTE2 For security reasons it is prudent to set the file gs _auto txt to allow only SYSTEM Read Access NO other accounts should be allowed to access this file NOTE3 The format of this file is the same as gs_logon txt the automatic logon configuration file used with 3 party clients Only the name of the file is d
391. s As 64 bit computing rapidly progresses towards mainstream computing Georgia SoftWorks provides a 64 bit edition of the GSW UTS Telnet Server named the Georgia SoftWorks UTS x64 This edition is for 64 bit editions of Microsoft operating systems Windows 7 8 VISTA 2008 R2 2012 R2 and Windows XP 2000 2003 The GSW UTS x64 provides all the performance benefits and addressing capabilities expected when running on 64 bit platforms Additionally extraordinary high session counts can be attained with the GSW UTS when running on 64 bit platforms The GSW UTS 32 bit edition runs on 64 bit platforms as well as on 32 bit platforms When running a GSW UTS 32 bit version on a 64 bit platform significant performance benefits are also realized If the application that you are accessing via the UTS is a 64 bit application then use the UTS x64 When using the GSW Directed Terminal Input Output DTIO Engine it is recommended to use the same platform edition of the GSW DTIO and GSW UTS For example use the GSW DTIO x64 with the UTS x64 Both the GSW UTS and GSW UTS x64 editions are included on the CD when purchased Simply navigate to the corresponding folder to run the setup program If the software is a downloaded rather than a CD then be sure to download the desired edition The GSW UTS 32 bit edition installs trouble free on either platform The GSW UTS x64 will install only on a 64 bit platform If you accidentally try to install the GSW UTS x64 on a 32 b
392. s with remote clients The standard protocol interface for the GSW UTS is the Telnet Interface however an optional SSH interface GSW SSH Shield is available The SSH interface also has a Federal Information Processing Standards Publication FIPS 140 2 compliant option available for purchase When the GSW UTS is coupled with the GSW Telnet Interface software the resulting package is the GSW Telnet Server When the GSW UTS is coupled with the GSW SSH Interface software the resulting package is the GSW SSH Server The mechanism to couple the GSW SSH Interface is to obtain and install the GSW Telnet Server and then install the GSW SSH Shield The installation of the GSW SSH Shield disconnects the Telnet Interface and installs the SSH Interface software resulting in the GSW SSH Server The features described in the User s Guide apply to all interfaces offered unless specifically noted The GSW UTS and Client software is the fastest and most robust Telnet SSH Server for Windows on the market Full support for DOS Legacy applications including DOS character mode graphics function keys mouse and special characters allows you to work in a local mode when at a remote location The GSW UTS provides a level of robustness that is a cut above the competition Industrial quality orphaned session detection and elimination including NTVDM s and attempted graceful termination of DOS legacy applications upon link and client PC failures are features pioneered by th
393. s about Migrating to the UTS GUI Configuration oionionninninninnnincnnccnncnncrnnrrnnrrn iran 349 Logon Script Migrati n ini e RA EE EE REKE EEEE EEE REEE E AEE 350 Registry Setting Misr ation iii A A a ds dida 350 Environment Variable Migration onnnnnnnninninvnnnnninnninann noc 350 SORT PIS FODER S orsi a eie e ina en lal ss Sl ley wR aiaa Boa Suisse es 351 D mam US ETS gcse A a ta 351 Local Users POMP lates esse sees sce tances OI A E TAS AS A A dS ASHORE AR Ta Tea dls xi GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 MOGON lt 9 GR PP TES SB AT Cie ERTES de DS God dete care Agena tetie cate diay Selene seen ead tae te eee 352 REGISTRA SETTINGS as e barato ad a o ao 352 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES ahe nae aeoe a id 352 OT eT ST DBs Sarees a do Sees estes Dice tae Shes a e a a do 352 GLOBAL ACTIVE CONE LGURAT TON soo assis seta eh a E BESS A Se A ea ss 353 AULOMATIC LOS OW WS i cakes A ave ts Rae Daeg Whaat Tuc A A A eaten 355 SEU SUMIMNGLY EE E E E Sass E E E sabes Layee st eigen baa Cae ah ga ea cau cen ewe td R N EES 356 Security Telnet ENcry plone A At 357 Security Connection Restrictions rererere sre A EARE N TER ETE E EE EEE 358 Security Connection Limits A id 359 Security EIPS Restrictions siio iii E EEEE EEE E R EEE RE edad 360 Restrict Access to GSW FIPS 140 2 Clients scs
394. s can use one of the above clients Table 4 GSW Mobile Client Setup Program Locations continued 34 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Installation steps 1 Za 8 9 Install current version of the Georgia SoftWorks UTS Server Version 6 50 or higher Determine the location and name of the GSW Mobile Client Setup program for your device See page 33 Copy the appropriate setup executable to the computer which established partnership with your device Turn on your device Start the Mobile Device Center or Active Sync on the device and connect Run the self extracting executable on the computer selected in Step 3 Confirm the prompts asking to continue with the installation You should see the setup program launched on your device Press the OK button on the device to complete the installation Please review any Tips for your device in the Enhanced page 36 and Universal clients section page 37 35 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enhanced GSW Mobile Clients List GSW has Enhanced Mobile Clients for the following devices that take advantage of unique features on the listed devices Be sure to review the Tips section for each device Enhanced GSW Mobile Client Names for Windows CE NET V4 2 5 6 Devices Device Model Device Type GSW Client Intermec CK30 CK31 ARMv4i gsceck30 exe Tips for CK30 CK31 Devices on page 54 Intermec CV60 X86 gsce x86 e
395. s considered to be an escape key otherwise it is the start of an escape sequence The registry value is in 10ths of a second Default is sooms Many keyboards and terminal emulations do not support the Alt key The GSW UTS allows the Alt key sequence to be transmitted to an application by providing a substitute key sequence the Alt Prefix Default Alt Prefix is Ctrl b Figure 190 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Character Emulation Cancel Apply Help J The Character Emulation screen provides the configuration for Refresh Character See page 237 Escape Delay See page 167 AltPrefix See page 165 370 2 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Emulations Default Domain 14 Default Domain Global per system 5 48 Active Configuration De ault Domain gra Par Clients Automatic Logon Security Ye Failure Detection Recovery In some instances the system administrator may want to eliminate 4 Power Features the prompting for a domain when the user is connecting to the 24 Emulations SSH2 Telnet server i Character Emulation Domain Name UNKNOWN The domain can be configured with the Domain Name and Poets prompting is eliminated Negotiate Window Size This works for 3 party clients only Color Mappings Character Translation Terminal Initialization Y Bell Control fe Protocols op UTS
396. s not found for a specific Local User then the default configuration for ALL Local Users is used if it exists Otherwise the Grandfathered Users are checked for a matching configuration LOCAL USERS O Icon Meaning This icon represents ALL Local Users Expand to see configurations for each specific local user QB This icon represents the default configuration associated with the parent object In this case the defanlt eanfionration is far All local neers oK Cancel Apply Help a When expanded the Local Users Summary View provides the administrator with the number of Local Users that have a configuration defined the Local User names and if a default configuration exists for the Local Users object Expand each Local User to access their configuration property pages 387 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Local User Summary JANUARY 27 2015 S GSW UTS Configuration Ver 1 03 0015 5 UTS Configuration Global per system s User per session amp default config My Domains 2 3 amp Local Users 3 default config dy Bill 4 Logon Script Windows 4 GSW Client Control Emulations 8 Legacy Power Features Failure Detection Recovery a Pat a Tom JP IP Address Range 2 Grandfathered Users 0 User Templates 5 Figure 206
397. s printer cannot be used by any other service except Georgia SoftWorks Telnet SSH Server Configure each SAPConsole user for local printing 1 Add the following line to each login script k_start bat file for each user requiring mobile printing set GWTN_ LOCAL PRINT METHOD SAP Install and configure SAPLDP on SAPConsole machine 5 SAPLPD is installed automatically when SAPGUI is installed If it is not already on the SAPConsole machine it must be installed 6 Using instsrv exe and svrany exe utilities from Windows resource kit configure SAPLPD to run as a service Two steps are required to run saplpd as a service a The syntax for using these utilities is as follows instsrv saplpd exe c path srvany exe Note the instsrv exe and saplpd exe should be in the current directory 313 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 7 Adda registry key In registry key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services SAPLPD create a new sub key named Parameters In the Parameters key create a new entry name Application The value of this field is the part to the saplpd exe file e g c sappc saplpd exe saplpd Properties Local Computer 21x Log 0n Recovery Dependencies SAPLPD Front end Printing Interface Automatic start l Resume start parameters Apply Figure 159 SAPLPD service properties dialog window 314 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Configure mobile printers in R 3 If all
398. s to the shell The errorlevel variable is usually used in batch files in automated processing environments JANUARY 27 2015 Error ERROR VALUE DESCRIPTION Level 0 ERROR_SUCCESS Transfer Successful 1 ERROR SHARED MEMORY Transfer aborted Internal shared memory could not be accessed 2 ERROR USAGE Transfer aborted Command line invalid 3 ERROR _ TARGET FILE Transfer aborted Target file could not be accessed 4 ERROR_INFO_SLOT_ENV Transfer aborted Internal environment variable was not found 5 ERROR_INVALID INFO SLOT Transfer aborted Internal environment variable had invalid value 6 ERROR_SYNC_OBJECTS Internal report to GSW 7 ERROR_GET MUTEX Internal report to GSW 8 ERROR_ABANDONED Internal report to GSW 9 ERROR_SET_EVENT Internal report to GSW 10 ERROR_OS1 Internal report to GSW 11 ERROR_OS2 Internal report to GSW 12 ERROR_WAIT Internal report to GSW 13 ERROR_UNEXPECETED NOTIFICATION Transfer aborted Unexpected notification from the agent 14 ERROR_SET_CONTROL_HANDLER Transfer aborted The CTRL C handler could not be set 15 ERROR_INVALID_CLNT Transfer aborted The transfer software is not the GSW client 16 ERROR_GET_GSCLNT Transfer aborted Client software type cannot be determined 17 UNDEFINED 18 ERROR DISK FULL Transfer aborted Disk is full on client 19 ERROR_STDIO Transfer aborted Call to the stan
399. scccssiscitacsssassorechebes osivcsrespsectansstonsodondetovs cagvesti AEE E EA SAAE iS 360 Restrict Access to GSW SSH CHEN irder iinne errie reee anenee N SEAE NE EE AEAEE NEARE OEA 361 Restrict Access to SSH clients Adlow all clients to connect esenario ai EEEE EE E A AAAA E AA A ARa Failure Detection Recovery noo taia ee a aa os Pages EE e EA Ea O E a EEA a E az Power Features UMMIA A ENE AE E ees ah REEE REEE ta POWeF Features gt LME A A T A EE EE E EE ENE E A Power Features edim Services tintadas at ia EAEE oh Pad eb E EAEE EE 366 Power Features Event LOS Gin erriari oriei ea E cv edeazseniteandeseciye sees TERE ATRE A 367 Emul tions SUMMA A bata 368 EMUlatiORS Character Emula eii 370 Emulations Default Domain eision e EEA adi 371 Emulations Negotiate Windows Size cccccccsscsscssscesssseesesseeseceeseccesscesesseesecseesecaceeeceaeeseesecseseceeeeeeseeseeaeeaeeaeens 372 Emulations Colo Mappings A ei EAA daa Buck cod tat dea vd A A O dit 373 Emulations Character Translation ccccccccccssecsssscssenceseeseesecacseccucecceseeseesecacesecacencsaeecesecaeesecaeeeeeeaeeeseseeaeeasens 374 Emulations Terminal Initialization c ccecccccesccscssscssseseeesseeecsceecceeccesesseesecseeeenceescesesseesecsessecaeeeeeaeeeeeseesenaeens 375 pell CONUTOL A Beit eh tate ket etch ae tease Cette eae tethered teh eit te Sct ie at A foe tA cathe E 376 PL OO COIS fostet A E ites aie Mite e he ee e cota 377 UTS System Templates
400. se the necessary operating system infrastructure did not exist until Windows 2000 and later Windows XP VISTA 7 8 2000 2003 2008 R2 2012 The environment variable for controlling the termination of child processes for a session is gwtn_job_control For example to select automatic termination of all child processes you would enter set gwtn_job_control y in the Logon Script for a particular user And to disable automatic termination of all child processes started in the session you would enter set gwtn_job_control n in the Logon Script for a particular user The default setting is enabled 156 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Legacy Pack The Georgia SoftWorks UTS Server for Windows provides full support for DOS Legacy applications When you tun DOS legacy applications using the GSW UTS it is as if you ate running them locally We support DOS Character Mode Color graphics including the line and box characters With our client you can use the MOUSE just as you do locally This was another feature pioneered by Georgia SoftWorks The function keys and special characters also work and display as expected Legacy Pack Configurable Georgia gr Party SoftWorks Client Clients Mouse Yes Yes No DOS Character Mode Color Graphics N A Yes Yes Function Keys Yes Yes Yes Special Characters Yes Yes Yes Screen Sizes other than 25 x 80 Yes Yes Yes Alt key support for all emulations Yes Yes Yes Control C Config
401. ser Traditionally default printing using SSH2 Telnet is always local to the server This can be inconvenient to the user Georgia SoftWorks overcomes the traditional problem by providing True Chent Side Printing printing the way you want it Multiple up to 9 printers may be used on a per user basis Georgia SoftWorks offers several printing methods for the SSH2 Telnet user that will address most printing requirements They ate e Default Works as if the SSH2 Telnet user is sitting at the Windows server e Enhanced Printer output is sent to the printers accessible by the client computer when using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet client The printer is considered accessible if it is configured as one of your printers visible in the Printers Applet in the Control Panel e Open allows SSH2 Telnet user to configure the printing command used when printing e Passthrough allows print jobs to be redirected to RF Devices supporting escape sequence based printing e SAP Allows SAP print jobs to be redirected to RF Devices printer See page 310 for details Default Printing The Default Printing method uses standard server printing facilities When a SSH2 Telnet user prints the printer output destination is exactly the same as if the user is sitting at the server and initiated the print The destination may be local to the server or any remote printer that has been captured by the net use command No setup is required for Default pri
402. sesseeseesseeecnseescusesseesecseesecaseescesesseesecsessecaevecencesseeaecsesaecaeseeceaseseeaeeseeeeneeats 192 Exiting the Session Administrator once 194 GS_ADMIN Command Line Options cccccecsccesesseeseesseeecnseescesesseesecseesecseeecsseeseceesessesseesecseseecnaeeseeaecaeeaecneeeeenasets 195 Session AI ANN 198 GoW EVENT FLOGGING ee Sie Site SS A A A ai las 199 Event Log Definition Ele A RA MA ee EES 199 Event LOB PUG rests cco eae AA AA A AAA AA A A AA SAA 200 Modify the Los File Size EA ee 201 GSW SESSION LOGGING E EVERE A wl one eS a ela EE Oe A ae 202 Modify the Session Log File Size cccscsccscssssesssscsseesssecscescsseecesseescesecasesscueescesaecessesassecseesaesaecesaceasesesaeeeeceesers 202 Enable Disable Session Long Format LOG ging cccccccccscceseescesesseesesseesecuseescseeseeseeseesesessecssesenseeseeseeseenecneeeeenaeets 203 viii GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enable Disable International Character Transl
403. software This folder may vary from device to device so please see the tips section in this users guide for your specific device to determine its location Put another way Session Configurations are not displayed if they do not reside in the same folder that the GSW Mobile Client software resides You select the desired Session Configuration by using the associated function key F5 Display the Select Session Configuration by using the menu bar File Select Configuration Select Session E lukexp F2 default HOM 1 01 pm Figure 28 Mobile Client Select Session Portable Session Configuration A Real Time Saver The file format of the Session Configuration is such that it can be used to clone or duplicate the session configuration on other devices Session device settings are kept completely in files with no external references This provides a portable configuration file that can be used when setting up other devices This can be a significant time saver when 40 100 or more devices are being set up The configuration files have the gswtc extension The file has an ini format with Username Host etc See also the section on application persistence capabilities to view the usefulness of the GSW automatically created CAB files when deploying GSW Mobile Clients page 49 Last Active Session Memory After a restart the client returns to the last active session This works if default gswtc is not pr
404. ssions either depress lt ALT B gt or click the menu item Broadcast to display the drop down item Send You may now select Send EN Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe ili lew ession MBroadcast 49 716 49 16 10 0 0 10 0 0 18 8 ia SoftWorks Figure 108 Broadcast a message to all telnet sessions Note In the figure above even though a single session is highlighted the Broadcast message will go to ALL SSH2 Telnet sessions 186 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Upon selecting the menu item SEND you will see a screen similar to the figure below EN Session Administrator CAGS_UTS1GS_Admin exe Please type your broadcast message below then press ENTER Figure 109 Enter broadcast message prompt Enter the text up to a max of 320 chatacters that you would like to send to all active SSH2 Telnet sessions Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe Please type your broadcast message below then press ENTER System going down for maintenance at 8 66 pm Please log off by 7 45 pm or call me at 265 1618 for special request Thank You Administrator Figure 110 Enter text of broadcast message 187 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Press lt ENTER gt At this point you have an opportunity to abort or confirm the sending of the broadcast message EN Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe ena i l JLo Please type your broadcast message below then press ENTER
405. start bat for users in workgroup 1 need to have the following commands net Set set use 1pt2 soloman GwtnPrinterShare2 GWTN_LOCAL PRINT METHOD Open GWIN LOCAL PRINT CMDZ lpr S 192 32 200 200 P WkgGrpPtri s The logon script k_start bat for users in workgroup 2 need to have the following commands net Set set use 1pt2 soloman GwtnPrinterShare2 GWTN LOCAL PRINT METHOD Open GWTN LOCAL PRINT CMD2 lpr S 192 32 200 201 P WkgGrpPtr2 s NOTE The above commands must appear in the logon script It is not sufficient to set these at the command prompt or in another batch file When the database application prints to Ipt2 the output will appear on the correct network printer for each workgroup The logon script for each user in the Work Group will need to be modified to contain the same commands This same methodology can be used for as many users as you wish 227 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Passthrough Print Method Pass through printing is available for 3 Party Clients that support Pass through printing An example of a 3 Party SSH2 Telnet client that supports Pass through printing is AlphaCommunicator Most 3 party telnet clients for RF terminals also support Pass through printing making the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows the ONLY SSH2 Telnet server that can accommodate Pass through printing Note It is required that each user be logged in only once for th
406. stem Templates Expand to see all the individual All Global System Templates Templates This is the root for the UTS System Templates Click to expand to see the each system template defined In the example below Figure 166 there are two templates defined One named atlanta master and the other is London master amp UTS Configuration 0 42 Active Configuration z UTS System Templates 2 E atlanta_master london_master as User per session Figure 166 UTS System Templates Expanded Click to collapse Right Click Operation Contain Add Add Create Default o o pee o os Si ae All Global Templates Paste A copied UTS System Template or Active Configuration can be pasted creating a new UTS System Template Import A xml format file containing a Global per system configuration can be imported creating a new UTS System Template 333 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 UTS System Template 4 This icon represents a UTS System Template The template name is displayed to the Global right of the icon Template This is the root for a specific UTS System Template Click to expand to see the property pages for the UTS System Template as show in Figure 167 3 UTS Configuration 50 42 Active Configuration E UTS System Templates 2 E a atlanta_master Automatic Logo
407. t Telnet Only 2015 Please read the section on the GSW Telnet Java Client page 282 and the section on the GSW Telnet Java Client applet page 274 to see the requirements for correct operation 404 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW SSH2 Telnet Server System Requirements Memory GSW recommends 16 MB of RAM per session in order to utilize all the features offered in the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server If you ate using SAPConsole the recommendation is an additional 16 MB of RAM per session for a total 32 MB RAM per session It is recommended to use the Windows Task Manager to determine the SAPConsole memory requirements for your system Processor Processor requirements vary based on the primary or main application running on the host system In general the processor requirements for running the number of instances of the primary application will be sufficient for most customers However the type of application will ultimately determine the SSH2 Telnet processor requirements The usage patterns including the number of users who actively input text and the frequency of screen updates should be taken into consideration If minimal and exact sizing is required the best course of action is to download the Free trial copy of the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server and empirically determine the requirements using the actual application Disk Requirements At least 60 MB of Disk space are recommended for the program User s Guide and log files 405 GE
408. t 1 Add a line for each Team Members at the train station train station public trans rr train point 400 131 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Team Services Configuration and Security Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Team Services Global see page 366 Per User 396 Or use legacy style below In some environments it may not be appropriate for all users to have access to all GSW Team Services The system administrator may configure the default access settings for each individual Team Service operation using Registry parameters NOTE For new installations of the GSW UTS the Registry parameters enable all Team Services by default e For upgrades from a pre Team Services version pre v8 01 of the UTS Team Services is disabled by default for security reasons gt You must enable Team Services for operation The registry key location is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_ Tnet Parameters The parameters types and values are noted below Transfer TSEnableTransfer DWORD O disable 1 enable Swap TSEnableSwap DWORD O disable 1 enable Share TSEnableShare DWORD O disable 1 enable Recovery TSEnableRecovery DWORD O disable 1 enable A TSHotKeyCtrl DWORD O disable 1 enable Enter TS hot key TSHotKeyVK DWORD See Section on page 138 Left Justify TS Dialog Text TsLeftJustify DWORD O disable 1 enable Table
409. t Caption String The User has additional control over the caption text displayed in the client window when using the Georgia SoftWorks clients This helps identify specific sessions especially when multiple sessions are opened simultaneously The command line option xText specifies a text string that is displayed in the caption on the client window The text is appended to the caption after space as x Text For instance if the option xDavid was entered the title bar in the client window would be displayed as show below soloman is the hostname soloman x David Connected to server soloman Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server for Windows NT Version 5 17 0000 Registered copy 166 users enabled Please wait User 1 of 166 login Figure 47 Client Title Bar Caption 75 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Telnet and SSH Client command line options Usage Following is an example for specifying client command line parameters The GS SSH2 Telnet Client shortcut invokes the batch file GS_SClnt bat for Telnet or GS SSSH bat for SSH which in turn launches the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Client The GS_SClnt bat and GS_SSH bat files reside in the GS_UTS installation directory The contents of the batch files look as follows echo off start if exist oncel bat do call oncel bat if exist oncel bat do del oncel bat gs_clnt exe if errorlevel 2 goto copy exit COpy copy gs_clnt new gs clnt exe gt gsnull txt
410. t Server and you then want to SSH2 Telnet to another GSW SSH2 Telnet server you simply run the gs_clnt exe gs_ssh exe program at the DOS command line However if you want to SSH2 Telnet to a non Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet server you will need a 3 party DOS client that can be executed from the command line Very interesting opportunities exist with this capability For example a user may want secure access to their corporate network from remote locations such as a customer site or hotel They can connect to the GSW SSH Server from the remote site Once the secure connection has been established to the SSH server they can now telnet to a telnet server on the corporate network There are many possibilities mixing and matching this type of arrangement Remember that you can only use a Telnet client to connect to a Telnet Server and only use a SSH client to connect to a SSH Server I can t logon fromSSH2 Telnet what should I do The typical rule is that if you can log in locally to the Windows machine then you can logon from SSH2 Telnet Make sure that you can logon locally Users must have log on Locally access permissions From User Manager or User Manager for Domains choose the menu item Policies which is a drop down From the drop down choose User Rights A User Rights Policy dialog appears allowing you to add the Log on Locally Right for the group However if the local group Gw n Users exists you must be a member of this group to
411. t Swap Mode F3 Note the session id is s5 f GSW Client Acc xfer Transfer ACC swap Swap Acc share Share Recover Info Cancel New View Tools Session ra Figure 73 Enter Team Services Ctrl x amp press F4 F10 Cancel New View Tools Session E Figure 74 Selects 2 to Swap with s5 Doug enters Team Services on his truck mount device and presses F4 to initiate the Swap operation Figure 74 shows a list of sessions in Accept Swap mode Doug sees s5 is listed by the number 2 He presses 2 to complete the swap with session s5 Andy s session is moved to the truck mount device and Doug s session is on the mobile device and both can resume exactly where he left off Notice in the following diagram that Doug is now using the mobile device yet he is still using his original session Likewise Andy is now using the truck mount device and is still using his original session as well 122 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 SESSIONS CONNECTIONS DEVICES PERSON Team Services SWAP Figure 75 After Team Service SWAP If in Andy and Doug want their original devices back they can just perform a TS Swap again 123 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Share The Team Services Share operation allows two devices to share a single session Input from either device is sent to the session Output from the session is displayed on both devices This is similar to the Sessi
412. t column IP Address Ranges and wildcards are allowed Please see the file gs_ipenc txt for further details NOTE2 For security reasons it is prudent to set the file gs_ipenc txt to allow only SYSTEM Read Access NO other accounts should be allowed to access this file NOTE3 This feature is for power users that have a thorough understanding of the network and system security issues and topics 10 Located in the root installation folder of the GSW UTS Server 91 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Encryption SSH Server The GSW SSH Server offers very strong end to end encryption for all data This includes the authentication and data stream Please see the GSW SSH User s Guide for more information on the SSH Server encryption Encryption FIPS 140 2 A Federal Information Processing Standards Publication FIPS 140 2 compliant option is available and may be purchased for the GSW SSH Server This standard specifies the security requirements that will be satisfied by a cryptographic module utilized within a security system protecting sensitive or valuable data This option is available to Federal agencies including the US Military It may also be purchased by other organizations such as state governments educational and research institutions commercial businesses and other entities with the need or desire to comply with this security requirement for cryptographic modules standard Please see the GSW SSH User s Guide for more inform
413. t command line interpreter cmd exe often called the Command Prompt as the default shell You can override this behavior and specify a path to a custom shell executable For example you may want to use Windows Powershell as the default shell In this case you would enter the path such as C Windows system32 WindowsPowerShell v1 0 powershell exe For those migrating from cmd exe to another shell please remember that each shell has its own commands to interface with the operating system Commands used to make or change directories launch applications etc in the cmd exe shell will not work when using the PowerShell or another shell You will need to use new cmdlets or scripts that can be processed by your selected shell When you use a shell other than cmd exe the UTS logon script files k_start bat and Cc start bat are still used but only act as configuration place holders by the GSW UTS GUI All other entries are ignored Power users can also automatically launch an application instead of a shell with the Custom Shell Path such as SAPConsole QAD or HighJump by specifying the path to the executable 236 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Refresh Character Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Global Emulations Character Emulation see page 370 Or use legacy style below The Refresh Character will cause SSH2 Telnet to repaint the screen data This is useful in environments that may occasionally drop characte
414. t value is O Disabled The value 1 only allows encrypted session to connect The value 0 allows both encrypted and un encrypted sessions to connect to the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet client This value must be left set to 0 the default if running the GSW SSH Server Use of this feature overtides user settings in the logon script and force clients to use encrypted session data stream Please make sure the registry parameter EnableEncryption is set to 1 and that the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client uses the c command line option After you complete your settings you will notice the following a 3rd party clients will report disconnected session before the user even tries to type his logon name b GS clients which do not have c option will fail to connect This is how to change the registry key for connection by only Encrypted Sessions Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks Windows UTS is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CutrentControlSet services GS_Tnet Parameters RequiteEncryptedSession 102 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value for the RequireEncryptedSession and click OK Expired Password Handling The Georgia SoftW
415. tand the following section Developers may take advantage of the programmatic interface to the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Server for Windows Programmatic language independent access to the SSH2 Telnet Server allows developers to write an application that when run under the SSH2 Telnet Server environment takes control of its input and or output from to the client This can be utilized to create a custom or highly specialized communications application The SSH2 Telnet Server still maintains critical functionality such as logon security application launch and termination Normally the application before it terminates will release control to the SSH2 Telnet server The SSH2 Telnet Server communicates with the client through a WINSOCK socket A protocol mechanism is provided that allows a custom application to take and release control of the socket Objects involved in taking and releasing control of the socket are passed through environment variables as are described below e GWTN_HSOCKET This environment variable holds the value of the handle of the open socket Note Never close or otherwise destroy the socket e GWTN_GET_I This environment variable holds the name of the WIN32 event that when signaled notifies the SSH2 Telnet server that the custom application wants to ke control of the input from the client e GWIN_RLS_l This environment variable holds the name of the WIN32 event that when signaled notifies the SSH2 Telnet server t
416. ted in the thosts file are allowed to connect via telnet SSH2 The provision also exists to exclude specific IP addresses from connecting via SSH2 Telnet A keyword Exclude is used that indicates all IP Addresses listed in the file should be excluded from logon via SSH2 Telnet Note You need to create this file if it does not exist Figure 181 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Security Connection Restrictions sce ESTE JE The Connection Restrictions configuration screen provides configuration of e Allow 3 Party clients to connect to the UTS See page 95 e Opening and editing the text file to enable or disable telnet encryption based on an IP Address gs_ipenc txt See page 91 358 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Security Connection Limits Er S UTS Configuration Connection Limits a e Global per system kg Active Configuration Access Control Maximum Sessions Automatic Logon EW Security E In certain cases the system administrator may Telnet Encryption A Maximum allowed want to limit the number of sessions allowed Connection Restrictions 1 3300 Move the slider to change the number of j A i sessions allowed to connect to the UTS i Restrict ee E c ac You can also restrict the number of connections y on a per User basis or a per IP Address basis 4 Power Features 5 Emulations Learn more in UTS Documentation Bell Control Protocols UTS System
417. terminated by the user specified string the above string will complete the graceful termination process This string sends the command exif and then enter which are the commands to terminate a session You must be sure that the user defined termination string does indeed terminate the application before sending the e x 1 t ENTER string otherwise unintended characters will be sent to the application EXAMPLE GRACEFUL TERMINATION AMORTIZATION PROGRAM LINK FAILURE We will continue to use the amortization program from the previous example However we will assume that a standard menu exists for the application A Fv menu item exists that is invoked by a t f The list of items in the File menu list includes s for saving the work and a ffor opening the file menu list again and then x for exiting the application Next follows the e x i t ENTER to gracefully close the shell Step 1 Create batch file c_start bat Step 2 Add this line to c_start bat d amor amortize exe Step 3 Add this line to c_start bat note there are no spaces in following the SET LRA_TERMINATION alt s sleep alt x e x 1 ENTER Step 4 Save file and exit 21 Remember that the string ENTER is a Graceful Termination special character 153 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Now when the User ID bill connects to the Windows system via SSH2 Telnet the application amortize exe will automatically be executed If the session is terminated due to system t
418. the configuration summary data Minimizes configuration errors Flexible and enhances organization Incredible granularity for configuration settings Provides templates for storing configurations Global System and Per User Import Export of configurations Visualize Domain Domain user Local User Administrators have the ability to create multiple configuration templates providing quick configuration implementation as well as consistency 324 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Overview Configuration of the UTS is primarily composed of scripts registry variables environment variables text files and operating system configuration The GSW Configuration Tool allows the use of a graphical user interface to set configuration parameters that reside in the registry in addition to creation of folders scripts and the modification of UTS environment variables Additionally the GSW Configuration Tool provides access to text file configurations via notepad exe The UTS Configuration Tool is organized based on either Global or Per Session configuration items Global per system configuration modifies the registry variables or allows editing of text files used for provisioning the UTS These text files and registry variables are configuration items that are UTS wide in nature and apply to all UTS Users User per session configuration sets environment variables or allows editing of text files used for provision the UTS on a per session
419. the registration steps Note Do not use Windows Terminal Server to perform registration Two options exist for registering the license for the GSW UTS Server software The first option is a Floating License hardware key that can be installed on a USB or Parallel port on the server The registration instructions for the Floating license are below The second option is a software method that is sent to GSW using the GSTicket system Instructions for the software registration are on page 24 Registration Using a Floating License Hardware Key Georgia SoftWorks offers an opt onal Floating License for customers that require the flexibility to rapidly move the telnet server from one machine to another Ifyou did not purchase the Floating License skip this section and go to the machine specific license on page 24 With the Floating License No registration is required for the telnet server to operate Common scenarios where the Floating License is useful include e Laboratory usage in a development or test environment where the telnet server is required for short periods of time on any particular machine and then moved to a new machine e Backup Servers in a production environment Typically additional telnet servers are purchased for backup systems However with a Floating License the Hardware Key can be quickly moved from the primary machine to the backup without any other registration requirements e Environments where a failed server must be
420. the steps gs put d xfer cbroch doc c received cbroch doc gs_exec winword c received cbroch doc gs get c received cbroch doc d xfer cbroch doc These commands can be included in a batch file such that the Local Edit capability is more generic and easily invoked Create a batch file let s call it ledit bat gs put d xfer l c received 1 gs exec winword c received 1l gs get c received 1 d xfer 1l Assumptions File on server is always in d xfer folder File to be edited on client is always in c received folder When connected via SSH2 Telnet to the server when in the d xfer folder the user can simply type ledit cbroch doc to transfer the file to the client and run MS Word When completed in MS Word the file is automatically transferred back on the server 249 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE UTILITIES EXECUTE PROGRAM ON CLIENT VIEW IMAGE ON CLIENT A cat dealership headquarters has images of motor vehicles in the database A local dealer can easily display the images pictures to prospective buyers via SSH2 Telnet The file can be transferred using the gs_ put utility then the default image view can be invoked allowing the image to be viewed without required knowledge of the graphics display program On the Windows OS the file type extension will invoke a default executable In the following two lines the first line transfers the file to the client and the second line will in
421. the system does this behind the scenes Enhanced and Open printing methods allow you to print to the printer port as you normally would Where e clientcomputername sharename is the network path to the destination printer e s is the Georgia SoftWorks file placeholder The syntax of the lpr print command could be set GWIN LOCAL PRINT CMDx lpr S Server P printer s where e Server is the name ot ip address of the host providing the bd service e Printer isthename ofthe printer queue e x is the printer index Other arguments ate available for the pr command Please see the help for the pd service that you ate using EXAMPLE OPEN PRINTING PRINT TO A CLIENT COMPUTER S SHARED PRINTER In my office I have a computer and a printer connected I also am using a 3 party SSH2 Telnet client My system is on the network and my shared printer is visible to the server I use SSH2 Telnet to connect to the 31 The s usually will be at the end but for some print commands may have to be placed somewhere inside the command not necessarily at the end 224 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 company server and I run accounting applications The accounting application uses LPT1 as the printer port How can I use the printer in my office when I print from the accounting applications Important Information User Name Smarts Client Computer Name SmartsComputer PrinterShareName SmartsPrinter Server Computer Name soloman SSH2 Telnet C
422. thod The Open print method allows the administrator to determine the print command used by SSH2 Telnet when printing There are unlimited applications for this printing method Common uses involve printing to shared or network printers The Enhanced print method allows any printers accessible to the client system for example the default printer to be easily used by SSH2 Telnet A common use for Enhanced printing is when connecting to the server across the Internet or via RAS 216 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enhanced Print Method The Enhanced Print Method is very useful to users that connect across the Internet or via RAS Enhanced printing may also be used in many other scenarios The Enhanced True Client Side Printing Method is a feature of the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Clients and is not available with 3 party clients Print output is sent to the client s computer default or local printer s Client parameters also exist that allow printers other than the default printer to be used with Enhanced printing Note It is required that each user be logged in only once for the Enhanced Print method to operate correctly That means that each workstation RF device must use a different User Id when connecting to the server The first example describes the basic Enhanced Printing setup and the second example describes using multiple client side printers and the third describes the override feature EXAMPLE ENHANCED PRINTING PRINT
423. tion a User per session configuration User Per Session as User per session configuration with a default configuration defined This is the root of the User per session configuration object Folder UTS Installation Folder scripts Click to expand to see the Domains Local Users IP Address Range Grandfathered Users User Template objects and default User configuration if it exists ES UTS Configuration Global per system S as User per session Domains 1 3 amp Local Users 2 JP IP Address Range 2 Grandfathered Users 1 2 User Templates 5 amp default config Figure 168 User per session object expanded Click to collapse Right Click Operation Create Default Configuration Add Add Create Default Contain Property Copy Paste Rename Delete Export Import New Domain User Configuration Pages a User Y per session Create Default Configuration A default User per session configuration is created that will apply to any session if that session does not have a specific configuration or one of its parent objects does not have a default configuration 336 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Domains MN All Domains Represents ALL users in all domains D Represents ALL users in all domain with a
424. tion When a connection is initiated the GSW UTS determines if there is a configuration associated with the IP Address If so then that configuration is used The GS_IP_Rt txt file is where the association between the IP Address Range and the configuration files is set Please see the User Manual for details about the IP Address based logon scripts we Icon Meaning IP This icon represents ALL IP Address Range based User Configurations Expand to see configurations for each specific IP Address Range pP The dark IP icon represents a specific IP Address Range based User Configuration The name of the IP Address Range configuration is displayed to the right of the icon and the specific IP Address user configuration property pages are available by expanding the object Figure 218 GUI Tool IP Address Range The IP Address Range Summary View and Specific IP Address Range provides configuration of e IP Address Range Logon Scripts See page 207 e User Configuration for IP Address The association between the logon script and the IP address is specified in the GS_IP_Rt txt file Note IP Address Ranges user configurations contain the same property pages as all session users Each page is described in the Local Users section For details on each property page please see page 388 399 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Grandfathered Users 5 83 UTS Configuration Grandfathered Users 4 He Global per system S
425. tion is restored upon reboot The persistent CAB folder location is device manufacturer and model specific Mobile Client Persistence Instructions Once you have the GSW Mobile Client configuration set for your implementation you should save the configuration Step 1 Install and run the GSW Mobile Client Step 2 Configure the GSW Mobile Client as required for your environment Step 3 When satisfied with the configuration from within the GSW Mobile Client perform the menu item File Save And save the settings in location below Program Files GSW_Clnt default gswtc The file below will automatically be generated upon the Save command Program Files GSW Clnt default cab 50 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Step 4 From within the GSW Mobile Client switch to User Mode using the menu item File Security Figure 31 Switch from Administrator to User Mode Step 5 On the device launch the File Manager and copy the configuration and application cab files Program Files1GSW Clntidefault cab Program Files GSW_Clnt c753x cab to the Persistent CAB folder default cab Properties OK x 753x cab Properties OK E Properties Properties ERS deait cab Ry osx Type CAB File Type CAB File Location FlashFX Disk CAB Location FlashFX Disk CAB Size 0 99KB Size 371 bytes Modified 10 10 2005 3 13 46 PM Modified 10 10 2005 3 13 30 PM Fama a Homan Fo sem ae Figure 32 Note that the files are already m
426. tion Tool User Windows see page 390 Or use legacy style below This setting determines system specific behavior in the situation where a user logs on and their HKEY_CURRENT_USER registry key does not have a user specific registry hive to map to The hive will be created or not based on the value of gwtn_create profile To specify you should set the gwtn create user profile environment variable in your logon script page 205 The environment variable for specifying a user specific registry hive mapping is gwtn_create user profile Possible values are Y or N or y or n Y Create a user specific registry hive mapping if the HKEY CURRENT USER does not have a specific registry hive to map default N Do not create a user specific registry hive mapping Use HKEY_USERS DEFAULT For example to enable a user specific registry htve mapping in the case where HKEY_CURRENT_USER does not have a specific registry hive to map to set gwtn_create user profile Y in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables 234 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 For example set gwtn_create user profile Y is correct set gwtn_create user profile Y is not correct 235 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Custom Shell Path Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Windows see page 390 Or use legacy style below The UTS uses the Microsof
427. tion count Yes Yes Yes Connection count by User ID Yes Yes Yes Connection count by IP Address Yes Yes Yes Encrypted Sessions Only Telnet Server Yes Yes No Encrypted Sessions Only SSH Server Yes Yes Yes Specific application Yes Yes Yes Expired Password Handling N A Yes Yes Integrated with Windows Security N A Yes Yes Must have the SE Strong Encryption version of the softwate Table 15 Security Pack Certain Generic Export Restrictions apply to some countries 87 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Encrypted Data Stream Telnet Server Encryption of the Data Stream for Telnet on Windows is another feature pioneered by Georgia SoftWorks Complete Data Stream encryption is available on a global or per user basis when using the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client For encryption to work both the sending and receiving ends of the data must know to encrypt and decrypt the data Since third party clients would not be aware of encryption or decryption data stream encryption is only available with the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client The Setup for Data Stream Encryption requires 1 The encryption parameter must be passed when invoking the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client 2 The setting of an environment variable on the server in either a Global or User login script 3 The registry variable EnableEncryption is set to 1 4 The proper Microsoft Windows operating system DLLs and API s are installed on both the cli
428. to exit ERROR_STDIO echo ERROR _ STDIO to exit ERROR_DISK_FUI ERROR DISK FULL to exit if errorlevel 12 goto ERROR WAIT if errorlevel 11 goto ERROR _OS2 if errorlevel 10 goto ERROR _OS1 if errorlevel 9 goto ERROR_SET EVENT if errorlevel 8 goto ERROR ABANDONED if errorlevel 7 goto ERROR GET MUTEX if errorlevel 6 goto ERROR SYNC OBJECTS if errorlevel 5 goto ERROR INVALID INFO SLOT if errorlevel 4 goto ERROR INFO SLOT ENV if errorlevel 3 goto ERROR TARGET FILE if errorlevel 2 goto ERROR_USAGE if errorlevel 1 goto ERROR SHARED MEMORY if errorlevel 0 goto ERROR SUCCESS ERROR_ SESSION SUSPENDED echo ERROR SESSION SUSPENDED goto exit ERROR_ ABORTED BY USER echo ERROR ABORTED BY USER goto exit ERROR_ TCP SEND echo ERROR TCP SEND goto exit ERROR_ SYNC echo ERROR_SYNC goto exit LL NT ERROR_GET_ GSC echo ERROR GET GSCLNT to exit R INVALID CINT ERROR INVALID CLNT to exit ERROR_SET CONTROL HANDLER echo ERROR SET CONTROL HANDLER to exit RROR UNEXPECTED NOTIFICATION 261 JANUARY 27 2015 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO echo goto ERRO
429. to other users Client Software The Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet clients are proprietary software that run on remote PCs and Pocket PC class devices and utilizes advanced features offered in the GSW UTS server software The advanced features are propriety extensions that enable a wide range of functionality including mouse operation enhanced printing methods automatic update of client software and much more Well designed optimizations are included that enable the GSW Server software for Windows to be the fastest SSH2 Telnet software available on the market The client software contains a configurable heartbeat timer that notifies the agent process of its presence This mechanism helps to identify link or remote PC failures It is recommended that the Georgia SoftWorks Client software be used although it is not required The Georgia SoftWorks Windows Telnet Server is RFC 854 compliant which allows any 3rd Party Telnet Client to be used The GSW SSH Server allows connections from any third party SSH compliant client The Georgia SoftWorks clients offer the Enhanced printing method as a component of True Client Side Printing Page 213 This allows users to print to their local printer even when connected across the Internet or RAS The Hostname or IP addtess is displayed in the title bar of the Georgia SoftWorks Clients to provide an easy method of identifying to which host you are connected Many command line parameters ate provided to enhan
430. to the device Step 1 Make sure the GSW mobile client is not running e Close the client e On the Windows Mobile Device Open Task Manager and stop the GSW Client Step 2 Copy the GSW Windows Mobile client configuration file to a workstation On the Windows Mobile device open File Explorer and copy the GSW Mobile Client configuration file which has a gswtc extension and identified by the Globe Icon to a workstation PC Step 3 Edit the file in this example it is named default gswtc using an editor such as notepad exe to add the path to the Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile XML file that is located on the device The path to the Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile XML file is added to the configuration file in the Session Section identified by the word Session enclosed in square brackets is Session Add the line anywhere in the Session section The path is specified by Vangard Voice installation Use the syntax as follows Syntax VVPath lt file path gt Example VVPath SamplApp xml 299 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 GSW Mobile Client For Windows Mobile f File Explorer default gswtc Notepad File Edit Format View H g My Documents y Name y default 3 13 13 628B default 3 13 13 352B Port 22 Copy the file to a workstation HBTime 30 for editing AutoLogon 1 NTLMOverGSSAPI 0 PublickeyLogon 0 UseSSL3 0 UnicodeSession 1 Figure 150 Edit the GSW Mobile Client configuration file Up E
431. tory in the Scripts folder The first column lists the original attribute bytes and the second column lists translated attributes Attributes not included in this file are left un translated The character in the first column designates a comment line A Figure 193 GSW UTS GUI Active Configuration Emulations Color Remapping The Emulations Color Mappings screen allows viewing editing of the relevant text files e Color Mapping See page 163 e Color Re Mapping See page 169 373 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Emulations Character Translation i Character Translation Global per system E is Active Configuration Ye Automatic Logon 4 Security Failure Detection Recovery Character Display Translations 3rd Party Clients Power Features Character Display Translations 3 Party Clients You may have a special situation or advanced application where it would be useful to translate ls l characters sent to the terminal to a different character PE EN Open Edit as_xchar bt file in Notepad or string of characters Normally you do not need to get 5 familiar with this section however the capability is 0 a ae 5 present for advanced requirements i p cache This feature allows you to translate or replace the characters the user will see on 3 Party Clients and RF a Sense Ue Ee Terminals when using the Georgia SoftWo
432. truly multi user environment with the GSW UTS software Remote administration full support for DOS Legacy applications superior user control Session Monitoring Shadowing and Data Stream Encryption will allow you to utilize Windows as never before True Client Side printing is also available for a Windows Telnet SSH Server for the first time with the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server Session Saver and Pass through printing are excellent features for RF hand held terminal applications RF Terminal environments will perform exceptionally well with the GSW UTS due to a rich set of standard features such as Session Saver Pass through printing Automatic Logon logon scripting configurable timers and other features optimized specifically for RF terminal access GSW Team Services provides your mobile device users a breakthrough in telnet SSH technology that shatters all prior usability and efficiency standards by allowing for unprecedented user collaboration and cutting the costs of hardware Team Services empowers the mobile device users to share resoutces transfer swap share and recover mobile device sessions from the mobile device The GSW Mobile and Desktop clients are voice enabled to provide support to Vangard Voice Systems AccuSpeech Mobile technology With IPv support you are ready for migration to IPv addresses with your network Operation is available in IPv6 IPv4 or mixed SAPConsole environments will enjoy the ease of
433. tted 117 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Below is an example of the Team Services Accept Transfer mode display The Accept modes for the other operations are similar The unabbreviated version is on the left and the abbreviated version is on the right Accept Transfer Mode Display Abbreviated Accept Transfer Mode Display Qoswcien if AB An unabbreviated Waiting for transfer dialog is shown on the left On the right is simply the session id s5 and Waiting o 0 GSW Client Lg AB Table 24 Team Services Accept Mode Abbreviations Note that the text My session id is and for transfer is omitted yet the essential session id s5 is presented as well as the Waiting text providing a reminder to the user ll as the Waiting text providing der to th 118 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS The TS Select Session display is shown below There ate a few items to note JANUARY 27 2015 o If more than one page is required to display all the available sessions then the function key F2 is used to display the next page Fl navigates to the previous page This is true for both the abbreviated and unabbreviated lists o Each page has a Page xof y count display where x is the page you are viewing and y is the total number of pages o On each page the line numbers corresponding to the session id are zero based Below on page 1 line 0 corresponds to session id s0 On page 2 l
434. ttings This is how to change the registry key for the Server Side Heartbeat Timer Note You must be on the Windows system that the Georgia SoftWorks UTS for Windows is installed However you may connect to the Windows Registry from a remote location 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Click RUN 3 Type REGEDIT 4 Click OK 5 Select Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEASYSTEM CurrentControlSetlservices GS_Tnetl Parameters ClntChkTimeout 6 Select the menu item Edit and then click on Modify 7 Enter the new value for the ClntChkTimeout and click OK The new Server Side Heartbeat Timer will take effect for all new connections 150 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Client Side Heartbeat Timer To aid in the detection of failed links or failed remote PC s the Georgia SoftWorks Client software supports a Client Timeout value The client will send a heartbeat to the server at specified time intervals At installation this value is set to 30 seconds This can be changed using the shortcut properties If the server does not receive data from the client in the specified time the connection is terminated The data can be keyboard or mouse input as well as the heartbeat When keyboard or mouse data is transmitted or when a heartbeat detected the server s timer is restarted The heartbeat time is specified as an optional command line argument in seconds EXAMPLE SET THE GEORGIA SOFTWORKS SSH2 TELNET CLIENT S
435. uit ca GF J 3 15 Pm A a E c753x cab oS 3 15 Pm A E Figure 34 Note that the files are already marked as Read Only Step 6 Copy the file C Program Files Georgia SoftWorks Universal Telnet and SSH Client for Windows CE ARM4I WCEG 41 ARMV4I_G CAB From your PC the PC used in Step 1 to FlashFX Disk CAB on your Falcon 4410 device and mark it Read Only ala El Jaddress FlashFx Disk CAB y ye amp amp c753x cab default cab MATI Now three 3 file exist in this folder gt Mark file as Read Only A C System Frcs Aa ey O lash OFS 3 16 pm A Figure 35 File copy from PC to Device 62 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Step 7 On the device go to Start Programs Falcon Management FDU Admin Tool And set the configuration options as shown using the different Tabs below Falcon Desktop OK E A Make sure that the Enable Falcon Desktop checkbox is checked Set Password Restore Defaults Note Alphanumeric characters used within a password should not be defined as hot keys Version 1 0 32 1 8 Facon GF gt 302 Pu As Figure 36 Falcon 4410 Application Title 63 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enter the Application Title Next Click on the button When you click the button it opens up the File Selection dialog below D Navigate to the GSW_Lnch exe in the folder Program Files GSW_Clnt Sele
436. ups Er UTS Configuration a Global per system BAY ive Configuration Automatic Logon Ge Security Telnet Encryption Connection Restrictions Connection Limits FIPS Restrictions Failure Detection Recovery Power Features Printing Team Services Event Logging Emulations i Character Emulation Y Default Domain Y Negotiate Window Size Y Color Mappings Character Translation Terminal Initialization Bell Control i Protocols UTS System Templates 2 ags User per session Active Configuration Active Configuration Summary View r Automatic Logon Open Edit gs_auto bd Open Edit gs_logon bt Automatic Logon for 3rd Party clients Protocols UTS Protocols Allowed Telnet IP Version Support SSH IP Version Support Automatic Logon for GSW clients r Security Telnet Encryption Access Control Connection Restrictions FIPS Restrictions Telnet Encryption by IP Restrictions By IP Address z connections by User ID connections by IP Address Curent parameter combination is not supported with simplified FIPS access control r Failure Detection Recovery Server Side Inactivity Timeout Time seconds 1 Disabled Server Side Heartbeat Timer Enabled Time seconds 30 m Power Feature Team Services Transfer Enabled Swap Enabled Share Left Justify Disabled Recover Host Key Control En Hot Key Virtual Ke
437. ups and add users to groups 176 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Starting the Session Administrator The name of the session administrator utility is gs_admin exe and resides in the UTS installation directory The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server program group has an entry to start the Session Administrator It may also be started from the command line locally or via SSH2 Telnet When the session administrator is executed a window is opened that dynamically displays all SSH2 Telnet sessions For each session the Logon Id the Logon time the Process ID the Monitor ID the IP address and the Connection State are displayed The menu bar contains the items File and Sessions The bottom right corner of the Session Administrator displays the number of SSH2 Telnet Sessions that are currently active For each SSH2 Telnet session the following information is displayed User Name Login ID of the Windows users Logon Time Date and time the user logged on to the system via SSH2 Telnet Process ID Process ID assigned to the SSH2 Telnet Session Monitor ID Process ID of the GS_Admin that is monitoring the session This indicates that this session is being monitored or shadowed IP Address IP address of the computer where the client is located State Connection State of the SSH2 Telnet session Defined States ate Logon A User is in the process of logging in via SSH2 Telnet Conn SSH2 Telnet session is Connected Disc A User
438. uration Emulations Global per system s User per session User Configuration Local User bill 2 default config _Emulation Configuration Options 222 El My Domains 2 3 I Local Users 3 dd 6 Prom YS 4 Logon Script Prompt z Windows GSW Client Control o END pag 8 Legacy H Power Features Monochrome 4 Failure Detection Recovery e Eel pat i a tom J P IP Address Range 2 Grandfathered Users 4 Specify that Delet f Ba LS User Templates 5 Specify lete performs a Backspace Two cells per Unicode character Two cells per Unicode character Figure 211 GUI Tool Local Users Emulations The Emulation page provides configuration for e Terminal Emulation Gee page 159 e Graphics Mode See page 161 e Presentation Color Monochrome or Prompt See page 163 e Backspace on Delete See page 173 e Two cells per Unicode character See page 174 392 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Local User Legacy i Legacy te Global per system 8s User per session amp User Configuration Local User bill Q default config Legacy Configuration Options amp Domains 2 3 Er die Local Users 3 There are different expectations as to the function of the behavior for BF Mode event lt control c gt Alternate behaviors are configured by selecting the Control C mo
439. uration Yes Yes Yes Table 35 Legacy Pack As supported by the Terminal emulation mode Mouse When using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Clients the Mouse works as if you ate sitting locally at the server DOS Character Mode Color Graphics DOS Character Mode Color Graphics is fully supported This includes the full range of DOS Character mode Colors All of the 256 possible background foreground color combinations ate supported Function Keys The function keys work as expected With the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server for Windows the function keys operate as if you are sitting at the server and running the application locally For 3rd Party clients the function keys are supported as per the emulation specified Please note that some function keys are not supported by various emulations Special Characters All characters with character codes between 0x00 through OxFF are supported and displayed properly when using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Clients and conforming third party client emulations Screen Sizes other than 25 x 80 You may place the Mode command as described on page 286 in a logon script to set screen sizes Please note that most UNIX Telnet SSH clients default to 24 rows while Windows and DOS applications default to 25 rows Thus you may have to adjust your UNIX SSH2 Telnet client row count settings to 157 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 see all the rows of your Windows or
440. ure 89 the User Id is london 127 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Open Team Services Tasks Menu The GSW Team Services Tasks menu provides the user access to the Team Services operations Enter GSW Team Services by entering the hot key combination from the device The default key combination is Ctr1 x This can be changed to meet your requirements see page 138 To enter the hot key depress Ctrl then x and then release the keys The Team Services Tasks menu is displayed f GSW Client New View Tools Session 53 Figure 90 Team Services Tasks Menu Function Key Team Service Operation F1 Accept Transfer Mode F2 Transfer F3 Accept Swap Mode F4 Swap F5 Accept Share Mode F6 Share F7 Recover F8 My Team Service Information F9 Reserved for future use F10 Cancel Team Service Operation Configured hot key Opens Team Services Menu Table 26 Team Services Menu 128 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Strict Teams Configuration Often with multiple users departments locations customers it is beneficial to organize users into distinct teams for participation in Team Services This strict team grouping prevents users from accidently sharing swapping transferring or recovering sessions with users outside their assigned group Configuration of Strict Teams is performed through the tsgroups txt file The order of the fields in the tsgroups txt file is as follows
441. user configuration A default configuration is created by right clicking and selecting Create Default Configuration 383 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Domains GSW UTS Configu sr 1 03 0006 E UTS Configuration amp Domains 2 3 Global per system a s User per session y F PA Domains Summary View E Quick View Information dl GSWATLANTA 1 0 O How many Domains and Domain Users are defined for GSW Configurations E GSWLONDON 3 8 dy Local Users 3 2D Domains 2 3 H P IP Address Range 2 f Grandfathered Users 4 There are configurations for a total of 2 domains that contain a total of 3 users H 5 User Templates 5 en Determine exactly which configuration is used All DOMAINS DOMAINS D Specific Domain User If a configuration exists for a specific domain user then its configuration s used x a All Users in a Specific Domain Otherwise if a configuration exists for the Specific Domain then its configuration is used A NOTE The black circle with a white check indicates that a default configuration exists If a configuration is not found for a specific domain user or a specific domain then the configuration for ALL DOMAIN USERS is used Figure 202 GUI Tool Domains The Domains screen allows you to view quick status information such as how many domains configurations are defined how many users are defined for
442. utomatic Logon Security AAA a heey O Faire Detecton ecorry ij ian A O and ane ceed ay eee ie Power Feetures monochrome This may be especially true when using Emulations Open Edit colomap bt file in Notepad monochrome RF devices The Georgia SoftWorks Y Character Emulation SSH2 Telnet Server provides a mechanism to allow A Default Domain custom color mapping to monochrome displays 4 Negotiate Window Size The SSH2 Telnet Server upon startup reads the file i Color Mappings colormap txt This file defines the color to YE Character Translation monochrome mappings The text file contains 256 rows Terminal Initialization that represent all foreground and background color Bell Control combinations and associated default monochrome i Protocols mappings E UTS System Templates 2 s User per session Color Remapping ALL Clients Modify your application colors so they are easy to read Color Re Mapping ALL Clients on a gray scale device without any source code changes Also remap your application colors to fit a customer s look and feel without source changes Open Edit gs_color bd file in Notepad A text file is used for specifying the colors to re map The name of the file is gs_color txt and is installed in the GSW UTS root directory If you want different color mappings on a per user basis then place the gs_color txt file in the user s direc
443. utomatic Logon te Global per system 4g Active Configuration Automatic Logon 3 Automatic Logon Security Pre configure a list of IP addresses that will be able to connect and logon without any User ID Password or coi Failure Detection Recovery Domain prompting when using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Clients or 3rd Party Clients Power Features Autologon is useful in many situations However the real power of this feature is realized when coupled with the Emulations Session Saver for fast and easy connection establishment For example when a connection is broken due toa k Bell Control link failure you can reconnect without the time consuming UserID Password and Domain prompts and resume oie Protocols work exactly where you left off before the link failure UTS System Templates 2 The configuration procedure for Automatic Logon is different for GSW Clients and Third Party Clients A amp User per session client s IP address CANNOT be represented in BOTH files IP addresses using a GSW client will be listed in gs_auto txt IP addresses using a 3rd party client will be listed in gs_logon txt Read more in the UTS Documentation Autologon with GSW clients Open Open gs_auto td file for editing Autologon with 3 Party clients Open Open gs_logon bt file for editing Cancel Apply Help J Figure 178 GSW UTS GUI Automatic Logon Please see page 106 for details about Automatic Logon 355 GEOR
444. v F L GSW Registration Tool m Customer information Product information Name John Doe Name GSW_UTS Sessions Requested 3000 Company ACME Computer Warehouse Version 8 05 Zone 8aYWx28p StreetAddress1 123 Main St 123 Main Product ID SireetAddress2 3CF4AF6F7310DCA04777002FD223AE0057D4C2171346 City Atlanta State GA Zip 30534 Registration information Country USA Please enter your serial number in the window below and click on the Register button Phone 706 265 1018 Fax 706 265 1020 D25EEAF8AF1692EB019A5CE3486B20CCF293632CADC7 Purchased From Georgia SoftWorks Expiration date Not set Application software SAP Free updates until Not set Parameter Savetofile Print HwKey Close Register Figure 24 Registration Serial Number Entered 4 Click Register Figure 25 Registration Successful 26 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 A GSW Registration Tool m Customer information m Product information Name John Doe Name GSW_UTS Sessions Requested 3000 Company ACME Computer Warehouse Version 8 05 Zone 8aYWx28p StreetAddress1 i 123 Main St Product ID StreetAddress2 3CF4AF6F7310DCA04777002FD223AE0057D4C217 1346 City Atlanta State GA Zip 30534 Registration information Country USA Please enter your serial number in the window below and click on the Register button P
445. ve 64 Bit Software N A N A N A RF DTIO Interface Yes Yes Yes Table 17 Speed Pack Fast Fast Fast The Georgia SoftWorks UTS provides incredibly fast screen updates in fact the fastest on the market Several optimizations have been implemented with respect to screen updates For example when data is sent from the server to the client only the screen data that has changed is sent Keyboard response is also incredibly fast When you type a character it is displayed immediately A fast typist will have to work hard to outrun the keyboard response of the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server Compression for slow link speeds The Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server for Windows compresses data to increase the overall throughput of data Incredible performance optimizations are utilized when using the Georgia SoftWorks SSH2 Telnet Clients Slow link and Intemet optimizations Many access the host system via slow dialup links or by the Internet Significant performance optimizations are realized when using any SSH2 Telnet client Proprietary performance algorithms and code optimizations To accomplish the desired performance the GSW SSH2 Telnet Server designers used object oriented C for the foundation of the software providing a modular easily extensible and maintainable design In addition to sophisticated performance algorithms all time critical sections of the software ate written in highly optimized C
446. vent in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces ate allowed when setting environment variables For example set gwtn_ctrl_c_mode event is correct set gwtn_ctrl1_c mode event is not correct 158 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Emulation Pack When using 3 party clients comprehensive terminal emulations are a must Not just offering a wide range of terminal emulations but they are also correctly implemented Emulation Pack Configurable Georgia SoftWorks an Party Client Client SCO Console N A N A Yes DEC VT100 220 320 420 N A N A Yes Wyse 50 Wyse 60 N A N A Yes AT386 N A N A Yes IBM 3101 IBM 3151 N A N A Yes AlphaCom N A N A Yes PDCurses for VT 220 320 420 N A N A Yes Perfect PC N A Yes No Table 36 Emulation Pack As supported by the terminal emulation mode 3rd Party Clients The Georgia SoftWorks UTS for Windows will work with any RFC 854 SSH compliant 3rd party client Please see the vendor s instructions for configuration of the 3rd party client The procedure for connecting with a 3rd party client is similar to connecting with the Georgia SoftWorks client see page 69 Terminal Emulation Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Emulations Terminal Emulations see page 392 Or use legacy style below Upon connecting with a 3rd party client you will be prompted to select a terminal emulation mode Choose the desired emulation b
447. via telnet SSH The provision also exists to exclude specific IP addresses from connecting via SSH2 Telnet A keyword Exclude is used that indicates all IP Addresses listed in the file should be excluded from logon via SSH2 Telnet How to set up Host IP Address Restriction Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool Edit thosts file 358 Or use legacy style below You must create the file thosts The file must reside in the Georgia SoftWorks Universal Terminal Server installation directory The directive EXCLUDE indicates if the IP Addresses should be excluded from connection NOTE The System account must have permission to read the thosts file The rules are simple for setting up the thosts file 1 Itisa text file 2 The character is the comment character 11 Only Individual Users can be added to Gwtn Users Groups can not be added to the group 93 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 3 EXCLUDE directive placed in the 1st line will force the interpretation as the exclusion file otherwise only IP addresses listed are allowed 4 Data after the IP address is ignored and therefore can be used for additional comment data Following are example thosts files EXAMPLE IP RESTRICTION RESTRICT CERTAIN HOSTS FROM CONNECTING Bill and Tom have machines that are in a public location and are not secure The system administrator does not want to allow SSH2 Telnet access from those machines However Bill and Tom have other machin
448. vices operations are Recovery e Session Saver must be configured page 144 e Session must be in suspended state e Client types must match GSW or 3rd Party e Unicode Settings must match Transfer e Session must be in Accept Transfer mode e Client types must match GSW or 3rd Party e Unicode Settings must match e Session must be in Accept Share mode e Session must not already be monitored or shared e Session must be in Accept Swap mode e Client types must match GSW or 3rd Party e Unicode Settings must match 142 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 A quick way for the System Administrator to identify the Client Unicode and SSH settings for a given session is to use the Session Administrator Select the session and then use the menu item Session gt Details You will see a display similar to the one below m Session Administrator C GS_UTS GS_Admin exe _ ile Number of characters entered Type of client connected i Unicode session No l TCP port number 12020 SSH session rec china ship london mexico NewYork Chicago john china mexico SOPA Figure 96 Team Services Session Details You can identify if a client is a GSW FIPS session by the prepended to the User Name in the User name column 143 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Failure Detection and Recovery Pack For Industrial applications excellent failure detection and recovery is expected and required This is one a
449. voke the default image display program which will display the image gs put d lauto databaselcorvette 1993 jpeg c viewcar corvette 1993 jpeg gs exec c viewcar corvette 1993 jpeg Again these commands can be included in a batch file such that the View Image capability is more generic and easily invoked Create a batch file let s call it vimage bat gs put d auto database 1 c viewcar 1 gs exec c viewcar 1 Assumptions Image files on server is always in d Nauto databasel folder Image file to be viewed on client is always in c viewcar folder A default image viewer exists for jpeg extensions When connected via SSH2 Telnet to the server and positioned in the d auto_database folder the user can simply type vimage corvette 1993 jpeg to transfer the file to the client and display the image 35 In this example our file type has a jpeg extension 250 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 EXAMPLE UTILITIES EXECUTE PROGRAM ON CLIENT QUICK DIRECTORY LISTING The User needs to transfer a file from the client to the server but does not remember the exact filename To quickly obtain a directory listing they can simply run gs exec dir This will display the directory contents without having to open a new window on the client The contents of the directory folder are quickly displayed in the SSH2 Telnet Window for 2000 ms two seconds or the time specified by the scmddelay gs _dut exe command line opt
450. wer in Windows compared to Windows 3 1 293 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Vangard Voice Systems AccuSpeech with the GSW UTS Note Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile software must be installed and verified to be operational prior to any attempt to configure GSW Clients to use it Additionally Vangard Voice AccuSpeech Mobile should be configured to operate in the Half Duplex mode Please contact Vangard Voice or authorized party to ensure proper installation and configuration of AccuSpeech for the application you intend to voice enable Assistance with Vangard Voice AccuSpeech ca Mobile n be found at 949 435 1001 Configure Voice Vangard AccuSpeech Recording Mode to Half Duplex Yangard Voice Tools J Bluetooth O Communication Scan Summit O Wavelink E Command Prompt GSW Telnet and ssH2 Internet Explorer Media Player H 2 Windows Explorer Figure 135 Open VVTools Alle Select the Voice Mode amp Register 3 Always Listening AWL O Push To Talk PTT Half Duplex Register Mode lt 23 Y vangara Voic Qal dla Figure 136 VVTools Select Half Duplex Vangard Voice Tools Record Key Recording Mode T 18 Alle Select the Voice Mode amp Register 3 Always Listening AWL O Push To Talk PTT Half Duplex EY X vangard Voic Qal ala Figure 137 VVTools Click Register Mode Record Key Reco
451. wer versions have all the required files Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server SE 128 bit Strong Complete Data Stream Encryption Some applications require extremely strong Complete Data Stream Encryption For these customers Georgia SoftWorks offers their Telnet Server in a Strong Encryption SE version This utilizes a full 128 bit data stream RSA encryption algorithm NOTE 128 Bit Complete Data Stream is the default version when shipped on a CD 89 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The Georgia SoftWorks configuration needed to run the 128 bit encryption is the same as for the 40 bit encryption The system requirements needed to run the encryption are slightly different In order to run the 128 bit encryption the system requires either Server or Client Requirements e Windows NT 4 0 with domestic version of SP 3 or domestic version of SP4 or e Windows 7 8 VISTA 2008 R2 2012 R2 XP 2000 2003 Additional Client Options e Windows 95 with domestic version of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 or e Windows 98 with domestic version of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 e Windows ME with domestic version of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 If you have further questions about of ensuring that your computer systems can accommodate 128 bit encryption please see the Microsoft Web site Both the client and server must meet the system requirements for the SE version Also both the Client and server must be of the SE version Encrypted Logon Sequenc
452. wn in Figure 92 Notice when Team Services Left Justify is enabled the dialog box and the text at the bottom are in the viewable display Note this is usually not required O ou crew L07 2S if you are using the mode con BY esw chee ger AA Figure 91 Left Justify Disabled Command Figure 92 Left Justify Enabled Table 30 Team Services Left Justify The variable TSLeftJusti f y is a registry key value This registry key sets the default behavior for all users O disables Team Services Left Justification for all users 1 enables Team Services Left Justification for all users The key is TSLeftJustify DWORD HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services GS_Tnet Parameters TSLeftJustify An environment variable may be set on either a Global or Per User basis to override the default configuration specified by the Registry parameters described above The environment variable for Team Services Left Justify is gwtn te left justify Possible values are Y or N or y or n This allows you to have a set of users that can have different Team Services privileges than specified in the Registry key value NOTE No spaces are allowed when setting environment variables For example To enable Team Services Share the following line should be present in the user s logon script set gwtn_ts_left_justify Y is correct set gwtn_ts left justify Y is not correct 137 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2
453. www cryptix org The product required is called Cryptix JCE was planned for official release in February 2000 Download the cryptix jce 20000211 zip from http www ctyptix org products jce After you unzip the cryptix files copy these two files cryptix jce api jar cryptix jce provider jar to your jre lib ext directory 283 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Frequently Asked Questions My MSDOS applications execute very slow even on a high performance system Is there anything I can do Yes you can use the Georgia SoftWorks DOSBOSS to boost the performance of your MSDOS application when running under NT Page 104 Can I use a port other than port 23 for the Telnet Server Yes you can use an alternative port for the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Server Note This feature applies to the Telnet Server only You will need to create an entry like gstnet 55555 tcp in the Services file on the server and restart the GSW Telnet Server Replace the 55555 with another port number if necessary You will have to explicitly specify the alternate port number when starting the connection from 3rd party clients and the Georgia SoftWorks Telnet Client page 73 On Windows the services file is located in the directory lt Windows Root gt system32 drivers etc The file is named Services Can I SSH2 Telnet to the SSH2 Telnet server and then SSH2 Telnet to another server The short answer is Yes If you SSH2 Telnet to the GSW SSH2 Telne
454. x 1 1 Click the Start button at the bottom left corner of your screen 2 Select Settings then printers 3 Double click on Add Printer The add printer window opens 4 Select My Computer and Click on Next 5 Select one of the unused f or com ports Do NOT enable print pooling Click Next 6 From the Manufactures list select Generic 7 From the Printers select Generic Text Only Click Next 8 Name your printer GwtnPrinterl NOTE This name is required Click Next 9 Select Shared and name the printer GwtnPrinterSharel NOTE This name is required Click Next 10 After the printer is created double click on the printer icon 30 No setup is required for Default printing 214 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 11 Pause the printer by selecting the menu item Printer and selecting Pause Printer This printer must remain paused at all times This printer cannot be used by any other service except Georgia SoftWorks Now your virtual printer is created and is ready for use by SSH2 Telnet However you must be sure to set the redirection commands in logon scripts If you need to support more than one client side printer per user at a time then repeat steps 1 through 11 using the other two Printer Indexes This involves replacing the printer name in step 8 with GwtnPrinter2 GwtnPrinter3 GwtnPrinter4 GwtnPrinter5 GwtnPrinter6 GwtnPrinter7 GwtnPrinter8 or GwtnPrinter9 and the share name in step 9 with GwtnPrinterShare2 GwtnPrinterSh
455. xe Tips for CV60 Devices on page 56 LXE MX3X ARMv4i gsce 4i exe Tips for LXE MX3X Devices on page 59 Psion Teklogix 7535 ARMv4i gsce 4i exe Tips for Psion Teklogix 7535 on page 57 Psion Teklogix 8525 ARMv4i gsce 4i exe Tips for Psion Teklogix 8525 on page 57 Psion Teklogix ARMVv4i gsce 4i exe WORKABOUT Pro Tips for Psion Teklogix WORKABOUT PRO on page 57 Symbol MC 9060G 9090G ARMv4 gsce 4 exe Tips for SYMBOL MC 9060G MC9090 devices on page 58 Table 5 Enhanced GSW Mobile Clients 36 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Universal GSW Mobile Clients Special Tips or Qualifications List The GSW Universal Mobile Clients operate on ARMV4 ARMV4I and X86 devices In some cases special JANUARY 27 instructions or tips may exist to take advantage of unique features or provide ease of use pointers for that particular device If there are special tips or a particular device has been verified for correct operation then it will be listed in the table below Devices Qualified with Universal GSW Mobile Client for CE NET V4 2 Device Model Device Type GSW Client PSC Falcon 4410 ARMv4i gsce_41ig exe Tips for PSC Falcon 4410 on page 61 Datalogic Elf CE 6 0 ARMv5 gsce 4g exe Datalogic Falcon X3 CE 6 0 ARMv5 gsce 4g exe Honeywell Dolphin 6500 CE 5 0 ARMv5 gsce 4g exe Honeywell LXE Thor CE 6 0 X86 gsce x86 exe Table 6 Devices qualified with
456. y Strict Teams r Power Feature Event Logging Max Event Log Size Max Session Activity Log Size Bell Control View Event Log File Edit Event Definitions p Emulations Refresh character Edit Colormap bt Edit gs_color bt Edit gs_xchar bt Color Mapping for Monochrome 3rd Party clients Character Display Translation 3rd Party clients Terminal Initialization for 3rd Party clients Figure 176 Global per system Active Configuration Summary View OK Cancel Apply too 353 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 From the Active Configuration Summary view it is easy to determine which property page to use to edit the configuration setting Each configuration setting resides within a frame with a label For example Automatic Logon is a label on the frame around the configuration settings associated with Automatic Logon On the left side of the display is the property page icon with Automatic Logon as the name Clicking on the property page Automatic Logon will display the properties associated with Automatic Logon on the right side of the display Similarly the Failure Detection Recovety frame on the display on the right contains the configuration settings associated with Failure Detection Recovery and on the left side of the display is the property page icon with Failure Detection Recovety as the name Click on the property page Failure Detection Recovetry will display the properties asso
457. y are executed Otherwise the GSW Universal Terminal Server determines if a User ID based logon script exists If so then it is executed Otherwise if a Global Logon scripts exists then it is executed USER Logon Scripts A different Logon script can be set up for each User Id This allows Users to have individually defined batch files to accommodate different requirements of Users The batch files are created and set up by the system administrator for each user in the system They must be in the directory InstallationPath scripts DomainUsers UserLoginID or InstallationPath scripts LocalUsers UserLoginID or InstallationPath scripts UserLoginID Of course InstallationPath and UserLoginID are replaced with the actual values Ifboth k_start batandc_start bat exist then only c_start bat is executed You may call k_ start bat fromc start bat Ifthe UserLogonID script folder does not exist then the GSW UTS will determine if a Global Logon script exists 28 If the batch files exist 205 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The system administrator must ensure that the directory permissions for the above files and directories are correct Remember the user and the SYSTEM must be able to read the batch file They are executed in the security context of the user EXAMPLE LOGON SCRIPTING AUTOMATIC EXECUTION OF A PROGRAM UPON CONNECTION Here is an example script to allow automatic execution of a Physician s Office Application medic
458. y failure If a reconnection is not performed within a specified time period then Graceful Termination will initiate For the fastest reconnection and minimal prompting you may want to couple the Session Saver with AutoLogon page 171 Especially useful in RF Data collection applications Upon a client or link failure the SSH2 Telnet session and associated NIVDM are normally terminated eliminating any orphaned sessions This is the default behavior However there are times when it may be desirable to Save the Session giving the user the opportunity to reconnect to the session to resume work in progress This session is termed to be Saved or Suspended This feature can be enabled as described below Three methods exist to connect to a Suspended session They ate the Session Reconnect Method and the Attach Method and using Team Services Recover page 126 The Session Reconnect Method is defined to automatically recognize when a User or User from a specific IP address is Logging In and to determine if they have any Saved or Suspended sessions If so then the telnet SSH server will automatically reconnect the user to their existing Saved Session 17 These terms are used interchangeably 144 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 The Attach Method is defined to allow a User that is a member of the Gwtn Monitors group to identify any Suspended sessions and to Attach connect to that session Please see the Session Monitor for more information on
459. y for the Share operation 2 Team Originating Member Team Member Team Services Description Accept Operation Operation Mode Transfer Transfers your session to another device F1 F2 Swap Transfers your session to another device F3 F4 Transfers the other session to your device Share One session is shared by two devices F5 F6 Recover Recovers a suspended session to your device n a F7 My TS Info Display Session ID User Name IP Address n a F8 Reserved n a F9 Cancel Cancel Team Services Operation Exit Menu n a F10 Enter Team Open Team Services Menu y Configurable hot key Services Table 22 Teams Services Function Keys A configurable hot key is used to enter GSW Team Services The default hot key is C x When initiated Team Services presents the user with a menu that is used to transfer a session recover a session swap sessions share a session etc Learn more about the configurable hot key on page 138 116 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Dynamic non cryptic text abbreviations for small screens Devices come with a variety of screen sizes offering large display areas on stationary or truck mount devices and smaller display areas on smaller hand held mobile devices With GSW Team Services the text is automatically adjusted based on the number of columns and rows defined with the Mode Con command page 286 in your logon script If there are not enough columns to display the complete Te
460. y selecting the appropriate number Be sure to set the 3rd party client emulation mode to the same emulation as the one selected on the server The terminal emulation options available are e DEC VT 100 e IBM 3101 e DEC VI 220 320 420 e IBM 3151 e SCO Console e AlphaCom This is chosen when using the AlphaCommunicator Telnet e AT386 Client e Wyse 50 e PDCurses for VT 220 320 420 e Wyse 60 159 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Enter 0 for DEC VT 100 emulation 1 for DEC VT 220 320 420 2 for SCO Console emulation 3 for AT386 4 for Wyse 50 5 for Wyse 60 6 for IBM 3101 7 for IBM 3151 8 for AlphaCom emulation 9 for PDCurses for VT 220 320 420 If you do not want to be prompted for the emulation mode each time you log on using a 3 party client then you may set an environment variable on a per user basis using Logon Scripting described later in the User s Guide Page 205 The environment variable for the terminal emulation is gwtn_term For example to select SCO Console emulation you would enter set gwtn_term 2 in the Logon Script for a particular user NOTE No spaces are allowed when setting environment variables For example set gwtn_term 2 is correct set gwtn_term 2 is not correct 160 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS Graphic Characters Or use legacy style below JANUARY 27 2015 Use the GSW GUI Configuration Tool User Terminal Emulations see page 392 Third party clients do not always handle graphic charact
461. your team members to minimize down time when ordinary work flow interruptions occur and resume work with unmatched speed and ease Strict Teams Often workflows are specific to distinct groups or teams and the administrator wants to allow only members within that group to have the capability initiate Team Services operations SHARE SWAP TRANSFER and RECOVER With Strict Teams system administrators can create multiple Teams such that only members within each team can participate in Team Services operations with other members of their team This is particularly useful in Application Server Environments and in situations when the pool of SSH Telnet users span multiple departments locations or companies Individuals may be assigned to more than one team allowing flexibility such as supervisors overseeing multiple teams or specifying floating individuals for overflow situations e Only users defined as part of a team can participate in Team Services operations with other members in the team e Organize groups departments locations into Teams such that they can help each other but not impact other Teams Configuration instructions and examples are contained in the tsgroups txt file This file resides in the gs_uts installation root folder 113 GEORGIA SOFTWORKS JANUARY 27 2015 Team Services General Operation Overview Team Services operations are straightforward to understand and use Below is an overview for using GSW Team Services

GSW Telnet Server for Windows User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents